Home

1 - Mitsubishi Electric

1. Operation details are described on the Operation details are described in Hint on following pages the following pages 3 GT Designer2 C WINDOWS Desktop production A production A GTD 3 GT Designer2 C WINDOWS Desktop production A production A GTD i Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window F Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window t a JO ca A RS mags ne wl BR OEA a EDSN gt Z xom soer OA Adee fe 100 F OM Chse ew 16 100 5 Tg NY Close All e sy amp Q 23 me 8 amp w at Se EB GB SE SL oh 7 Ja S sy 23 a Sb SL 8 2 1a amp X Bld ea i Display Overlay Screen MPa te An otek I Display Overlay A Previous Screen ar ee wre bens es g a Woe e a a TD X ETURA S a ee plicit eel Hae Proiect Newt Screen Vln menu 7 Wat pats EATS AR L a Ea E ima UnOpened Screens wens Cae oa 2 Line_A 2 Lin Change Window Size 4 Oo 3 Line_B 3 Lin L H Window Screen a Window s Properties 2 S a Report Screen Report E N O E L Common Settings EEA Commons Header Repea System Environment Bl System Environment Report Report EP Hard Copy x P Hard Copy x zZ A Project 3 Library a
2. Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication window Help 15 x JO soa at eage ne BO BNR Lu 4romAC CO AAaURoOweE e ho AA Ane A oN orr oe wo Z m D ala m a gt 57 Q 23 e BES of a HH RSE ALA Q JA S X la a ojx gt T Display Overlay Screen O 5 21 Project Base Screen Z O o UW LL 26 D O ce 2 me Base Screen 2 Secu 0 T A Detailed Explanat Use Screen Color No Patte L zZ Fg Col ro Bg Col O A aye i BO fa A To 2 02 How to edit Zo iE Refer to Section 8 1 5 Pasting figure data of BMP DXF file for how to edit the imported BMP data KA Point f Note the following points for capturing data A ma e It may take some time for the screen to appear when a large captured figure TT CI B p is imported or when the screen on which many figures are pasted is 26 aS opened ie EE ru e When the size of the captured data is bigger than that of temporary area it Ae is automatically adjusted to fit the temporary area e Some files that are created with DirectX or animation application cannot be captured i O K5 o Z 2 EO Z u Z A L L ma cn O zZ v m LUI m Z lt z x Y A 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 12 8 1 4 Capture function 8 1 5 Pasting figure data of BMP file This function imports figure data BMP DXF AutoCAD drawing file format to GT Desinger2 and pastes the figure on the scr
3. numbers Base screen 1 to Base screen 2 is batch edited Devices Switching screen Color of objects figures on the device start trigger device of selected area in the editing hard copy etc set in the screen is batch edited common settings are batch edited 9 1 Edit Function 9 12 9 1 3 Batch editing attributes of objects figures scattered on multiple screens Batch edit Operation method The batch edit method is described G Select the Tools Batch Edit Device Batch Edit Switch Lamp Shape Batch Edit Color Batch Edit menu The setting dialog box appears Refer to the following descriptions for setting Find Now Device color figure specified on the screen are searched Color Batch edit is performed i All Screen ie Edited Screen Screen Range Frarn 1H w S Base Screen Items set on the edit list are C Categor Switch cleared Selected Area Items selected for change are deleted Common Settings The setting of screen is excluded Device No of Objects NewDeviceNo Device Point E E A a Attribute for batch edit is selected Device number Device number is batch edited Attribute Color Color is batch edited Shape Figures of touch s
4. screen type base window screen report screen 4 39 4 8 Operating Multiple Screens 4 8 2 Making editing screen active 4 9 Changing Screen Property Screen settings such as screen number or home are changed Lu gt ED Select the desired screen to change the property in the project workspace and select Property by right i clicking on the mouse z alzi By x T Display Overlay Screen T Display Overlay Screen z E Project F424 Project z A 4 Base Screen ke O Line A T 2 3 Line B 7 z ao Window Screen a Report Screen Close All Aid Common Settings Cut 2 oy Comment Z gt Wa Copy E Bosses HiT Parts z ow om Ba Paste 59N 3 Sound Files D g Delete 6 on Previous Screen f 2 Nest Screen Pe tt nO UnOpened Screens A Rename Open Image View 2 Library 3 Project Gi Ow Z Y LO One 9 ni ro Ow DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 4 9 Changing Screen Property 4 40 D The screen property dialog box appears Refer to the following for details of settings gt Section 4 5 Creating a New Screen E Basic tab The screen number or name is changed Screen Property Basic Ausiliary Key window Screen Number Screen Name Main menu Screen Type Base Screen Y Security 0 Detailed Explanation Use screen color Pattern z 4 41 4 9 C
5. z LU Display on Windows a ojx UserLib olx S Function CAMELSECSGTD2 Userl sag O x 5 3 Library File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Hi 2 6 User Library z cs a3 My Favorites s Back SA Search L4 Folders E History E Lal 1 Measuring Switch i Address CMELSEC GTD2UserLib Go H Switch Z H Figure i E O 9 Key H J Special Parts g Ooo _My O01 Measu O02 Stark Favorites be Switch Ibe Switch Ibe 20 ie re gt No Ti Poa E ay 32 Lay 3 objectis 6 08 KE My Computer ve z eo N DY hra ww zZ Zao Og On WwW Z NA ii nO A cii ad TE Ow JE Z QO O W ag Lu i Z ES Ce pire IT LA QO O LI O Me oO A Or Z 2 HO Z u Z A L m gt X x ad co Z T 5 DRAW AND EDIT 7 1 What is Library 7 3 7 1 1 What you need to know before using library 7 1 2 Basic operation of library Basic operation of library workspace Select the item for operation and right click the mouse to select the setting item As shown below the display varies depending on the selected items a CAMELSEC GTO2 UserLib Z Be Library aE User Library BER My Favorites iB 1 Switch Te 230 Switch H E G witch A Paste BNL Figure Delete H E Kep 9 Special P Rename TA Open Image view y Property eu Project Category 34 Libram Right click the mouse when the library is selected
6. ef CAMELSEC GTD2 UserLib Ea Library Ea User Library ALR My Favorites i 129 of 1 Switch oof 2 3D Switch 124 ee 3 Lamp Seer 1 Measuring Switch ee B a 2 Star D New Template gh Edit Algal 2 HE Switch SPY Esa Figure fa Paste H E Key an Delete H Special P Rename GP Open Image View a Property E Project a Category 3 Library Right click the mouse when the template is selected nIm CANMELSEC GTO2 UserLib s El 3e Eg User Library EMR My Favorites 1 Switch nt 230 Switch ta 3 Lamp Ata 1 Measuring Switch hid 1 Numerical Display aa 2 Start Switch g 1 Start Switch A eta 2 Start Switch B H Lamp H E Switch H E Figure H E Key H E Special Parks New User Library Folder Load User Library Folder Store to User Library Folder a Project B Category 3 Library Right click the mouse at a space New Template New User Library Rename Open Image View Property New User Library Folder Load User Library Folder The number and name of the registered library template is changed A new user library folder is created for the specified path A user library file is searched in the folder of the specified path If the user library file exists open the user library The user library folders displayed in the current library workspace are stored in the specified Store to User Library Folder user lib
7. Shows the items including detailed explanation manual and the chapter section item Product List The following shows the product list of GT Works2 or GT Designer2 Vl yp SW1D5C GTWK2 E About installation method of GT End user software Software or License agreement Works2 GT Designer2 license agreement registration form SW1D5C GTD2 E m We don t guarantee the commercially available Microsoft Windows Operating System based software products that have been introduced in this manual m We hold the copyrights of this software package m No part of this manual may be transcribed or duplicated in any form without prior permission by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation m We have attempted to cover all the revisions of software and hardware but this manual may not contain the latest revisions m The software of this product requires one license to be purchased per computer m We permit the user to use this software package including this manual based on the Software License Agreement m We are not liable for consequences or influences due to this software package including this manual m The specifications of this software package and the descriptions in this manual may be altered in future without prior notice 1 OVERVIEW if gt a gi gt 1 1 Overview This manual explains the GT Designer2 system configuration GT Designer2 screen configuration basic
8. 3 Common Settings System Environment Report Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help Osa aA A eorne BBN Z vom Joer aaa fis z ijo zifis z amp ON oFF bev 10 Z 2 am s amp Q 23 wc BES O a HR AE AL Ai PIB SS la E gt B 1 Main menu I Display Overlay Screen Project Base Screen 1 Main menu E 2Line_A E 3Line_B Window Screen E 1 PLC1 0 monitor Report Screen a Common Settings System Environment Report Category _ QO Hint Method of opening other than workspace 1 Opening screen from menu Main menu Perform either of the following operations e Click amp Open of toolbars Standard e Select Screen Open from the menu The dialog box to open the screen is displayed Click the button Double click the desired screen directly for opening Aas Project FJ Base Screen Al Window Screen Fl Report Screen 4 19 4 6 Opening Closing Screen 4 6 1 Opening screen o The screen image view dialog box is displayed Double click the desired screen Screen Image List LU Screen Type a Lu gt O Zz 1 Main menu 2 Line_ 3 Line _B O SO LW LL 26 gt nO zZ eo Ke mae gt Ot bz Ae O On ZO i DO
9. dialog box operation creation of new project data transfer to GOT and convenient operation for screen O PPAT e editing a 2 LL Manuals DE MO Three types of manuals are available for GT Designer2 Refer to the appropriate manual depenfding on the purpose B zZ The manuals below are stored in PDF files and included with the product 2 a o hra ww 2 Z 69 On 20 WI k ai DBO Startup Introductory Purpose Reference Manual Operating Manual Manual z Install the product into the personal computer Seren T O O r zZ w E 2 O Wl Create a project Overview Details ad ir Create screens Overview Details 2z naaa gO Eg ce D fi QO raw figures Overview Details a ae ee O m Make common settings Overview paas g a mi 25 O Z u Z Arrange set objects ea Dae ares Ow a gt Transfer data to the GOT Overview Details oe i zZ ep 2 Q W Q CZ lt x z a Q 1 1 Overview 1 1 1 Startup amp Introductory manual The product installation method is described Examples of simple screen creation and operation on the GOT are described Reference Manual Object figure screen specifications and object setting methods are described Operating Manual Screen configuration screen customizing and procedures from project creation to data transfer on the GT Designer2 are described 1 1 Overview 1 2 Feature The GT Designer2 has various functions to improve the drawing e
10. E3 Library User Library FL My Favorites Ha 1 Lamp 1 2 Lamp 2 3 Lamp 3 Ap 4 Figure Ap 5 Figure B 6 Numerical Display Ap 7 3D Switc i Ar EDET C Lamp C Switch ma d Cim en 5j a Project B Category Library workspace Library image list GD on Otay A Be 1 Lamp 1 2 Lamp 2 3 Lamp 3 gt X X a Z 5 _ 012345 4 Figure 5FigueB 6 Numerica 3 Library 73D Swite 83D Swite DRAW AND EDIT 7 3 Creating Original Library 7 9 7 3 2 Copying registered library template 7 3 3 Deleting registered library template User created library or registered template is deleted D Select the user created library template for deletion ee Bl x Library Image List Function C MELSEC GTD2 Userl On i a Oe e Bs mG soho 1 Lamp 1 2 Lamp 2 3 Lamp 3 El 3 Library E Ez User Library B GR ne Favorites 7 i ig 1 Lamp 1 HA 2 Lamp 2 k 3 Lamp 3 AB 4 Figure A p 5 Figure B Be 6 Numerical Display 012345 B 3D Switch 4 Figure 5FigueB 6 Numerica AE L Lamp C Switch ro fest Cimen j 3 Project Bl Category 3 Library 73D Switc 83D Switc Library workspace Library image list D Perform the operations below 1 Deleting in library workspace Right click the mouse to select the Delete menu 2 Deleting in library image list Click the Delete button D The confirm template delete dialog box appears Click the button
11. Va g GT Designer2 VersionL 2 1 2 Operating environment The operating environment of GT Designer2 is shown below Item Personal computer Operating system Computer CPU Hard disk space Disk drive Display color Display 6 2 1 Description PC AT compatible personal computer that Windows runs on Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Operating System Service Pack 3 or later English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions 1 Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Service Pack 4 or later English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Service Pack 2 or later English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions 2 4 5 Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions 2 4 5 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions 3 4 5 Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System English S
12. Comment List 1 Line A stopped 2 Line B stopped 3 Line C stopped 4 Line D stopped 5 Emergency stop limit switch operated Check the product 6 Product limit switch does not operate Check for presence absence of the product 7 Hydraulic pressure of finishing machine 1 is low Supply hydraulic oil 1 Text Color Black Reverse No Blink No HQFont No Style Regular 2 Text Color Black Reverse No Blink No HQFont No Style Regular 3 Text Color Black Reverse No Blink No H Font No Style Regular 4 Text Color _ Black Reverse No Blink No HQFont No Style Regular 5 Text Color Red Blink Low H Font No Style Bold 6 Text Color Red Blink Low HQFont No Style Bold 7 Text Color Red Blink Low HQFont No Style Bold Library List of registered libraries is output as shown below A Script List of script files is output as shown below A Library My Favorite 1 Lamp01 2 Lamp02 3 Lampo3 4 Switch A 5 Switch B 6 Switch C 7 Title 1 Line 1 2 Tank 3 Allow 4 Switch 1 5 Switch 2 Voice List of registered voice files is output as shown below A 1 Script Information Script File No Comment Modified Script File Path 1 Script 1 a C WINDOWS deskto p script 1 txt 2 Script 2 a C3 WINDOWS deskto p script 2 txt 3 Script 3 C WINDOWS deskto p script 3 txt 4 Script 4 C WINDOWS deskto p script 4 txt Category
13. Item F Source Path Storage location of the panelkit of the GT Designer is specified Fag x S Panelkit files in the Source path are displayed The selected panelkit file is imported to the GT Select pkit files x Desinger2 D Click the button to import the panelkit Point 7 Panelkit No and user library No As the panelkit and user library are assigned to the same No the following message is displayed if the user library of the same No has already been created To allow the user library to be overwritten click the button To prevent the user library from being overwritten click the or button The user library No can be changed on the user library property Confirm Overwrite ES ltem No 7 library exists already Do you want to Overwrite Tes to 7 4 Utilizing Panelkit of GT Designer 7 21 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT i gt X lt a a l Z N DRAW AND EDIT O DRAW AND EDIT 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 1 1 Drawing figures Draw each type of figure as follows Line Line FreeForm Rectangle Circle including ellipses GOT A900 Series only Arc including R elliptic arc 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 1 1 Drawing figures e Line e Figure Line menu e 4 L
14. D Enter a text 1 When the mouse cursor changes to click the mouse on the text drawing position 2 When the Text Figure dialog box appears input a text The input will be immediately reflected on the screen 3 Click the button to close the dialog box Text E Text Numerical display Set as Default Clear Default Po Test Style Pegar gt Direction Horizontal Vertical Text Color Alignment Leth Bente Right ext Solid olor M Size ha HM a elie Intersal a P Arab Guality Fort Category Others ka rea _ 4 27 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 4 7 3 Figure drawing text input _ ue Hin tl Changing the text size Select the text to be resized and then drag the handle jg to change its size Q The size can also be changed in the above dialog gt Example When resizing a text gt Z O H aie mee gt O 4 7 4 Object function setting This section provides a series of operations for setting the following object functions Refer to the following manual for object details ef L gt GT Designer2 Version Reference Manual E e Numerical Display object ae e Bit Lamp object e Bit Switch object A Setting the Numerical Display object A series of operations for setting the Numerical Display object is briefly explained here ED Click Numerical Display on the Object toolbar Z Ot Z Y LO On Z0
15. 2 Switch grouped objects on the GT Designer are treated as normally grouped objects on the GT Designerz2 3 Category shows none Category none Point P Opening monitor screen data with GT Designer2 The monitor screen data which are opened with the GT Designer2 cannot be saved as a GT Designer format file Using monitor data of GOT800 Series Action of the GOT800 Series may be different from that of the GOT900 Series for some functions Use of the GOT800 compatible mode can change the functions with different actions to actions of the GOT800 Series K gt This section 1 GOT800 compatible mode For functions that have no compatibility with the GOT800 compatible mode a user should change the sequence program or the monitor data This section 2 Different actions of functions between GOT800 Series and GOT900 series and corrective actions Appendix 3 Using Existing Data App 7 Appendix 3 2 Precautions 1 GOT800 compatible mode Select the Common GOT800 Compatible Mode from the menu D The setting dialog box appears Refer to the following descriptions for setting GOTS800 Compatible Mode Ea Change the order of switch action The order of switch action i changed to the order of GOTSO0 T Delete USER ROM CHECK button Delete the user rom check button of self check In utility menu Enable change of XOR display in part display While display mode of part display is 0A grouped
16. Item Display Figure Object Figure and Object Show Terminal Display Ctrl Alt 0 Alt 1 Object OF Selection i w Adjust Direct Text Size i l Grid k F5 Guidelines w Display Zoom Figure Edit Touch rea Frame Region Object w Display Touch Area w Figure 0 bject a w Display ON Image same Type Figure a ID Custom Object w Figure Object 3 Screen Properties Same Type ig Custom Description Displays the guideline Select a figure as the display target of the guideline Select an object as the display target of the guideline Select a figure and object as the display target of the guideline Same type Select the same type of data as the display target of the guideline Custom Displays the guideline setting dialog box 8 25 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 2 5 Aligning figures and objects Guideline Setting Lines m v Lett Right a z Center of Width Center of Height 5 Top Bottom Display Target Figure Cbject Y a Display Application Range 2 Dot z mD LL 26 D O Item Description Line display Set the lines to be displayed as the guideline E Select the line display target The guideline is displayed when the moving figure or object touches the o Line display target DY target z 5 oy f On Displaying distance Specify the displaying distance of the figure or object z w i t5 Drag and move the figure or object z O Own D
17. MITSUBISHI 2 iwgner2 Version GT Des W O Q ad aq CD Jo oo OD C ia O 40 fs MELSOFT EI See P martreze aaraa PARARE RAEI viet YDI a n n n n d Bee 2 ARE See E MITSUBISHI TOTAL FA SOLUTION COOSA Peata a et hatate SW2D5C GTWK2 SW2D5C GTD2 MELSOFT Integrated FA Software SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Please read it carefully before using this product Before using this product please read carefully the manual and its related manuals introduced thereinafter and pay full attention to the safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION Note that the CAUTION level may lead to serious consequences according to the circumstances D Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions DANGER resulting in death or severe injury A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Always follow instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Test operation precautions Please read this manual carefully and understand it thoroughly before executing system monitor special module monitor and circuit monitor bit device on off current value change of word device setting value of timer
18. Parity None SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 Flow control None b Advanced Restore Defaults Click Advanced If you are having problems with this device click Troubleshoot to start the troubleshooter Troubleshoot Device usage Use this device enable v OK Cancel Uncheck Use FIFO buffers Advanced Settings for COM1 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN O1 Use FIFO buffers requires 16550 compatible UART Select lower settings to correct connection problems Defaults Select higher settings for faster performance Receive Buffer Low 1 J High 14 14 Transmit Buffer Low 1 J High 16 16 COM Port Number COM1 Ma LLI O z ZO Q g gu mO PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable 5 16 lt Method 2 gt The screens and operations apply to Windows 98 Choose Start Settings Control Panel 2 Windows Update Programs Favorites Documents 4 Choose Control Panel ctive Desktop A Windows Update Double click the System icon The System Properties dialog box will appear E Control Panel lol x File Edit View Go Favorites Help Kal 4 2 8 2 e x le Back Foner Up Cut Copy Paste Undo Delete Properties Views Address 3 Control Panel a T h Be a Accessibil
19. 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Mitsubishi GOT Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY ee IN neesan a a a ter A 1 Ca tions Tor USING IMIS SOMWAN Ci ecas a E EE TO A 2 REVA ION e a fe emo nN fe oem entree A 4 INER OPIN HON aie coe tse te easiest eee clase abae degen Pesan E ot ete aatodesaat eons A 6 CONTENT O ersari E OEO E A 6 Function QUICK IREICTONICE eerus a AS A 10 MNG a E EE EA A 18 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS 2 ccc ccc ese eee eeese ese eeeeeeeeeeaeeavaeeaueas A 19 HOWTO USe TNS Wie al letteeaseeiiaa rie an steko toes oo aatcaee who ae a cee en nue cot eae a Raa e ceases A 23 ad B tiS barre tr Re a te A 24 ie dal 04 ern aeaa 1 1to1 7 f Drs a 4 16 2 eee nena ren Bteere Sn REE ete Eom E Re Oe eee en ee 1 1 CAFE RR Ee PY N OEOD 1 3 1 2 1 Easy to use OG halOM a ascot eS Aen oa a tean crac ecen et acduten ea gasstetest aaincese aac meansssste sc a eanteeecaeeen ie 1 3 M22 Serul WC CON S siete re aa vtasacrbind ni witb ancdaapatadiete a a th da iti abo laid niuina taeda a das a 1 5 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION onanan 2 1to2 6 2 1 System Configuration in Creating Monitor Screen cccccceecceeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 2 1 ZEA SY SION COMNGUMAUON geoide i dentine Detrenuaet gratuit Coteau ina a Meee alien a
20. 4 6 2 Closing screen The open screen is closed Perform either of the following operations e Select Screen Close from the menu e Click on the title bar of each screen The open screen is closed _ Hint Closing all screens xN ae e Select Screen Close All from the menu to close all open screens 4 6 Opening Closing Screen 4 6 2 Closing screen 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor This section explains the basic operations on the drawing screen editor i i i Lu For details of figures and objects refer to the following section or manual gt Lu K gt Figures Chapter 8 DRAW AND EDIT 5 K gt Objects GT Designer2 Version g Reference Manual 6 4 7 1 Object placement area and display area on GOT 7 z0 The drawing screen editor for base screen and window screen provides two areas screen display area and DZ temporary area nO The temporary area is the area for temporary placement of objects and figures during screen layout change This feature enables the screen layout to be smoothly changed O EATER lolx q Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help DSR Oe sn SBN i IPA NX Yet sy EC a ST A elie 59 57 ove B E O l KRM CI SN P knoe ee D i Tl Display Overlay a h E aj Project a Sea Screen 1 BS C Window Screen Sioa ioe een M A0123 80123 4 Taag To Se __ ji Categ
21. 9 ni ro Ow DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 4 24 4 7 2 Basic operations for object placement 4 25 Point P Placing and moving a figure or object 1 When placing a figure or object Performing the operation with the key held down places the figure or object inside the screen display area Even if an attempt is made to place in the temporary area the target will be placed at the right or bottom end of the screen display area Actually placed position Cursor position 2 When moving a figure or object Performing the operation with the key held down moves and places the figure or object inside the screen display area Actually placed position Cursor position 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 4 7 2 Basic operations for object placement 4 7 3 Figure drawing text input The following explains how to draw a frame line and text How to draw a frame line An example of drawing a rectangle is provided here Refer to the following section for details of figure drawing and text input OVERVIEW gt Section 8 1 1 Drawing figures D Click H Rectangle on the Figure toolbar The mouse cursor changes to CONFIGURATION SYSTEM D Draw a rectangle 1 Left click at the starting point 1 below SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 2 Drag the mou
22. A Screen type for opening is selected Base screen Base screen is displayed Screen Type oa Window screen Window screen is displayed Z oi Z Y LO On ZO EZ niz ro Ow Report screen Report screen is displayed Screen image is displayed in a list Screen display list Double click each screen to open the screen X Jump The screen number is selected to open the screen TE Oz Z gO Ce Eg 2 Opening screen continuously STT LA QO E Select the drawing screen of the desired type base screen window screen for continuous opening and make the screen active O Ka GT Designer 2 C Documents and Settingsikondout Desktop Data input_display GTD W Project Edit Yiew Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help O 2a gt p Q Deka dad amp moon oe fT Bh A 2 SYOBAC COAA am e lino e e o olor low o o gt A lala o e sy Q 23 ast BE Re i FER OF AL S Ol OM lb a Display Overlay Screen Ma l BF Projesi MO J A L ees Product C Tank flow 1 Product C tank flow B B 2 Data input display 2 Data input display 3 Message display Window Screen ca Report Screen Common Settings ah Environment gt A aeti No Toon x alo Pug Status Observation Form HW sign 2 l 1 yee W O sign iow l aJ Project Category 3 Library O i Z 7 U Sorting from small value Screen Number element Left Screen Name Data input display s Right
23. Base window Report Device Object Print to File o List Screen List Print to Printer ON Jw OFF f Details Screen Image Iv ON Print Object ID Print Devices Print Window Preview Print Object ID Print Devices Base tab inion Select whether the object setting to be output in List or Details format for the screen setting check Selectable only for output to file Fixed to List for output to printer Set the image ON OFF to be output to a screen list When both are checked both of ON and OFF screen images are output When neither of them is checked no screen list is output Set the image ON OFF to be output to a screen image When both are checked both of ON and OFF screen images are output When neither of them is checked no screen image is output O In addition to a normal screen image the screen image on which the object ID or devices are put can be output Print Object ID Outputs the screen image on which the object ID is put O O Outputs the screen image on which devices are put o O Print Window i Outputs the screen image on which windows are put O Preview 6 6 6 1 Printing method 6 1 2 Setting items 2 Window tab Items for Print Base Window Report Device Whjent Firat toee M Screen List Print to Printer gt A ON i O D Details m OFF Screen Image
24. Bmp Base OFF Bmp Base ON object ID Bmp Base OFF object ID Bmp z Base ON device Bmp Base OFF device Bmp ti 09 b Window screen cas Window ON Bmp Window OFF Bmp Window ON object ID Bmp Window OFF object ID Bmp 6 Window ON device Bmp Window OFF device Bmp o c Report Parts Library 66 Report Bmp Parts Bmp H Library Bmp First shows the library No and second one shows the ici template No respectively 2 Text file of Title list CSV TXT Screen setting information CSV TXT lt Common setting CSV TXT Device list CSV TXT Device detail CSV TXT Comment list CSV TXT ce Lu Parts CSV TXT Library CSV TXT Script CSV TXT Voice CSV TXT Category CSV TXT E Lu De E g0 Remark 1 Ifa file which was saved in CSV format once by GT Designer2 is opened by i other software this may change the format settings and the file may not be si QO correctly displayed In this case adjust the settings by using the corresponding menu or other of the software 2 Ifa file which was saved in TXT format once by GT Designer2 is opened by other software this may disrupt the settings of tab or space and the text may appear misaligned In this case adjust the text poison by adding deleting tabs or spaces ep O LL O X oO Z H a ou A E 2 LU LL Output image When set to CSV file format The output image in CSV file format is
25. Select Project Import Project from the menu The Import Project dialog box appears Import Project Source Project Browse Destination data number Base Image Windows E Image Report E mage Comment FT Parts Image Sound Files E Browse Import Close Click the button and select a project to be imported i e source project or directly enter the path After the selection the project data is displayed in tree format Import Project E gupes ejer CAWINDOWS Desktop praduction A GTD E C production A Destination data number Base fi H mae Window Moo H o mae Report fi H o ma Comment 1S Ane supply cr Pats E _image Sound Fies 1 Browse _ Import Close 9 35 9 6 Utilizing other project data 9 6 1 Importing data 4 When selecting screen parts or sound data for utilization set it the No to be used in the destination project When selecting multiple data set the head No If the data of the same No already exists in the destination project the existing data will be deleted i e overwritten Use the or button to check the data in the destination project All common settings will be overwritten o Z O H O Z 5 LL l gt LL m aa 5 Import Project Source Project CAWINDOWS Desktop production A GTD The base screen No 1 and No 2 are imported into the de
26. 04 4 58 Entering text anaana ees eek aia ace ae a 8 6 Error message for data transfer 5 37 F FIGOUIDULS arae r e a E A EC AA 6 1 G Getting built in memory information 5 19 Grouping ungrouping nasan aana anaana 8 21 H How to use Help 000 eee 3 34 l Inputting multiple language 9 26 INStalIING OS ude ood oad sae he wees 5 24 Installing ROM_BIOS 9 21 5 31 Index 1 L Library Changing library property 7 13 Copying registered library template 7 9 Creating Original library 7 7 Deleting registered library template 7 10 Editing registered objects and figures 7 11 Loading library from file 7 17 Pasting object or figures from library 7 6 Registering objects or figures to library 7 saving library 00000 eee eee 7 14 M Memory space required for data transfer 5 8 Menu configuration anaana aa aaaea 3 8 O Operating environment 06 2 1 Operation of workspace n a anaana anana 3 4 P Painting figure nananana ee 8 8 Pasting figure data of BMP file 8 10 8 13 Pasting figure data of DXF file 8 10 FUMING se deca a a ta Sd ds a a Aa 6 1 Project CIOSHAG enna a settee eee eek etatetthe 4 11 Creating a new project 4 3 ODENING cna sk WS Gee dd ete aoe Sol eee
27. 32400 bps Bee Z LL 2 To On 26 EZ GE Z Q O U O1 Update OF Cancel Update Communicate with GOT dialog box Communication Configuration dialog box Communication configuration tab Ma LL O Z ZO Q g Su mO GOT A900 Series E E F Port No PC PC port connected to the GOT is selected connected to the GOT is selected ul O The transmission speed between the menere e and the GOT is set A 5 Baudrate o e Set the rate suitable for the PC Z5 EO Updat When the settings are changed the settings are updated g r ate iL Click the Update button to update the settings ale gt X L A oO Z T D Q Ww Q Z lt x z or Q 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable 5 18 5 2 1 Setting communication 9 2 2 Getting built in memory information The method to check the built in memory is shown below D Perform either of the following operations e Click the Communication Memory Information menu e Click the Communication To From GOT menu As the setting dialog box appears click the Memory Information tab The setting dialog box appears Click the button to get the built in memory information Communicate with GOT 05 Install GOT ROM_BIOS Install GOT Communication configuration Download GOT Upload gt Computer Special data C Project Untitled Base Screen 0 Window Screen 7 Special Module monitor data 7 05
28. Aa E Bar code Monitors status of device and write value to device or operates GOT when condition meets Monitors status of device and write read device data when condition meets Outputs the device writing and sound at specified time Collects numerical data when condition meets and prints the numerical data and corresponding code Outputs the GOT monitor screen to printer or memory card Uses operation panel to execute device writing Writes data read by barcode reader to device Outputs sounds Displays video Page Page 11 1 Page 11 12 Page 11 22 Page Page 12 1 Page 12 25 Page 12 31 Page 12 39 Page 12 46 Page 12 50 RGB display Displays PC screens Page 12 68 8 Others Set overlay screen Ca r Ne Base 3 Set overlay screen from other screens Page 13 1 Test Changes device value via test window in monitor screen Page 13 10 9 Script function Script if b X1 OFF amp amp b X2 OFF amp amp b X3 OFF w D10 1 if b X1 ON amp amp b X2 OFF amp amp b X3 OFF w D10 2 Controls GOT display by scripts Page 14 1 if b X1 OFF amp amp b X2 ON amp amp b X3
29. Across N gt g0 oO D Selected figures are equally aligned in the e Align Down rs own vertical direction Eo e Edit Align Down QO Ex Alignment of figures and objects E D O K5 Dz Z 2 O Z u Z on gt or lt x oO ae Z 5 Before alignment Across Q LUI m Z lt lt L or A 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 22 8 2 5 Aligning figures and objects 8 23 Remark Across and Down A The Across function aligns the figures objects equally based on the top left coordinates of the leftmost and rightmost figures objects The Down function aligns the figures objects equally based on the top left coordinates of the uppermost and lowermost figures objects Across Before alignment After alignment Ref eference Aligned equally Down Before alignment After alignment Reference Aligned gt equally If figures are overlapped by alignment or similar operation click lt 3 Undo to reverse the last action L3 Section 8 2 4 Undo and redo 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 2 5 Aligning figures and objects Alignment in combination of multiple directions Select the desired figures and objects for alignment Perform either of the following operations e Click O k Align e Select the Edit Align Align from the menu 3 The Align dialog box appears Click any direction button T
30. Document Converter PX Developer m License key for GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviations and generic terms License m License key for GT SoftGOT2 Abbreviations and generic terms License key License key FD Description SWLID5C GTWK2 E SWOD5C GTWK2 EV SWOID5C GTD2 E SWOD5C GTD2 EV Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator 2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT2 Abbreviation of SWOD5C GPPW E EV SWLD5F GPPW E type software package Abbreviation of SWLID5C LLT E EV type ladder logic test tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions Abbreviation of document data conversion software Document Converter for GOT1000 series Abbreviation of SWLJD5C FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control Description GT15 SGTKEY U GT15 SGTKEY P Description A9GTSOFT LKEY P For DOS V PC SW5D5F SGLKEY J For PC CPU module m Others Abbreviations and generic terms OMRON PLC KEYENCE PLC KOYO EIl PLC SHARP PLC JTEKT PLC TOSHIBA PLC TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC HITACHI IES PLC HITACHI PLC FUJI FA PLC MATSUSHITA PLC YASKAWA PLC YOKOGAWA PLC ALLEN BRADLEY PLC GE FANUC PLC SCHNEIDER PLC SIEMENS PLC Temperature controller PC CPU module GOT
31. Line D stopped Emergency stop limit switch operated Check the product Product limit switch does not operate Check for presence absence of the product Hydraulic pressure of finishing machine 1 is low Supply hydraulic oil Text Color Black Reverse No Blink No HQFont No Style Regular Text Color Black Reverse No Blink No HQFont No Style Regular Text Color Black Reverse No Blink No HQFont No Style Regular Text Color Black Reverse No Blink No HQFont No Style Regular Text Color Text Color Red Blink Low HQFont Red Blink Low HQFont No Style Bold No Style Bold Text Color Red Blink Low HQFont No Style Bold Parts List of created parts is printed as shown below File Name C WINDOWS monitor_data GTD Date 2003 07 03 Parts 1 Crane A 2 Crane B 3 Car A 4CarB oe 6 Box B Vey Script List of set script files is printed as shown below File Name C WINDOWS full monitor_data GTD Date 2003 07 03 Script File C WINDOWS desktop script 1 txt 2 Script2 C WINDOWS desktop script 2 txt 3 Script 3 C WINDOWS desktop script 3 txt 4 Script 4 C WINDOWS desktop script 4 txt No Comment_ Modified Script File Path 1 Script 1 Library List of My favorites or user defined libraries is printed as shown below File Name C WINDOWS monitor_data GTD Da
32. To switch a screen on the GOT or to display the window screen use the screen switching device The GOT displays the screen for the value stored in the screen switching device Use the device set for the screen switching only for screen switching on the GOT When the screen switching device value is 1 When the screen switching device value is 1 gt 3 the GOT displays base screen 1 the GOT displays base screen 3 D100 L Jee ee OO ae Base screen1 Base screen2 Base screen3 Base screen1 Base screen2 Base screen3 4 53 4 12 Setting Screen Switching Device 4 13 Data Check Whether the monitor screen data created with the GT Designer2 has an error or not is checked ED Open all screens for data check Unopened screens are not data checked OVERVIEW Select Tools Data Check menu The data check dialog box is displayed Set the check items for data check and click the button Data Check Data Check CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Check ltem Check Iter E Touchkey Area Key Court E The total number of components kemon Store Object m Hest level of Overlay Screen Window Screen Data IA Rey Window Screen Data Scroll Object m Data Area Report Data Data Area SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 A Cary out Checking during sav
33. s080278e pdf Mie x gral File Edit Document Tools View Window Help e x gt AS l 4 vile gt amp Bookmark v LI SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Re for Using This REVISIONS St 4 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN CONTENTS einen a 4 1 Selecting Project at the Start of GT Designer2 reviations an eneric LL _ _ _ _ amp B Slleb e0 0m E Thumbnails C 1 Overview At the start of GT Designer2 the project selection dialog box is displayed Switches the display to the es in jo diag bon doy aL System conf iguration Select whether a projectis newly created or existing project data is edited page of the selected item i BL 3 Screen configuration of From the PC start menu select Start Progam MELSOFT Application GT Designer2 4 Creating and editing sere to start the GT Designer2 L 5 Data transfer operation 2 The project selection dialog box is displayed 6 Printing project file out 7 Using library 8 Draw and edit 9 Useful functions i z Appendices D Di C INDEX MENU Returns to INDEX MENU 3 35 3 5 How to use Help 3 6 How to View the Product Information The product information can be viewed in the following procedure Lu S m Help D Choose the Help About GTD2 menu 6 Operating Man
34. 1 Project ID When a part of the screen in the project data is downloaded the Project ID is verified with the one registered in the GOT If it results in the ID mismatch a message appears to urge the user to take caution It is recommended to register different Project IDs for different machines as this allows the caution message to appear when a part of the project data with an incorrect ID is downloaded by mistake cr However the project data can be downloaded even if the Project ID is incorrect D Z D 2 Q Lu Q CZ lt z Z QO 4 4 Setting the Project Title 4 12 4 5 Creating a New Screen Base screen window screen and report screen are newly created Refer to the manual below for the preparation method of the report screen Perform either of the following operations e Click e Select Screen ml New Screen e The screen property dialog box is displayed After setting the items below click the button The screen is created WE Basic tab Screen number name and type of the new screen are set Basic Ausiliay Key window M Base Screen o A Screen Number Screen Mame Screen Type Security Detaled Explanation Use screen color Pattern Foreground Item Screen Number Screen Name Screen Type Security 4 13 Background Cancel GOT A900 series ea ee Be ICTEEM alze Screen Property Basic urlan Backgrou
35. Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Shinko Technos Co Ltd Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Yamatake Corporation Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by RKC INSTRUMENT INC Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO LTD Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer2 Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU power supply module and I O module that are mounted to the base unit Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP IP network How to Use This Manual Specification of symbols used in this manual 4 3 Opening Closing Project A sAved project data is read from the project save source Gp Perform either of the following operations Click Open Select Project gt Open menu The open dialog box is displayed Lookin E productions A el 2 production GTD Files of type GT Designer2 Files GTD 7 Cancel 4 Select the location where the project is sav
36. BE BO Rectangle 718 eS ib Em Rectangle Filed e UW T Display Overlay Screen Pa LL Po ae Screen ied Cicle Filed 4 Z PL creen a Seat tO E Report Screen w Scale X H E Common Settings ae L Commeni t ce fd l Rectangular Range Area Ee a DXF Import DXF Window Area A O O LI O OS or PD EO Z uw Eam Type Base Screen Ma l ecuri 0 A LL ae lt L ad m l O Z dp Z m LUI m Z lt z x Y A 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 10 8 1 4 Capture function D There are two ways to specify a capture area Rectangular Range Area Selecting Rectangular Range Area minimizes the GT Designer2 window and the cursor shape changes to for Rectangular Range Area Drag the cursor from the starting point to the ending point to determine the range to be captured I My Computer Capture range E E ETEN E ENN FPE ETAN m See Draws a free form line one pixel wide Window Area Selecting Window Area minimizes the GT Designer2 window and the cursor changes to J for Window Area The area to be captured is framed with black line by moving into the client area Click the area to select it mA m Pa AE E eee Draws a free form line one pixel wide 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 1 4 Capture function 4 After clicking the screen of the GT Designer2 the captured figure can be imported to GT Designer2 as BMP data EGT Designer2 Untitled1 B 1
37. Comment Print to File items for Print File Format csv TAT E b4 Untitled E RA Title List H RA Screen Setting Information H RA Screen List H RA Screen Image he Common Settings Preview Fage Setup B i Library fv Script Files he Sound Files H he Category Select the printer for printing Name To make basic settings of the printer click the button Printer setting varies depending on the printer driver of Windows Printer Save the data in a file without printing from the printer Print to file Check Print to file and click the button The Save as dialog box is displayed Set the file target Select the items to be printed Items for print Refer to the following for the print image of each item Section 6 2 Printing example Fema ner iawn ones ketone fo raven Penes O o an tn Sneen ooo i o r ES pn upas ne danihepinratetedonbeerines O oss secnbocwinedning LO Refer to the next page for details of 1 to 3 6 2 6 1 Printing method 6 1 2 Setting items mn O OIOIOIOIOIO 1 Print preview Each icon of print preview is described Print Preview m x Perera Nt review O O O O U z LU gt X Li Dev ice Delailzs gt Bil Device O Z O SO LW LL YS D O Z O nae or L W 2 Zz 69 On 2 L i Q WW amp DO Ow A iW O Ow Zo 35 Page A97 GOT G
38. Eg Sw QAO Complete installation according to the GOT instruction PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable 5 24 5 2 5 Installing OS Installation method of the OS standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS is shown below D Click the Communication To From GOT Q The setting dialog box appears Click the OS Install gt GOT tab Refer to the following descriptions for setting After setting click the button to start installation Communicate with GOT Download GOT Upload Computer Memon information Special data 0 Install GOT ROM_BIOS Install GOT Communication configuration H C Standard monitor 0S H O Communication driver H O Extended function OS Data path DAMELSEC GTD2 05 GOT type ASS5GOT ASP GOT ASEOGOT Transter size O byte Install Communicate with GOT dialog box OS Install GOT tab The standard monitor OS communication driver and extended function OS are displayed in a nm tree Check the desired item for installation Refer to the following for details of items to be selected Function tree Standard monitor OS gt Section 5 1 1 2 Standard monitor OS x Communication driver lt gt Section 5 1 1 Communication driver Extended function C Section 5 1 1 4 Extended function OS Path drive folder that stores the OS to be
39. Extended Check the ROM _BIOS version installed within the GOT L gt Section 5 1 1 ROM_BIOS 6 PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT Project settings or screen image created on the GT Designer2 can be output to a file or printer The data output to a file can be used for various documents after editing with a commercially available word processor software Output to file Text CSV format data Screen setting information comment etc BMP format data Saved in hard disk Screen image of PC Point Print setting a Papers are printed in the portrait mode b Font and font size for printing cannot be changed c The header information date file name are automatically printed when output to a printer 6 1 Printing method 6 1 1 Setting method D Select the Project Print The print setting dialog box appears Refer to the following description for setting 6 1 Printing method 6 1 6 1 1 Setting method OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN DATA TRANSFER OPERATION ep O U pe O X oO Z H oO ou oO E 2 LU LL USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 6 1 2 Setting items Setting items for printing are described Print Printer Name Adobe LP 9200PS2 F5 Properties Status Default printer Ready Type AdobePS EPSON LP 3200PS2 F5 Whee Epceoee lp 9200ps2
40. FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 4 5 Creating a New Screen 4 16 4 6 Opening Closing Screen 4 6 1 Opening screen Screen data are imported on the currently editing project The procedures are as follows 4 17 Maximum 25 screens can be opened When changing the maximum number of screens that can be opened at a time set as follows Changed number of screens will be enabled at the next startup D Select the Project Preferences operation tab Check the Close an edited screen when opening another if the number of open screens is at its maximum Effective from the next startup of GT Designer2 box on the operation tab in the Preferences dialog box Preferences Toolbars Icon Operation View Release the selective state of tools IV System setting on new I Change object after create T Auto File Save Interval j Minute M Show Select Project dialog when you start GT Designer2 M Show Wizard on New Project Figure Object move on screen display area with ALT key move to temporary area I Close an edited screen when opening another if the number of open screens is at its maximum Effective from the next startup of GT Designer2 Close o Click the button 4 6 Opening Closing Screen 4 6 1 Opening screen Point P Number of screens that can be opened at a time 1 Open the screen from the workspace 2 Open the screen from the menu
41. GOT lt gt Section 5 2 6 Downloading monitor data F Lu ZY lt x Error No Error definition and cause Corrective action Om O Check items written to the GOT with r 2 the built in memory information ce a Delete items written to the GOT and O1 The GOT built in memory space runs download the data again Please make sure of transfering data 0015 l out during download Further data lt 3 Section 5 2 2 Getting built in size cannot be downloaded memory information Add more memory to the built in memory of the GOT Mounting memory board using M3 type X i LL 22 xO YE ret mats raat MLO Check the user area size with the built in memory information and download Since the data size to be downloaded is the data again O 0270 Transfer size error larger than the GOT user area size the lt _ 3 Section 5 2 2 Getting built in O _ data cannot be downloaded memory information 5 a Add the GOT memory Mounting f D memory board Using M3 type a Special data Section 5 2 7 Downloading special data Error No Error definition and cause Corrective action or Special Module Motion Servo amplifier The special data to be downloaded is Select the special data to be co 2 Monitor Module Data is not selected not selected downloaded 9 Effective Special Module Motion Servo D amplifier monitor data is not existed in The valid special data file is not present Specify the folder that
42. LL m aa 5 Comment Base switching Line A operation mode D1 Window 1 Line A D2 Window2 D3 Superimpose D100 System Information1 x Mamai A A PEE E E E aa Z a a a a a a a a a a A The device comment dialog box is closed The selected device is set in the device setting dialog box lt 1 Device lt Specification 16bit Signed BIN gt Device OK los fso Cancel 2 8 3 jal Kind of Device ajs e 9 AH word aie i Range fi 1 2 3 a B I 0 Z 0 32767 7 Line A r Extended Bit position fe Block H Unit top 170 00 m Network Host Other NW No f0 Station No 0 9 2 Referring to Device Comment When Setting Devices 9 24 9 2 2 Check method of device comment 9 3 Checking Monitor Data for Errors Details of the monitor screen data created on the GT Designer2 can be checked for errors For the checking method see below Section 4 13 Data Check D Open all screens to be checked The unopened screens are not checked D Choose the Tools Data Check menu The Data Check dialog box appears Set the data check items and click the Check button to execute a data check Data Check Check ltem Key Count Memon Store Object Window Screen Data Scroll Object Report Data Data Area Cary out Checking during save or transfer All Screen f Open Screen Only Check ok Cancel Point Data check target The targets of data
43. Library 5 Available functions 7 O i x E e Right click the mouse to select basic commands e Dragging a figure to the Project workspace allows ae such as New Screen Open or Copy registration of a Parts 23 am A i 7 Q Ex Right click the window screen Ex Drag a figure Bx 1 Bx Tl Display Overlay Screen Z see cae S Em Project E a Base Screen gt EJ Base Screen 1 xX 1 Replay operation 2 xt EJ Window Screen Window Screen ma C Report Screen m g 2PLC nen H Common Settings EJ Report Scere Comment E Tre ot Bais A H Common Se Close All SSe pe AN Comment Cut T Parts Copy i7 Project Category 3 Library A Beste Delete 4 Previous Screen gt Next Screen Y UnOpened Screens Change Size Q Rename Lu Open Image View Property z 3 Project 3 Library a O 3 1 Screen Configuration and Basic Operation 3 6 3 1 2 Operation of workspace m Category workspace The overall project setting is displayed in a tree by Category type Classification for each application simplifies management and editing of objects Section 9 1 2 Batch setting and managing objects figures for each purpose Category workspace x AE Category af Switch 25 Project m Library workspace Objects or figures can be registered and pasted to the screen Chapter 7 USING LIBRARY x CAAMELSECGTO UserLib E4 Library H E User Library Ea Lamp H E Switch H
44. OFF w D10 3 if b X1 OFF amp amp b X2 OFF amp amp b X3 ON w D10 4 Object setting Data operation 2 D100 45 Operates device values by expression and enables objects 180 i Page 5 45 using the operated value Offset Accumulates the offset device value in monitor device address Page 5 52 and monitor Security Restricts the password users Page 5 56 A 16 Data Transmission GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual Download Transimits monitor screen data from PC to GOT Page 5 1 Transmits monitor screen data from GOT to PC Page 5 20 Print GT Designer2 VersionO Operating Manual Print screen f___ gt S Print base window report screen Page 6 1 Manuals Relevant Manual For relevant manual refer to the PDF manual stored within the dr
45. U at O m fs Or A complete round circle can be drawn A circle can be drawn from the start point 5 as a center y l aL 4 Line free form gt a L a a zZ 7 Drag from start point 1 to end point 2 of Click at the end point of next line 3 Repeat the operation in 3 until a figure the first line and release the left button is drawn Double click end point 4 to of the mouse complete drawing Z lt z o O 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 2 8 1 1 Drawing figures 5 Polygon Drag from start point 1 to end point 2 of the first side and release the left button of the mouse 6 Arc Drag from start point 1 to end point 2 to determine the radius of arc A dashed line is displayed inside the circle 7 Sector Drag from start point 1 to end point 2 to determine the radius of sector A dashed line is displayed inside the circle 8 Scale A dashed line is displayed Click at the end point of next side 3 Click the left mouse button at the start point of arc 3 and move the cursor to end point 4 Click the left mouse button at the start point of sector 3 and move the cursor to the end point 4 Repeat the operation in 3 until the desired figure is drawn Double click 4 to complete drawing Click end point 4 to complete drawing Click end point 4 to complete drawing Drag from start point 1 to end point 2 and release the left button
46. cursor a ESS e Edit Object of Selection gt Figure from the menu If the figure and the object u are overlapped only the 26 vE figure is selected Po T QO O Only the object is z selected X 5 gE cursor ae Edit Object of Selection gt Y Object from the menu If the figure and the object are overlapped only the gt object is selected a ine eal Z U D Q LLI m Z lt lt L or A 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 18 8 2 1 Selecting figure and object 8 19 e 2 Hint Selection de selection of multiple figures or objects 1 Selecting one from overlapped figures or objects Move the cursor to the overlapped figures or objects and click while pressing the key 2 De selecting one from multiple figures or objects Move the cursor to the boundary line of a desired figure object Click while pressing the key 3 Selecting figures or objects from the data view The data view displays figures and objects on the screen in a list If figures or objects are overlapped a desired figure object can be simply selected from the data view Section 9 1 4 Simple selection of overlapped figure Data view Data View B 3 M Objects V Figures Object Number jo Object Figure Position Object ID Rectangle 64 80 1 44 160 Polygon 64 80 144 160 Circle 64 80 144 160 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 2 1 Selecting figure and object 8 2
47. make sure to use the GT Designer2 version that is the same or newer than the one used to create the source project For the compatibility between monitor data and GT Designer2 version refer to the following gt Appendix 4 Applicable Monitor Data 3 The GT Desginer2 cannot import the data of the following common settings Therefore make the settings again in the destination project e System Settings and Project Title within System Environment e Script Ly 2 3 Hin Make the settings again Start two GT Designer2 windows Open the source project on the one window and the destination project on the other window and make the settings by comparing the two project settings QO 9 37 9 6 Utilizing other project data 9 6 2 Cautions 4 When the object data is imported to the project in which the corresponding category is not set the object will be registered within the None category even if the category has been set in the source project To set the category create the same category within the destination project in advance or after the data import o Z O H O Z 5 LL l gt LL Li aa 5 Example When the data in the All Screen Common Lamp category is imported Source project Destination project EE Category E gor x lt H 0 Sitch a Switch ALJ Lamp ALJ Lamp m Category H Others H Others a workspace El All screen common lamp ABE Word Lamp 8 1 128 48 2 word Lamp B 1
48. operation on the GOT side is not necessary Procedures The data is transferred in the following procedures Set communication on the GT Designer2 E Connect a RS 232 cable Get the built in memory information D Upload N Memory board e Extended function OS 777 77 77 eo i i i l D Communication driver 4 4 Extended function OS 7 When the user area is not sufficient or the extended function is used Transfer Transfer data set communication on the GT Designerz K gt Section 5 2 1 Setting communication Connect a RS 232 Cable cccccccccceeeeeceeee ees K gt Section 2 2 2 RS 232 cable to be used D Get the built in memory information K gt Section 5 2 2 Getting built in memory information 4 Upload Operation is not required for the first upload bese elec enact silent ante odin face E E K gt Section 5 2 3 Uploading ROM_BIOS GOT A900 Series only gt Section 5 2 4 Installing ROM BIOS Standard monitor OS communication driver and extended function OS GOT A900 Series only AEE E A ENE EEE A EAT L gt Section 5 2 5 Installing OS Monitor data cccccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees Section 5 2 6 Downloading monitor data E Special data GOT A900 Series only lt L gt Section 5 2 7 Downloading special data Remar
49. using FAT16 type ad LU OD z ZO ad F sp MLO To make the SRAM type memory card recognized on Windows 98 statement must be added to config sys Refer to Help of Windows 98 for details 5 Lu oy b Format with self diagnosis memory card check of utility menu ae Only the SRAM type memory card can be used a 2 uU Refer to the GOT A900 Series operating manual Extended Option Functions Manual for X details of the utility menu 6 Transfer write time to memory card The transfer time from GT Designer2 to memory is affected by the PC environment Therefore it may take longer until the data transfer will be completed depending on the memory card and the 5 OS Windows in the PC 9 z i Q CZ lt z o QO 5 3 Transferring Data Using Memory Card 5 30 5 3 1 Installing ROM_BIOS Point 5 31 1 2 Using memory card Do not put other data in the memory card which is used to install the ROM_BIOS Installed data in GOT When install ROM_BIOS the monitor data in GOT special data and OS are deleted Upload them copy OS to PC card when these data are required to backup Installing ROM_BIOS The ROM_BIOS installation it cannot be interrupted Do not turn OFF the power of the GOT PC or unplug the communication cable Otherwise the GOT may become inoperable lt GOT recovery method gt If the GOT is inoperable due to the operation above install the system program again with the proc
50. 2 6 SH NA 080521ENG F Section 1 2 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 Section 3 3 Section 3 4 Section 4 7 Section 4 9 Section 4 11 Section 7 3 Section 9 1 Appendix 1 Section 8 1 4 SH NA 080521ENG G Partial corrections Section 4 3 1 Section 4 14 2 SH NA 080521ENG H Partial corrections Section 3 4 3 SH NA 080521ENG I Section 1 2 1 3 1 1 3 2 3 3 1 3 4 1 3 4 3 4 7 4 4 9 4 11 1 4 11 2 5 1 2 2 2 5 2 9 5 2 6 9 3 2 12127 2 7 3 1 73 2 7 33 7 34 1 3 6 7 3 7 7 3 8 Appendix 2 SH NA 080521ENG J_ Partial corrections Section 3 4 3 4 1 4 6 1 5 1 2 5 2 2 SH NA 080521ENG K_ Partial corrections Section 2 1 2 3 2 4 7 4 9 1 5 9 6 2 Appendix 2 SH NA 080521ENG L_ Partial corrections Section 8 1 4 8 1 5 SH NA 080521ENG M Partial corrections Sections 2 1 2 3 6 The manual number is given on the left bottom of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Oct 2008 SH NA 080521 ENG N Partial corrections Section 2 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 8 2 9 1 Mar 2009 SH NA 080521ENG O Partial corrections Section 4 10 3 2 Appendix 3 Japanese Manual Version SH 080514 Q This manual confers no industrial property rights or any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual
51. 41 Touchitto switch between the base and window screen Page 6 49 Change Station Switch Change monitor rf Touch it to switch the monitored PLC station No Page 6 59 destination Key Code Switch Cal Used as the key for inputting numerical value ASCIl Page 6 65 Digit Font Display Ine ae Numerical Display D100 334 a DAR HE Numerical Input Displays device value in numerical value Page 7 1 D100 45 Write value on device Page 7 1 Data List D100 55 D101 122 102 34 Display multipledevice value in list Page 7 28 D10 4241H BA A z 1 4443H DC ABCD gt Displays device value in text Page 7 44 ASCII Input D10 4241H BA 4 D11 4443H DC 5 E OJ z fol O Inputs text code device Page 7 44 Clock Display 02 03 18 15 27 Displays hour minutes year month date Page 7 57 Comment Display gt Displays command Page 7 63 Alar
52. 9 1 2 Batch setting and managing objects figures for each purpose Category workspace _ QO Hint a button Click the button to display all colors used in the category It is convenient to batch edit multiple devices colors figures 2 Target other than category Other than categories screens or common settings can be batch edited K gt Section 9 1 3 Batch editing attributes of objects figures scattered on Precautions multiple screens Batch edit 1 The categories set on a closed screen are not displayed Bases 7 8 open oj E E Category Fl Switch ae Bit Switch B 7 16 90 Bit Switch B 7 80 80 Bit Switch B 7 144 80 Data Set Switch B r 208 80 epee Lamp SE Bit Lamp B 98 48 240 GE Bit Lamp B 8 48 304 RE Bit Lamp B 7 16 16 RE Bit Lamp B 7 80 16 By Others ee AR Text B B 112 249 24 Project a3 Froject Only Base 8 open Base 7 closed oj E E Category Fy Lamp RE Bit Lamp B B 48 240 63 Others 2 One object figure cannot be stored in multiple categories 3 Multiple attributes cannot be batch edited Ex Batch edit of device and color 4 Refer to the precautions of batch edit before change edit Section 9 1 3 Batch editing attributes of objects figures scattered on multiple screens Batch 9 11 9 1 Edit Function 9 1 2 Batch setting and managing objects figures for each purpose Category workspace 9 1 3 Batch
53. Color Patter Fg Color Bg Color Please select figures or objects e Tile vertical Screens are displayed as follows without overlapping AS GOT GT SoftGOT 640x480 256 Colors MELSEC Qn4 Q MELDAS C6 fs 0 0 K 202 Y 40 Z oi Z Y LO On ZO EZ niz ro Ow jet Designer2 C WINDOWS Desktop production A production A GTD Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help Deh AR LBA ne wi MN vom AOS O AA Si s Q 2 e g e OR eh HS A a oh Q Ja e X lb P iof xl RRR T Display Overlay Screen Te eee Main menu 1 Main menu 2 Line amp 3 Line B C Window Screen LI Report Screen Common Settings System Environment Report Hard Copy Operation Panel Screen DATA TRANSFER OPERATION Screen Name Line B Screen Type Base Screen Security 0 Detailed Explanation g Use Screen Color No Pattem Fg Color Bg Cole nn Dy e Tile horizontal Screens are displayed as follows without overlapping Copy the selection and put it on the Clipboard let Designer2 C WINDOWS Desktop production A production A GTD Project Edt View Screen Common Figute Object Tools Communication Window Help DSO AR beZ ne we 4romA0e eradAAunm lfe zjin zfs z amp onor fe 0 2 2 AlE sy Q 23e 4S OR oS RS SF AL OE OC ia amp LS lb T B 3 Line B PRINTING PROJECT FILE OU
54. Confirm Template Delete Ea t ltem 8 30 Switch Do you want to delete E No Cancel Jrercion my Favorites la ON OF A 3 zis x m 1 Lamp 1 Lamp 2 3 Lamp 3 3 Library a4 User ro a 1 roy A 2 Lamp 2 HA 3 Lamp 3 oP 4 Figure A p 5 Figure B HA 6 Numerical Display LAR 7 3D Switch H Lamp I Switch H zl a Project Category 3 Library Library workspace Library image list 1 012345 Wo toa 4 Figure 5FigueB 6 Numerica 7 3D Switc Point Deleting user created library When the user created library is deleted note that all templates registered on the library are deleted 7 10 7 3 Creating Original Library 7 3 3 Deleting registered library template 7 3 4 Editing registered objects and figures Objects and figures registered to My Favorite or the user created library are edited m Select the template for editing gt FF Library Image List x Function C AMELSEC GTD2 Userl JFunction My Favorites mn E E3 Library a a ON ma C 2 E amp fe zZ User Library O My Favorites on EE fia 1 Lamp 1 orr Y fig 2 Lamp 2 D FE 3 Lamp 3 1 Lamp 1 2 Lamp 2 3 Lamp 3 T Ap 4 Figure nz Ag 5 Figure B 012345 a S fia 6 Numerical Display Af 7 3D Switch 4FiqueA 5FigueB 6 Numerica __ Lamp C Switch z amp Figure 3 Project Categow 3 Lib
55. Designer2 Untitled2 Project Edit View een Common Figure Obie DEAA BALLA BBN 16 7 Franz fe z onforf dev 0 4 H 2 AlE y LI I Display Overlay Screen E B 1 Main menu 1 Main menu I Window Screen C Report Screen H 0 Common Settings System Environment Report E Hard Copy J Operation Panel M Bar Code Pup Status Observation Time Action Hain menu Screen Name Main menu Screen T ype Base Screen Security 0 Detailed Explanation Use Screen Color X Screen oj Workspace Ea T Display Overlay Screen A gt on ork bev 1D 2 ZO 2 aji PEER menu Sy Q 23 at HE OR Sm GB EB SE AL OF A JA O DY lb 1 Main menu G Window Screen O Report Screen E I Common Settings System Environment Report E Hard Copy Operation Panel M0 Bar Code Dy Status Observation Time Action Av a wo 3 Library ad Size change Value Screen Name 7 Main menu Screen Type Base Screen Security n Please select figures or objects 3 19 A97 GOT GT SoftGOT 640x480 256 Colors MELSEC Qn4 Q MELDAS C6 Fr 0 0 X 12 7 336 NUM si Z Workspace or propertysheet is moved to desired position 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars Please select figurs or objects AS7 GOT G
56. Determine the start point by clicking gt Actual start position 25 am A L Cursor position It is arranged at the closest position to the gt X 10 Y 12 coordinates of multiples of 16 X 16 Y 16 F m a When the end point is determined the cursor can only moved to the coordinates of multiples of 16 9 b When an object display position is determined or a figure is moved the cursor moves based 3 on the dot value set in Snap as shown above c One stroke of the key t key key and Hl key on the keyboard moves the cursor in the z units of the set dot value m Set the Snap to one dot each and hit key t key key and gt key each time on the z keyboard to move the cursor 1 dot each This facilitates drawing a fine figure or position setting z oc QO 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars 3 30 3 4 3 Customizing GT Designer2 operating environment 3 31 Q Hint Display change from toolbars and menu ltems set on the display tab can be changed from toolbars and menu 1 Changing drawing screen display from toolbars display setting Snap value 100 Alfie y ON OFF Dev ID Zoom Change of Display non display of ON OFF status device number Grid spacing Object ID display non display Grid color Screen background color 2 Changing drawing screen display from menu e E ks Preview ON Image Show Terminal Display Toolbars Status Bar Workspace
57. Devices 9 2 1 Importing device comment Point GX Developer data used for this function Only the device comment data wcd of the GX Developer is required for this function Other project data of the GX Developer is not required Storage location of device comment data The device comment data wcd of the GX Developer is created in the project data of GX Developer Prd ladder Folder containing project data of the GX Developer 4 Resource al thers Device comment data wed is stored here Modification of device comment on the GX Developer If the device comment data wcd once specified is edited on the GX Developer it is not updated on the GT Designerz To update the edition specify the device comment data wcd again Specified path The path is stored after the GI Desiner2 is completed 9 2 Referring to Device Comment When Setting Devices 9 22 9 2 1 Importing device comment o Z O H O Z 5 LL l gt LL m aa APPENDIX INDEX 9 2 2 Check method of device comment The check method of device comment is shown below D Click the button in the device settings dialog box of each object Device lt Specification 16bit Signed BIN gt Device OK za D 0 p Cancel 718 9 BK CL f J i jaj Kind of Device 4 5 6 DIE F Word il2l3 TET Range P La La 0 0 32767 Device Comment Extended Bit posit
58. E Figure HE Key H E Special Farts ey Project B Category 3 Library 3 7 3 1 Screen Configuration and Basic Operation 3 1 2 Operation of workspace 3 2 Menu Configuration Commands assigned to the menu bar are described gt ad Project gt ae The Project menu contains functions of file management preference D New Ctrl N H inti renin a settings and printing Close E Save Chiles a O Save As New creation of project reading existing files preference settings and z er i aa ee eae printing of data being edited are available z mport Device a m eveloper m LU T leicht The recent file record can also be displayed Es Preferences os Page Setup fh Print Preview amp Print Ctrl P 3 z Exit Alt F4 R Edit g 7 69 The Edit menu contains edit functions for created figures objects SB 7 Li If incorrect operation is done during edit the screen can be returned to A Pa the previous status Copy paste and grouping of objects and figures are also allowed ain Object of Selection b Eg Chapter 8 DRAW AND EDIT E ZO EZ DE Z AQ Add to Category O UW Rotate Flip gt Align b E N X D ZZ A ZO Eg View lt i LA Preview Cute The View menu contains functions of display on the GT Designer2 SNe ON Image Show Terminal Display gt neal z Toolbars status bar workspace or property sheet can be displayed or 5 v Status Bar i v Workspace Alt 0 not displ
59. EZ niz ro Ow The mouse cursor changes to st 4 BY Bt Sa Fs ER Ok OL Ok 4 io eS Lh Click the mouse on the desired position to place the object Then right click the mouse to exit from the placement mode DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 4 28 4 7 4 Object function setting Set the Numerical Display object 1 Double click the placed Numerical Display object The dialog box appears 2 Set the Type View Format Frame Format etc 3 Then click the button Numerical Display L gt GT Designer2 VersionL Reference Manual for details of objects m gt gt Section 4 7 5 Basic operations of dialog box j E E Decimal Foin a E E Mo EC D Ose Ta Baten raar in aah Weenie tott mange None z the piia ha Elater he 4 29 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 4 7 4 Object function setting Point f Changing the object size Select the object to be resized and then drag the handle W to change its size m gt xX LU gt O When the object size is changed this may result in misalignment between the figure frame and the object as shown below ig In this case perform the following operation z Select the object P 45 Right click the mouse and select Centering Si This will automatically correct the misalignment Ke A Paste Dup
60. Each category list is output as shown below A Category Switch Screen Coordinates Goto Screen Switc B 1 32 128 Goto Screen Switc B 1 176 128 Goto Screen Switc B 1 320128 Goto Screen Switc B 1 464128 Goto Screen Switc B 2 480 400 Goto Screen Switc B 3 480 400 Goto Screen Switc B 4 480 400 Goto Screen Switc B 5 480 400 Coordinates 1616 6 14 6 2 Printing example 6 2 2 File output Sourd Files Sound File Path 1 C WINDOWS desktop monitor data Line_A Sound waw 2 C WINDOWS desktop monitor data Line_B Sound wav 3 C WINDOWS deskto p monitor data Line_C_Soundwav 4 C WINDOWS desktop monitor data Line_D_Sound wav 7 USING LIBRARY z Lu Figures and objects created by the user can be registered as a library ui Registered figures and objects can be easily pasted on the screen 2 7 1 What is Library O 3 i gt 17 1 1 What you need to know before using library O D O Screen used for library i In library registration and readout are performed on the screen below lt DT LZ 69 On RIGT Designer2 Untitled a Project A View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help Library workspace a D EERIE Registered objects or figures are DO a AAE displayed in a tree To display the library workspace E a E click the library tab of the workspace SR Library a on OF 4 b a e amp a it User Library
61. Ei xi Input locale neepa Setting example Keyboard layout IME Input locale i Chinese PRC Chinese Simplified MS PinYin38 Keyboard layout IME Chinese Simplified QuanPin Cancel Clicking the button will result in the following settings Regional Options 2 xl General Numbers Currency Time Date Input Locales Installed input locales Input language Keyboard layout IME F English United States py Chinese PRC Chinese Simplified MS Pin yin38 Remove Properties Set as Default To turn off Caps Lock Press CAPS LOCK key Press SHIFT key IME Settings Hot keys for input locales ltem Key sequence Switch between input locales Left Alt Shift a Switch to English United States US None Change Key Sequence IV Enable indicator on taskbar OK Cancel Apply 9 31 9 4 Inputting multiple language 9 4 1 Input method Input method Click the language selection icon on the task bar at the bottom right of the screen to select the language to be input After selection multiple languages can be entered on GT Designerz2 o Z O H O Z 5 LL l gt LL Li aa 5 Example Windows XP Professional Select a language to input Dead amp T E NNR xom AOS OAR a I 16 x 100 y 16 v amp ON OFF Dev ID ir E sy G 23 at B amp Bf aS amp EH AE ALA Vib HOS h x lt da Input comments or
62. G Ungroup N Flip Vertical V Flip Horizontal H Rotate Left L Rotate Right R Bring to Front B Send to Back K Attribute E Preview P Workspace W Property sheet E Redisplay Zoom Close C Shortcut keys Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl S Ctrl P Alt F4 Ctrl Z Ctrl Y Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V DEL Ctri A Ctrl G Ctrl U Ctrl J Ctrl H Ctrl L Ctri R Ctrl F Ctrl B Alt Enter Ctrl l Alt 0 Alt 1 F5 Ctrl Wheel Ctrl W Appendix 1 List of Shortcut Keys pjoo 0 0 olo0 0000000000000 opoo 0 of App 1 1 O 00 O O O O 0O 0O O O O OIO O O O OO CO 0 USEFUL FUNCTIONS x lt O Z m Q o lt INDEX List of shortcut keys for comment creating editing operation Valid for Comment list window only Item Shortcut key Comment creating Bi Ej New Alt N editing operation Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Delete DEL Line feed Alt Enter Edit F2 T Import Alt fy Export Alt X Mouse click 1 Space 1 1 When the cursor is located in the cell position of the comment No comment text color or high quality font pressing Space provides the same operation as performed by a mouse click Using the Space key together with the Tab key that moves the cursor in the horizontal direction of the cell enables convenient keyboard operation App 2 Appendix 1 List of Shortcut Keys Appendi
63. H I Simultaneous Press On Preference Delay No i Sec Attribute for middle of two presses PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT Sie Regular gt Solid Ea M Size 1x1 Jh Jsi Ken fo Use Aigh ouai kan Buzzer Always Set x One Shot C During Push T Offset gt Dey USING LIBRARY Extended Function MEE wee Pine Function list check box When this is checked the extension tab is additionally displayed DRAW AND EDIT 3 1 Screen Configuration and Basic Operation 3 2 3 1 1 Screen configuration and various tools Data Set Switch Shape E meme IY Suitch F packocund ME Pater E Tete flr fe Style Sod gt sis Ah Ash gJ Use Aiah Goality Font Check box RE Recipe 58 x a xxe oY a CE Lam B D6 8 Hac ooo e e ee ee 3 1 Screen Configuration and Basic Operation 3 1 1 Screen configuration and various tools View of table 3 1 2 Operation of workspace Workspace The overall project settings are displayed in a tree by data type It is easy to manage and edit the overall project data Ex 1 Screen copy The existing screen is copied using the workspace Bi xl Tl Display Overlay Screen E a Project Base Screen ex winda New Ea Repclall Open Com Close c Close All ier p 2 m Q ME mar a ol jo hl oO oO m I Display Overlay Screen E al Pro
64. Iw ON T Print Object ID gt O Print Devices i OFF Print Object ID n Print Devices 26 nO zZ O Lz Obie Select whether the object setting to be output in List or Details format for the screen setting 6 2 ec Mi i check O mS Print to file fy Selectable only for output to file Fixed to List for output to printer es Set the image ON OFF to be output to a screen list Screen List When both are checked both of ON and OFF screen images are output When neither of them is checked no screen list is output Set the image ON OFF to be output to a screen image When both are checked both of ON and OFF screen images are output Screen Image When neither of them is checked no screen image is output In addition to a normal screen image the screen image on which the object ID or devices are put can be output Print Object ID Outputs the screen image on which the object ID is put Outputs the screen image on which devices are put O CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN OIO DATA TRANSFER OPERATION ep O U pe O X oO Z H oO ou oO E 2 LU LL USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 6 1 Printing method 6 7 6 1 2 Setting items 3 Report tab Base window Report Device List Object f Details f List Print to Printer Screen Image Print Object ID Print Devices Object Select the object setting to be output in List or Det
65. List Window In the project workspace Screen Image List Window is displayed when Open Image View is selected after right clicking Base Screen or Window Screen In the Screen Image List an image from Base Screen Window Screen or an image of set overlay screen Base Screen Window Screen can be displayed and screen can be created or edited Item Screen type selection menu H Register New af Edit N Name do Cut Copy Paste Delete Property Screen type selection menu Screen image Screen name Contents Screen type is switched Figures and objects that are selected with screen editor are placed on the created screen New screen is created Registered screen details are edited with screen editor Display non display of the screen name is selected Selected screen is cut Selected screen is copied Copied screen cut screen are pasted on the screen with the press of each Copy button Selected screen is deleted Property of the screen is displayed 3 5 3 1 Screen Configuration and Basic Operation 3 1 2 Operation of workspace Workspace type Types of the workspace are described here m gt m Project workspace i Overall project settings such as created screens and common settings are displayed in a tree O It is convenient to see the project details to check the work progress and to copy a screen Z M A Display Overlay Screen Workspace Set o
66. Only report lines are selected Comment CESTA BD C gt GT Designer2 Version Reference Manual m O Name Description New Comment Adds a new comment line Z O Insert Row Inserts a row in the specified position x aa o Import Imports the existing CSV text or Unicode text file E gt O nO Export Exports a comment list to a CSV text or Unicode text file OO Attribute Opens the comment attribute setting dialog Search Opens the character string search dialog Jump Opens the jump dialog Z O z N D X LH A 69 Own Ww qa wo RO Attribute Displays Hides the attribute information Display Non Display o ES e CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 3 3 Toolbars 3 18 3 3 1 Types of toolbars 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars Screen configuration and toolbars can be customized on the GT Designer2 to facilitate operation by users Screen configuration and toolbars customizing methods are described in this section S GT Designer2 Untitled2 Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help rA AA tees cne BBR vom AOS ALAAN 57 amp Q 23 we B amp F wo a A A A SE S eh Q JA SD la Unused toolbars are not displayed Toolbars are displayed as a window KS GT
67. Operating System Service Pack2 or later English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Service Pack2 or later English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions Pentium II 300MHz or more 128MB or more DATA TRANSFER OPERATION Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System 800MHz or more 512MB or more English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German Recommended 1GHz or Recommended 1GB or versions more more Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 2 1 System Configuration in Creating Monitor Screen 2 2 2 1 2 Operating environment 2 2 System Configuration of Data Transfer and Document Creation 2 2 1 System configuration Using GOT A900 series The system configuration using the GOT A900 series is shown below Refer to Section 2 2 2 for th
68. Project 3 Library z D m Ae 8H mi 3 Open the screen continuously Ge Operation details are described in Hint on the ome following pages 4 Kal GT Designer2 C WINDOWS Desktop production A production A GTD Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window F A Z Ofc OQ2 Rw wl WAR Z Z vx om Aos r AIAN fs 100 oo sy 23 ac BES oe oT RSE ALA Cia w lt 2 LL t al x 54 T Display Overlay Screen EJ B 2 Line_A ie 3 6 Project n E Base Screen 1 Main menu 2 Line_A X 3 Line_B Lu H Window Screen T Report Screen 2A Common Settings so System Environment a Report lt Ep Hard Copy Dd lt a BE Project 2 Library Lu O Me oD Dz Za EO Z u x A L gt ad L ad a Z ep fe Q LI Q Z lt L z ad Q 4 6 Opening Closing Screen 4 18 4 6 1 Opening screen In this section the method of opening the screen from the workspace in 1 is described D Double click the desired screen for opening in the project workspace EGT Designer2 C WINDOWS Desktop production A production GTD Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help Oca a Ai aor ne BOB vom ACEC OMAAR lfic z 00 s amp i pi me a S O l SEEM SL AT 2 a E eh s Ja oforo h2 e Double click E 2Line_A El 3Line_B Window Screen
69. Propertysheet Library oom Window Preview Redisplay Display Touch Area Wren tems Grid Guidelines Options Ctrl l Alt O Alt F5 Display magnification Display non display of device object ID paint object and object frame Grid display position 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars 3 4 3 Customizing GT Designer2 operating environment 3 4 4 Display with frame It is the function to display the outer frame on the drawing screen as if the GOT body frame is imaged With this function a screen can be created with the image of the GOT body 2 Q Q oF aoe oe Q l D 7 O D amp 2 O o 0 Q C S00 CS F 9000 ssis PR T D C j OE G u m 09 O Standard Handy ET HO Keypad 3 Standard Selectable on all GOT except F9Q20GOT 128 x 64 This is not displayed on the GT SoftGOT z Handy Selectable when the GOT type is set to A95 GOT 320 x 240 or F94 GOT 320 x 240 amp a iiseoncenetecuiceatioes Selectable when the GOT type is set to A94 GOT 320 x 240 66 Keypad Selectable when the GOT type is set to A920 GOT 128 x 64 or A930 GOT 240 x 80 qo oO BOS Select View Display with Frame Standard Handy ET Keypad menu The frame is displayed according to the selected option im Standard oe This function allows an image of the GOT body
70. ROM_ BIOS install the first time the GOT ts started by either m reconnecting the power or using the reset switch the GOT ROM_BIOS will 692 be automatically re written During rewriting do not turn off the power or O H press the rest switch In the case of the power supply being turned off the f 2 DO RAOM_BIOS path DAMELSEC STDA OS P GOT type A385607 497 G0T A960G0T TA Z Version Ver 3 4 0 o T Z Y Transfer size FOFO45 byte 5 T O H Memon card Ic Install lt Z X O O u 5 Communication with GOT dialog box ROM_BIOS Install tab or L LL ES oz Points of caution are described for installation of the ROM_BIOS re Points of caution x ye Be sure to read this before installation Su Path drive folder that stores the ROM_BIOS to be installed is specified aS ROM_BIOS path x Up to 5 historical specified in the past are retained GOT type The type of GOT to which the ROM_BIOS is installed is selected K x 5 m Version Version of the ROM_BIOS is displayed KJ x Q oD aA Transfer size Size of the ROM_BIOS to be transferred is displayed feg x 2 EO Z Memory card Drive assigned to the PCMCIA slot is selected ol x y 7 7 The ROM_BIOS is installed on the memory card K t After installation the dialog box Completed appears gt x L Ma m Z T gt m Q Ww Q Z lt z or O 5 3 Transferring Data Using Memory Card 5 32 5 3 1 Installing ROM_BIOS Installation meth
71. Screen Type Base Screen i zero suppress es Security 0 Detailed Explanation Use Screen Color Pattern Input Character Berar Fg Color PCD code T olor Ascii ETET 1 display lt x Please select figures or objects m0 168 4 478 ad QO 4 6 Opening Closing Screen 4 20 4 6 1 Opening screen 4 21 Click i of the toolbars and keep the button depressed iB Click the ka button to open the same type screen of the active screen K GT Designer2 C Documents and Settings kondout Desktop Data input_display GTD Project Edit Yiew Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help Deda da Bo Be om f Bh SXOSAC SOLO ASA ua Ill 16 x 100 v jie z amp ON oF bev D 2 0O S ma s Q Q 2 e A 5 OR g A EE Se AL Ah 2 ISR S g m E a A e H E gt I Display Overlay Screen aJ Project Base Screen 1 Product C tank flow 2 Data input display c 3 Message display i RES Window Screen f Data input display 5 Report Screen Common Settings I Suu i B 3 Message display System Environment Report g Hard Copy J Operation Panel Alarm list display lt System alarm gt Screen Name Message display k 4 Comment Screen Type Base Screen d display use Security 0 Detailed Explanation MEZO Alarm flow display Alarm flow display use Please select figures or objects A97 GOT GT SoftGOT 640x480 256 Colors MELSEC A x 638 Y 8
72. Series Operating Manual Displays the GT Designer2 Versiong Operating Manual O O Reference Manual Displays the GT Designer2 Version Reference Manual O Basic Operation Data Transfer Displays the GT Designer2 Versiong Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Manual Displays the first second volume of the GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Screen Design Manual zZ O g 5 Q LL Z oe O Zz im i X O 9 N aa WW op Ww QO Le 2 Index Displays the PDF manual list o O T X To About GTD2 The GT Designer2 version can be confirmed oe O 2 Connects to the Mitsubishi Electric FA Equipment Technology Hf Connect to MELFANweb l l O roa Information Service MELFANSweb home page Ow PDF manual viewing procedure When Operating Manual Reference Manual is selected x LL 25 The selected manual is displayed aS lt r For details of the Adobe Reader operation method refer to Help of Adobe Reader lt a oO Clicking INDEX MENU displays the manual list This section KA P 5 eS aE m SASA JAB gt wiles joe DADES Al Si B Bookmark v LISAFETY PRECAUTIONS c L Precautions for Using This PZ D Sit 4 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN CONTENTS Danus Configuration 4 1 Selecting Project at the Start of GT Designer2 a i Switches the display to the ee ee ee page of the selected item A y Screen confi
73. Series the outside of that data part is displayed one dot smaller When you create data by selecting Display mode XOR display in the GOT800 Series 16 color models and then display it with the GOT A900 Series 16 color models the overlapped data area is displayed dark For that data the display colors are matched with those of a 256 color model in the GOT A900 Series lt Example gt GOT used Color of Color of Color of figure part overlapped areas GOT800 16 colors Blue GOT A900 16 colors Blue GOT A900 256 colors Blue White White White Yellow Dark yellow Yellow If the device value becomes a negative numeric value or out of the display range the data created by setting Indirect for Parts indication using the Part movement function of the GOT800 Series is displayed as follows GOT800 Series Parts are not displayed GOT A900 Series Parts are displayed The priority varies depending on the GOT when duplicate touch keys have been set GOT800 Series Word SET gt Bit SET GOT A900 Series Bit SET gt Word SET Procedures to replace the GOT800 Series with the GOT A900 Series With the GOT800 Compatible mode no action is required It is not always necessary to change the settings of the colors You can lighten the dark overlapped area by setting the product s color darker Either the color of a part or an overlapped area will always have a dark color lt In the case of the ex
74. Switch Oo brid bra rg br ved 900 000 DO 4 0 cn Co Lamp Coordinates 16 16 16 80 16 144 16 208 16 16 16 80 16 144 16 208 16 16 16 80 16 144 16 208 32 32 128 32 224 32 480 32 544 32 32 32 480 32 544 32 32 32 16 16 16 80 16 144 16 208 9 o m Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Word Lamp Word Lamp Word Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp DDD w oo oo fol 0 o l ooo I MNINININ onono m S S oon n c SS BS a ool baba bras bre brig bra br 4 babe Others Coordinates Numerical Display 32 16 Numerical Display 32 96 Numerical Display 32 176 Numerical Display 32 256 Numerical Display 32 336 Numerical Display 96 16 Numerical Display 96 80 Numerical Display 96 144 Numerical Display 96 208 Rectangle 256 16 Filled Circle 80 112 Filled Rectangle 0 128 ot et t et a ee l maaa Go PP olowo amo www 6 12 6 2 Printing example 6 2 1 Printer output 6 2 2 File output Files to be output In file output the following files are output to the specified folder i O 1 Image file refers to screen numbers a Base screen Z Base ON
75. The interval number of dots in the Y direction down to the copy source is set 0 to 100 The interval number of dots in the X direction right to the copy source is set 0 to 100 Q LU fal Z lt x z Ma Q 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 32 8 2 9 Copying figures and objects consecutively Item Description It is set to offset the device of the object to the device number for the increments when copying a object For a touch switch the write device only for the bit word operation is applicable None Increment is not performed Priority in the X direction Incremented in the X direction right Priority in the Y direction Incremented in the Y direction down After selecting the priority direction set the interval to offset the device number Number of increments hexadecimal 10000 to 10000 Address Increment Ex 1 Priority in the X direction Ex 2 Priority in the Y direction Number of increments 2 Number of increments 2 Copy source Copy source gt Priority is given to the Priority is given to the X direction right Y direction down For details of 1 see below 1 Copying with O interval If a figure object is copied with 0 interval the pasted figure object is overlapped with the source by 1 dot Set the interval to 1 or more to avoid overlapping of figures or objects Ex Copying with 0 interval Copying with the interval of 16 Copy Range Select the copy range from Screen t
76. User created library or registered template is copied m Select the user created library template for copying gt iII Library Image List x Function C AMELSEC GTD2 User 7 Function My Favorites SN ac far fe on GaSe a 2 User Library O EG My Favorites ea O q A 1 Lamp 1 H4 2 Lamp 2 C D i 3 Lamp 3 1 Lamp 1 2 Lamp 2 3 Lamp 3 g T Ap 4 Figure A nz Ap 5 Figure B 012345 SO HA 6 Numerical Display mia LERN nO i An 7 3D Switch 4FigueA 5FigueB 6 Numerica H Lamp H E Switch z B x a eu Project Bl Category 3 Library 7 3D Swite ao ra Library workspace Library image list 8 D Z g5 O a Perform the following operation a 1 Copying in library workspace Right click the mouse to select Copy P Right click the mouse again to select Paste Zx Ow i Z 2 Copying in library image list EZ Mim s X Click a Copy T Then click amp Paste l ti D The library property template property dialog box appears m E Ze Set the user created library template number of copy destination and the library template name Click g2 Eq ce the button zE Template Property Ho a C 5 i ae Name 30 Switch 2 A 2 Oe 25 EO Z u Z O L 4 The selected user created library template is copied m aaam Bi xf Library Image List x Function T C AMELSEC GTD2 Userl Function My Favorites gt ml gt
77. When Edit Touch Area Frame Region is selected the object and the figure are independently moved enlarged or reduced The arrangement position of the object and the figure can be finely adjusted When the touch switch is set the valid area of the touch switch can be set x lt m Z m a o lt x Copy Paste Delete INDEX Attribute Stacking Order Move Mode Add To Category Adjust Direct Text Size Edit Touch Area Frame Region Appendix 2 Q amp A of GT Designer2 Operation App 5 Appendix 3 Using Existing Data Appendix 3 1 Outline procedures The outline procedures for converting the existing data to the GT Designer2 data are shown below Monitor data for A64GOT Monitor data for GOT800 Series Monitor data created by GT Designer or DU WIN Monitor data for A77GOT Digital s Package Data SW3NIW A8GOTP Drawing software for GOT800 Series The monitor data of the A64GOT A77GOT are read out and saved as monitor data of the GOT800 Series L SW3NIW A8GOT Graphic Settings Software Package Operating Manual Monitor Screen Creation Manual GT Converter The monitor data of the GOT800 Series or the Digital s package data are converted to the monitor data of the GT Designer lt _ gt Help function of GT Converter lt It is contained in the CD ROM of the GT Designer2 gt GT Designer2 Project Edit jew Screen Comm Figure Object Tool indow Help DEOR
78. a D New 5 C Open Close ey Save Save As Import Project c RARE Import Panelkit of GT Designer Z ommunication s O Window Import Device Comment of Gx Develo Help ak Preferences z All Commands Page Setup fe Print Preview D aTa Description F Z gt O MO ou Ex 1 Adding icon GT Designer2 Untitled2 B 1 j EF Project Edit view Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help zZ O lt 5 Q LL Z O O zZ im i X O 9 N or LU Z O D Lu m oO LL O Click the desired function for OSUATLaeQr new EBL addition and drag it to the Z7 oOmA0C rad AXAum e dlo ae desired toolbar sy Q 23 ac BE l CBR AE SL A Q JA SD ls w RARACARVERR S z Preferences T Toolbars Icon Operation View 5 F Category Icon O EZ Q Word Lamp lt 73 Numerical Display X ASC Ascii Display Ow Data List amp 2 Numerical Input Los i Date Display TE Ae oea Time Display Help Comment Display X All Commands R Bit Comment Lu Ee Word Comment Dd T Z Description Create Ascii Input ZO Ce Pr Lu LA QO i Ex 2 Deleting icon O O TENNTA Click the desired icon for xE Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help O z OSUARTLRAQI Re wm BOB h deletion and drag it outside Z9 Z xom AOS O ASA N IE 1007 vf the toolbar
79. and size of transfer datato GOT 5 1 Types of toolbarS nnan naana aana 3 11 U UNGO betel a et etna a E e a T EE 8 21 CIO AGNI E A E E A E EOE 5 20 Using existing data n aana aaa aaan App 6 Utilizing panelkit of GT Designer2 7 21 Index 2 USEFUL FUNCTIONS x lt O Z Lu Q o lt Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners This product uses Arphic Mobile Font VS FlexGrid8 LEADTOOLS r DLL for Win32 c ComponentOne LLC All rights reserved Copyright c 1991 2003 LEAD Technologies Inc SH NA 080521ENG O GT Designer2 Version2 Operating Manual For GOT900 Series SW2 GT900 0 E 1DM216 SH NA 080521ENG O 0903 MEE a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require app
80. b The object device with the specified offset device cannot be changed to the word specification for bit device c When the head device of the device which is automatically and consecutively set is changed do not make the data length out of the device range The following operation occurs depending on the device data length e When the data length is 16 bits and the set device is out of the range the device is not changed e When the data length is 32 bits and the set device is out of the range the area out of the device range is not set for the device d Scripts cannot be changed with the use of Replace Devices 2 Change of figure a Change from a basic figure to a free figure and from a free figure to a basic figure is not allowed 9 15 9 1 Edit Function 9 1 3 Batch editing attributes of objects figures scattered on multiple screens Batch edit 9 1 4 Simple selection of overlapped figure Data view What is data view The data view displays all figures and objects arranged on the screen in a list The listed figures and objects can be double clicked and edited directly o Z O H O Z 5 LL l gt LL Li aa 5 Check an item for display ee x lt Bana m m e M Ees Object Number p The number of objects arranged on the Q eae ee ObjectFigure Object ID screen is displayed a oer Rectangle 48 1 76 192 192 Q e E a TE Rectangle 48 192 192 206 x py E ik gh nee 32 176
81. cautions on the software version compatibility only When using functions depending on the GOT ROM_BIOS the corresponding ROM_BIOS version must be installed in the GOT For ROM_BIOS dependant functions refer to the following Section 5 1 1 ROM_BIOS Appendix 4 Applicable Monitor Data App 11 USEFUL FUNCTIONS x lt O Z m A o lt x INDEX Appendix 4 1 Opening monitor data POINT The target monitor data can be opened using the same or newer version of GT Designer2 than the one Beh used to create the target monitor data Project gt GT Designer2 version used lt GT Designer2 version t t ject dat t Precautions o create project data used to open When the monitor data is opened with the same or older software version than the one used to create it some functions settings are invalid due to version incompatibility The following table shows the compatibility between the software versions Software used to create monitor data Software used to open monitor data GT Designer2 GT Designer Version5 13P or later Version1 00A to Version5 10L Version5 13P or later a A GT Designer Compatible A When opening the monitor data by older version software some functions settings are invalid Warning message will appear when the data is opened A When opening the monitor data by older version software some functions settings are invalid and also data is corrupted Warning message will no
82. change the contents of My Favorites or User Library A user library folder created on another PC can be opened and used for the library of the project being edited Ex Library data of other project are loaded into the editing project ojx 0 LE Reuse library LE Subject T C AMELSEC GTD2 User x Subject T C AwINDOWS Desktop y E 3 Library User Library El My Favorites a 1 Lamp 1 ia 2 Lamp 2 HA 3 Lamp 3 AP 4 Figure Ap 5 Figure B fia 6 Numerical Display Ab 7 3D Switch QA 1 Switch Ha 2 Start switch E av CI Crystal lt 000 Editing project 3 Library J User Library My Favorites ie 1 Lamp 1 fig 2 Lamp 2 tia 3 Lamp 3 f g Av Crystal 9 Soft H Retro H I Simple H Basic Figure H 6 150 1 Dialog Other project a Project Category 3 Library 3 Project Category 3 Library ED Right click the mouse at a blank space in the library workspace and click Load User Library Folder 1 BI x Subject 7 C MELSEC GTD2 Userl E Pag Library User Library HL My Favorites a AV C Crystal C Soft C Retro C Simple Basic Figure 4 Iso C Dialog Cs ioe oo bo it New User Library Folder Load User Library Folder Store to User Library Folder 3 Project Category 3 Library The dial
83. characters Q I Display Overlay Screen 7 aa a DE ee aera directly cL CI Window Screen s Pa J a reg r Oo C Report Screen Ea r Ta J Common Settings Su aa System Environment pe A ANA p ree vee ie eae bee Line A production condition E Hard Copy E Operation Panel 1 BarCode Pp Status Observation Time Action oy BA Alarm History EPRA ETIA Set as Default zo Fioatng aes SAN Clear Default ew Project Category 3 Library Bj x Text Attribute value F Text Style Regular v Direction Horizontal Vertical x 32 Text Color X ce ge re LU Position 128 Q Text EFRA EAR Text Style Regular 3x3 v Text Color Text Solid Color a Size 343 E Size x 3 Category Others v Size Y 3 rae n im Chinese PRC Direction Horizontal x SEs ERE 3 v ngisi nite ates Alignment Left v J TEXT is Selected AS7 GOT GT SoftGOT 640x480 256 Colors MELSEC QnA Q mA i E lay ta start m GT Designer2 Example Windows 2000 Professional GT Designer2 C Documents and Settings Administrator Desktop g g t 8 x Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communicatie elp Osua teene n e nE D Select a language to input 7 vom AOE r AHAA ma e o de Ae on o v 0 2 m 2 al s Q Q 23 a 825 OR a A A R AL A Qa SN S g i oR ee ox Se 2 Input comments or characters directly I Display Overlay Screen E 8 FR C Window Screen f Fa 3 re C Re
84. check are only open screens Unopened screens are not checked To check all screens open all screens and then start a data check 9 25 9 3 Checking Monitor Data for Errors 9 4 Inputting multiple language With multiple language function in Windows various languages can be input on the GT Designer2 One GOT can display a screen for various languages by inputting letters and comments in various languages 1 Language incompatible with Windows cannot be input GT Designer2 mon Figure Object Tools Communication indow el SER SHAN Sr OEBAC CA AAam jie x x z amp ON oF Dev ID Sy Q 3 at 4 E Bf at SK SH OF OL OO Ja SS lb by x Display Overlay Screen SAYA ERR Line A production condition EFA EPR A97 GOT GT SoftGOT 640x480 256 Colors MELSEC QnA Q MELDAS C fF 00 X584 Y 183 Downloading monitor data 54 AEEA Switching message for display of comment 341 vA EEK Line A production condition PSEA ER Japanese English Chinese 1 In the GOT F900 Series only one lauguage selected in Character set can be selected in one unit Point 7 OS Windows that allows input of multiple languages Multiple language input is available for the OS Windows below e Windows 2000 Professional e Windows XP Professional e Windows XP Home Edition 9 4 Inputti
85. e When the BMP format data that includes more colors than the color setting is imported to GT Desiger2 the imported data will be displayed Subtractive process will be automatically performed e The BMP format data of which colors are reduced once on GT Designer2 cannot be returned to the previous color setting Import the BMP file again e The color arrangement of the image data imported to GT Designer2 may slightly differ from that of the image data displayed on the GOT CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 2 The size of the figure to be imported When the size of the figure to be imported is bigger than that of temporary area it is automatically adjusted to fit the temporary area SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 3 Editing BMP format figure data Click the BMP format figure data to start the painting software Then modify the figure Closing the software ensures the modification on the figure data i Bitmap Image in GTD2 Untitled Paint File Edit View Image Colors Help koa f maa CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN DATA TRANSFER OPERATION 4 Category After being imported the BMP format data will be registered and stored in Others DXF format file 1 Compatible DXF format data a Compatible DXF format data The DXF format data created using the following Auto CAD version can be imported PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT e Release 12 e Release 13 e Release 14 b Notes on importing data e The data with the laye
86. editing attributes of objects figures scattered on multiple screens Batch edit o Z O H O Z 5 LL l gt LL Li aa 5 What is batch edit Color or other attributes of objects figures are changed in batch The following attributes can be batch edited e Device of object e Color of object figure e Figure used for lamp display touch switch APPENDIX Convenient for the case below It is convenient to batch edit device color or lamp switch figure of objects or figures scattered on multiple screens Different types of figures circle and rectangle or object touch switch and value display can be batch edited The following types of batch edit are available Each change method and image after change are shown below lt Image before change gt INDEX Base screen 1 Base screen 2 Base screen 3 lt Image after change gt Batch editing all screens Change of color J Batch editing screen Change of color J Color of objects figures on all Color of objects figures on the screens Base screen 1 Base editing screen Base screen 2 is batch edited screen 2 Base screen 3 is batch edited Color of objects figures on Di Color of the specified category screens for the specified i Goto screen switch is batch edited
87. for one project EAwINDOWS Desktop Lne a As the storage location of the loaded library file is displayed in the list box at the upper part of the library workspace CAMELSECAGTD2 multiple library files can be easily loaded Ex After using the switch of library file A use the numerical display of library file B Library file A Library file B C WINDOWS Desktop Line A Switching library file 1 C WINDOWS Desktop Tank BI x Bid os E Subject m CAMELSEC GTD2 Userl sunt ET Subject J CAWINDOWS Desktop 3 ibay PED DEET Ee 3 Library a User Lik CAMELSECAGTD2 UserLib 3 Library a User Library Elgg My s st 3 3 User Library My Favorites Ga ay pean EL My Favorites fig 1 Start Switch H E Crystal ig 1 Lamp 1 H AV HQ Soft aa 2 Lamp 2 H E Crystal Ha Retro tia 3 Numerical Display H I Simple a p cm Soft H I Basic Figure id AV E LJ Retro H E ISO Crystal Simple G Dialog J Soft Basic Figure Retro LJ Iso Simple C Dialog H E Basic Fure 9 Iso Pi a Sa 3 Project Category 3 Library j roject Category 3 Library ae O es E y a 01234 7 18 7 3 Creating Original Library 7 3 7 Loading library from file 7 3 8 Importin
88. function OS are the same If the version numbers are different the GOT is not operated Ex 1 Ex 2 Standard monitor OS Ver 9 Standard monitor OS Ver 9 Communication driver Ver 9 Communication driver Ver 8 Extended function OS Ver 9 Extended function OS Ver 8 T The GOT is operated The GOT is not operated 5 1 5 1 Type and Size of Transfer Data to GOT 5 1 1 Data type to be installed on GOT ROM BIOS It is the data required for control of the GOT hardware and communication between the PC and the GOT 2 a d The ROM _BIOS is installed prior to shipment of the GOT r l gt To use the following types functions the ROM_BIOS of the applicable version needs to be installed to O the GOT Type function name Applicable ROM_BIOS version O Use of flash PC card Version F or later z MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor function Version H or later z A9GT QFNB8M n Version H or later Oo A9GT FNB8 amp M nO A9GT FNB1M Hardware version B or later A9GT FNB2M Hardware version B or later Version M or later fe A9GT FNB4M Hardware version B or later z A9GT QFNB Hardware version B or later y i z Use of base screen numbers from 1024 to 4096 Version P or later 6 2 Lu Ethernet connection Version Q or later i Gateway function Version S or later BO CNC monitor function Version W or later KANA KANJI function Font change function Version X or later m LO 1 Check method of R
89. g uy s Q Q 23 ot BE we a BME AL PISS b omits SRE RAC ARVERME CS Toolbars Icon Operation View Category Icon z Q Word Lamp lt x 123 Numerical Display ASC Ascii Display J Data List al 9 23 83 Numerical Input Z Date Display Time Display Comment Display All Commands ae Bit Comment Ee Word Comment hd Description Create Ascii Input ie Q LW Q Z Cl ose lt ad Q 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars 3 24 3 4 2 Customizing toolbars Ex 3 Moving icon 3 GT Designer2 Untitled Select the desired icon for movement and drag it to the ie desired position Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help D SOARS aR new BOB vom AC eT rss w Sy Q 23 ae FH B BT BR SRERACARVEDRS Preferences Toolbars Icon Operation View Category Icon Object Import Panelkit of GT Designer Import Device Comment of GX Develop Window E Preferences a Print Provim Description amp When the toolbars are changed click the button 7 Q Hint Deleting icon and inserting partition While the preferences dialog box is open select the icon and right click the mouse to delete icon or to insert partition e Start Group Delete Delete the selected icon Start Group Insert a partition at the left of the icon It is convenient to group with icons When all icons a
90. has the valid 7 the specified folder Please specify the in the specified folder special data correct folder Q Ww Q Z lt z or Q 5 4 Error Message for Data Transfer 5 38 8 Communication Error No 0008 to 0014 0259 0260 0263 0264 0289 9 Memory card Error No 0288 5 39 Error message Please make sure of communicatoin Error definition and cause Transfer data with the GOT has an error Timeout error Port open error Recieve error Send error GOT type error Error message Create Directory Error OS is not selected for Installing 7 or more memories cannot be selected from the extended function OS Please reduce to a maximum of 6 memoies CNC monitor and KANA KANJI JPN extended OS are compatible with ROM_BIOS Ver 9 2 2 W or later When installing to the GOT please check that the ROM_BIOS is Ver 9 2 2 W or later Continue writing OK 5 4 Error Message for Data Transfer The cable is unplugged The cable is broken The GOT is not responding Communication with the GOT is unstable An error has occurred in communication Non existing communication port is set Data cannot be received from the GOT Data received from the GOT has an error Data cannot be transmitted to the GOT With the communication dialog for the GOT A900 Series communication with non GOT A900 Series is performed With the communication
91. information Memory meter Mi Used W Empty Installed memory 12252 pyte Available size 5516 kbyte User area size 9088 kbyte Project ID 2006292 Delete Get latest Built in memory information Configuration of the monitor data special data and OS is displayed in a tree Right click the tree 1 mouse to Select All or Unselect Built in memory size of the GOT is displayed Installed memory 1 k bytes unit Size of memory that can be used by the user is displayed Available size 1 k bytes unit Area that can be used by a user is displayed as a meter Memory meter 1 Red Used area Blue Free space Size of memory used by the user is displayed User area size 1 k bytes unit Project ID 1 Project ID is displayed Eom Items checked in the built in memory information tree are deleted from the built in memory O Get latest Built in information of the GOT is obtained Eog 4 Itis displayed after the built in memory is obtained 5 19 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable 5 2 2 Getting built in memory information O O Oo O O O O 5 2 3 Uploading When the ROM_BIOS or the OS is installed to the GOT monitor data of the built in memory are deleted To backup the monitor data upload and save them temporarily in the PC hard disk 2 The uploading method is as follows Z gt O Click the Communication To From GOT Q The setting dialog box appears Make settings referring
92. installed is specified Data path Up to 5 historical data specified in the past are retained GOT type The type of GOT to which the OS is installed is selected o Transfer size Size of the OS selected in the function tree is displayed K Install The OS is installed Kea x x x 5 25 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable 5 2 5 Installing OS 9 2 6 Downloading monitor data Downloading monitor data Downloading method of the monitor data is shown below Click the Communication To From GOT The setting dialog box appears Refer to the following descriptions for setting After setting click the button to start installation Item Project configuration tree Delete all old monitor data Project ID Available size Check OS version of GOT Memory meter Transfer size Communicate with GOT Ej OS Instal gt GOT ROM_BIOS Install gt GOT Communication configuration B w Project Untitled Er e Base Screen 7 1 Data display screen L fv 2 Error screen h C Window Screen gt _ Parts Comment fw Common Settings T Delete all old monitor data T Check 05 version of GOT Reece BORGES kemon meter MUsed M Empty Available size kbyte Transfer size B76 bute Select all Deselect Download Wifierenece Close Communicate with GOT dialog box Download GOT tab The project configuration tree is displayed Check the desired item for downlo
93. language 9 4 1 Input method o As the Regional and Language Options dialog box appears select the Languages tab select the appropriate option in Supplemental language support and click the button in Text services and input languages Regional and Language Options Regional Options Languages advanced Text services and input languages To view or change the languages and methods you can use to enter text click Details Details Most languages are installed by default To install additional languages atic anual E When adding Language for the first time Crete files for complex script and right to left languages including Windows XP CD ROM will be required _ Install files for East Asian languages o Z O H O Z 5 LL l gt LL Li aa 5 Supplemental language support APPENDIX O As the Text services and input languages dialog box appears click the button in Supplemental language support INDEX Text Services and Input Languages Settings Advanced Default input language Select one of the installed input languages to use when you start your computer English United States US v Installed services Select the services that you want for each input language shown in the list Use the Add and Remove buttons to modify this list GN English United States Keyboard The Add input language dialog box appears Add Input language Input language E
94. library image list Library Image List _ Q Hint Loading My Favorite library Objects or figures registered to the My Favorite library can be read out from the My Favorite icon on the toolbar Function CAMELSECAGTD Siete User Library Ea Mu Favorites ie 1 Lamp 1 fe 3 Lamp 3 of E Figure A ven AP 7 Figure E 7 6 7 2 Pasting Objects or Figures from Library 7 3 Creating Original Library 7 3 1 Registering objects or figures on library Objects or figures are registered to My Favorite or the user created library ED Select the object figure for registration Perform the following operation 1 Using library workspace Drag the object or figure into the workspace oj x Function T CAMELSECSGTO2 UserL E4 Library AE User Library AS My Favorites k 1 Larnp 1 ie 2 Lamp 2 oa 3 Lamp 3 APT 4 Figure A 2 Using library image list Click the Register button The template property dialog box appears Input the template number and name and click the button Template Property No z Name 30 Switch Cancel 4 Registration is completed i ojx Library Image List x Function C AMELSEC GTD2 Usent Function MyFavortes Ba 3 3 Library G on OF 7a O Ae y eea B C User Library CR My Favorites on fia 1 Lamp 1 orr tig 2 Lamp 2 te 3 Lamp 3 1 Lamp 1
95. mD aie S nak of Property Sheet Property Sheet 6 Circle Circle f z Position 208 Position 205 Line Color Line Color a retenrocoe D festenFac SS PS p e i a ee el Lo 26 F Changing foreground color The change is displayed on the figure a Remark 1 Changing attributes of multiple figures objects 3 Attributes of different types of objects figures cannot be changed at a time ae Z 2 Ex Touch switch and lamp z Bit lamp and word lamp S Circle and rectangle Attributes of grouped objects figures of different types cannot be changed at a time either a F m 2 Figure frame of object The figure frame of object cannot be set with Yes No on the property sheet D Set Yes No of the figure frame by using the dialog box of each object 8 3 Specify the width in the range of 1 to 2000 and specify the height in the range of 1 to 1600 If the value out of the range is specified an error occurs Q LUI m Z lt lt L or A 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 28 8 2 7 Changing attributes of figures and objects Changing attribute with dialog box Select the desired figure object O Double click on the selected figure object The settings dialog box of each figure object appears Change attributes there For the settings dialog box of each figure object see below Ex Changing foreground of a circle from black to white Circle Style Set as Default Width 2 Dot Clear
96. may not be displayed with its actual line width on a personal computer However it will be displayed correctly on GOT This phenomenon does not mean data problem b Display of end points of straight line line freeform polygon As shown below the end points of straight line line freeform polygon are displayed differently between GT Designer2 and GOT On GT Designer 2 On GOT c Start position for filling patterns some filling patterns may be differently displayed For example the start position may be different between GT Desginer2 and GOT d Drawing of different type lines The length of the dots varies in different dotted lines for example the chain lines e Display of object The display position of the memory data display in graph function is different between GT Designer2 and GOT Even if the display start line of a comment has been set the comment will be displayed from the first line on GT Designerz2 10 11 f Display magnification When display magnification is changed the connected lines or figures may be separated or the filled paint may be out of outline of the figure However if they are displayed correctly on the preview screen they will appear correctly on GOT as well Example When filled paint is out of the outline Display magnification 200 Display magnification 100 Position of Paint mark may be shifted and the filled paint may be out of the figure outline Restrictions wh
97. memory card is described With a memory card it is not necessary to carry a PC or cable The data transfer time is faster than that of the communication with the RS 232 cable 1 The working time can be reduced Procedures Data is transferred with the procedures below Memory board ROM BIOS 74 7 gt lt gt 1 Dedicated ZA oes memory When the user area is not sufficient Built in memory or the extended function is used Transfer Transfer data 4 Reference value For screen data 589 572 bytes 30 screens approx 55 sec for memory card and approx 5 min for RS 232 cable 2 When the GOT F900 Series is used data cannot be transferred with the memory card 3 Data in 2 and f can be transferred at the same time depending on the memory card size ROM BIOS 0 0 lt gt Section 5 3 1 Installing ROM_BIOS a Standard monitor OS communication driver and extended function OS PEN EPOE IIE TE E A E T L gt Section 5 3 2 Transferring OS monitor data and special data See ere EAE E EEE lt L gt Section 5 3 2 Transferring OS monitor data and special data 2 Remark Monitor data transfer to memory card To transfer monitor data from the PC to the memory card the project must be opened on the GT Designerz2 Other data than the monitor data can be transferred even if the project is not opened on the GT Designer2 5 29 5 3 Transferring Data
98. o Quickly displayed fwn z Confirming the screen display on the GOT Preview Created Screen Image 1 Section 4 10 Viewing The screen display on the GOT can be confirmed on GT Designer2 Also the windowed screen can be confirmed e To fe Screen Preview B 1 Data display screen File View E amp 256 Colors TION OFF State of 5 Securityjo 7 Numerical Display Numerical Input 012545 once B 1 Data display screen File view olx Alarm Rese Le Fed Alarm Lamp Peas Pre roma Mo J mr j M2 ms j ead z System Alarm 322 The designation device is outside the range Mo M1 E N i OFF Image E Base Screen Preview amp 256 Colors x ON OFF State oir Shp Numerical 012345 Alarm Lamp System Alarm Security Oo if Display Numerical Input 012545 Alarm Reset Switch F aN a x mz M3 K r eee 322 The designation device is Windowed Screen Preview 1 2 Feature 1 2 2 Useful functions SYSTEM SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 CREATING AND DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT if gt a gi gt CONFIGURATION EDITING SCREEN USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 System Configuration in Creating Monitor Screen 2 1 1 System configuration The system configuration of GT Designer2 is shown below
99. of colors GOT Type S Communicat ion z ype I F g Color Settings 256 v Com Driver Confirmation E Screen Switch Next gt Cancel New Project Wizard Confirmation of System Settings for GOT ao New Project Wizard E System Sett ing Confirmation GOT Type Color Settings AI85GOT GT SoftGOT 800x600 256 Colors S Communicat ion IF Com Driver Confirmation Next the equipment to be connected with GOT is set gF Screen Switch lt Back Cancel V Next Q The screen on the left is displayed when GT Designer2 starts Click the button to create a new project D The initial screen of the Start New Project Wizard is displayed button The wizard advances through each setting screen button Click this to cancel the wizard If Show Wizard on New Project is unchecked the wizard will not appear the next time a new project is created D The screen on the left System Settings for GOT is displayed Select the appropriate GOT type and color setting 111 Item Contents GOT Type Select the appropriate GOT type Color Settings Select a display color that matches the GOT setting On the GT Designer2 usable colors are specified button Advance to the next screen button Cancel the settings and quit the wizard 4 The screen on the left Confirmation of System Settings for GOT is displayed Confirm the settings button Go back to the p
100. server GOT client Windows font OMRON temperature controller SHINKO indicating controller CHINO controller FUJI SYS temperature controller YAMATAKE temperature controller YOKOGAWA temperature controller RKC temperature controller Intelligent function module MODBUS TCP Description Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by OMRON Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO LTD Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Sharp Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by JTEKT Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA CORPORATION Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA MACHINE CO LTD Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Ltd Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation Abbreviation of Allen Bradley PLC manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by GE Fanuc Automation Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Schneider Electric SA Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Siemens AG Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by OMRON Corporation
101. shown below k m Title list Screen setting information 0 Z Each screen title is output as shown below Setting items in each screen are output as shown below D m Q Ww Q Z lt z or O 6 2 Printing example 6 13 6 2 2 File output Common Setting Details of common setting are output as shown below A Device List List of set devices is output as shown below A Project Title ProjectID 428122 7 author Mitsubishi Detailed Explanation GOT Type A97 GOT GT SoftGOT 640x480 PLC Type MELSEC QnA Q MELDAS C6 Device Details Details of set devices are output as shown below Device Details EA GOT Device ON Word Device GD Details lo mM Points Screen Number Object Coordinates Object ID O FF Common Setting Screen Switching dg MELSEC QnA Q MELDAS C6 Bit Device x Details Device Points Screen Number Object Coordinates Object ID O FF X001 0 Base 1 Bit Lamp 112176 0011 Base 1 Bit Lamp 170176 X001 2 Base 1 Bit Lamp 228 176 0013 Base 1 Bit Lamp 286 176 Parts List of registered parts is output as shown below Device List j GOT Device Word Device GD List O FF MELSEC QnA Q MELDAS C6 _ Bit Device x List Device O FF X0010 X0011 X0012 X0013 X0021 X0022 X0023 X0024 XOFFF M List Comment Created comments and their attributes are output as shown below A
102. template is displayed G O O W e _ Q Hint Dialog box displaying oe Z5 The size of the Library Image List dialog box can be adjusted by a mouse operation 5 X A L Library Image List x My Favorites as Library Imagi x gt a a a r 7 DRAW AND EDIT 7 1 What is Library 7 5 7 1 2 Basic operation of library 7 2 Pasting Objects or Figures from Library Objects or figures registered to the library are pasted on the screen ED Select the template for pasting and paste it on the drawing screen 1 Pasting from library workspace ET I Function CAMELSEC GTD2 Usert 3 Library Ee rhe ee Oe oe a tee Beanie gar pie Mis Bt GES cit bee Ea User Library ay C9 es Grate ale ees OA its FAYE A Ae EGS My Favorites force z 1 Lamp 1 ale 3 Lamp 3 mie AP E Figure A EA a a a keanan AA et Ge e R a A S A S AP 7 Figure E OS EA E EAEE O a OS a a E E pa 8 Numerical Display el __ e H E Switch im Mie e 5 a a a Sel o its ia e a a ae a her aA aa 2 ae ger a Saat fen Ga Figure mee Mike a tar 4 O a A a Yn e gids gta tome ae etn at cu cee ae om oe ger Ponte Meee fone V oe Ea Key i gt smite a ia siy oa Mv RR SR RR OS tg RS oR QE Si oS ew Se m a Ceeanin Derk a G E Project Z Category ae Library Garn a fir Sie a et was SSB et ea Ae be l fe fasta eis EW Ea G 2 Pasting from
103. text size is 8 x 16 dots horizontal x vertical GOT A900 Series GOT F900 Series Al x0 5 to x8 Al x0 5 to x8 x0 5 to x8 x1 to x8 Check this to use the high quality font It is available only when the horizontal and vertical sizes are set to 2 4 6 or 8 times When a category is assigned to the figure the category is selected gt Section 9 1 2 Batch setting and managing objects figures for each purpose Category workspace Text with the font size of 6 x 8 dots is Text with the font size of 6 x 8 dots is displayed AAA Interval between lines is set p Interval x Kee an this to use the current attribute as the default user setting In the next attribute setting the default user setting is displayed O Click this to return the attribute as the default value to the initial status fea O Remark a Ex 1 Precautions for vertical text If the text is displayed in the vertical direction the text is displayed as follows 1 Ex 2 Caution Horizontal 10 20 Horizontal Caution Vertical 1 Vertical 0 C a 2 u 0 t i O n 2 Font types that can be displayed on GOT a 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 1 2 Entering text Font types displayed on the GT Desinger2 can be displayed on the GOT However fonts that are displayed as or in different sizes after arrangement on the drawing screen cannot be displayed on the GOT even if these fonts are correctly defin
104. the 2 1 21 2 ODEFAlIMOENVITORMACIM ieni estes Siete od Sraaath wee aboot ene tee adnate teds 2 1 2 2 System Configuration of Data Transfer and Document Creation cceee 2 3 22A SY SII COMME UMA TOM steeds gsc enrages etd heated an rene a a e a S 2 3 222 Ro 292 CADIS TO DE USEC doriarra a a a A a die tionnaluueisles 2 5 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 E nese ea ieee ee E eee ata NE E EE 3 1to 3 36 3 1 Screen Configuration and Basic Operation cccccecccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeesseeees 3 1 3 1 1 Screen configuration and various tools cc cece cece seecceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeaeesaeesseeeses 3 1 3 12 Operation OF WOKS DaT Onenna a Nae a a a a a a 3 4 S MNENE ON OUP AMO N ea saccaa woe racehacaten ences sonsaun cane Sutat oiesmaseceeee emeaees ease 3 8 5 FF gal IO 0 6s ho emer ae me Mtr ee E eee Oo PRA et POE ae ee A 3 11 Sal TVOS OOOD S tices a5 0 cot eens staal ae uc a eo tre 3 11 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and TOOIDArS cccecccecccecceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseees 3 19 3 4 1 CUSTOMIZING screen CONTFIQUIATION cc cece ceccceecceeeeae cess eeeeeeeseeaeeeseeeseueeseeeseeeseeeseueesueeaeeesaeeaes 3 20 34 2 CUSTOMIZING DA Sora n a a r A de canes 3 22 3 4 3 Customizing GT Designer2 operating ENVIFONMENL cccccccceeeceeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeaeetaaes 3 26 342 DISDIAY WIN Tamo enaa a aaa a a a a a 3 32 3 4 5 Redisplaying drawi
105. to the description below 6 After setting click the Upload button to start upload gt mD 0 UW Bz gt O OS Install gt GOT ROM_BIOS Install gt GOT Communication configuration NO Download gt GOT Upload gt Computer Memory information Special data amp w Project Untitled amp Base Screen y 1 Main menu 5 7 2 Line A D x 7 3 Line B 26 amp w Window Screen 2 za v Common Settings i DBO fa z O Own O Password r YG Upload path GT Designer2 O u O1 Upload Memory Information Communicate with GOT dialog box Upload Computer tab Configuration of the obtained monitor data is displayed in a tree md LL O Z ZO Q Eg Su mO Project configuration tree Right click the mouse to Select All or Unselect When the password for upload is set input the password Password 1 LEALI Each input is displayed as Storage location of the uploaded monitor data is set Up to 5 historical data specified in the past are retained PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT Upload path When data is uploaded in default GT Designer2 the uploaded data are read into the currently open GT Designer2 Items checked in the project configuration tree are uploaded When the project configuration tree is not displayed all monitor data of the GOT built in memory are uploaded If the space of the upload destination is not
106. 1 Data type to be installed on GOT To operate the GOT it is necessary to transfer the following data to the GOT In the GOT F900 Series as the data including the OS has been written prior to shipment the data transfer is not necessary arn Transfer geen 4 Area in GOT on paeme a er e To een a S e O S OE an pee l A eee o mmeone mne o ea fofo Special data nm special module motion Built in memory MEDS c in this section x servo amplifier monitor data Data must be transferred A Data needs to be transferred depending on the function 1 Transfer destination Dedicated memory Area to store the ROM _ BIOS standard monitor OS and communication driver Calculation or addition of the memory space is not required Built in memory Area to store the extended function OS monitor data and special data Calculation of the memory space and addition of the memory is required as necessary Point P 1 Downloading monitor data When the version of the ROM_BIOS and the OS standard monitor OS communication driver and extended function OS of the GT Designerz2 is later than that of the system program installed on the GOT the new functions may not be compatible It is recommended to reinstall the ROM_BIOS and the OS when downloading the monitor data to the GOT 2 Installing OS Make sure that the version numbers leftmost version of the OS standard monitor OS communication driver and extended
107. 128 112 22 Library 37 Project 2 Library is Object Category an screen Com Category Hone Q dialog box oes gt sete 5 When a data import is executed based on the setting so that the data No to be assigned will exceed the effective No range the data out of the No range cannot be imported Example When importing base screen data Source project Destination project Importing screen No 1 to No 4 into screen No 32766 head No and the corresponding No Screen No z 32767 The last effective screen No 32767 The data out of the effective No range cannot be imported 6 When the System Environment setting window is opened on the destination project System Environment cannot be selected Not displayed in the tree structure When importing the System environment setting close the System Environment setting window on the destination project and then select the project to be imported 9 6 Utilizing other project data 9 38 9 6 2 Cautions 7 Depending on the file formats of the source project and destination project the Import project function cannot be executed The following table shows the file compatibility between the source project and destination project Compatible Incompatible Source project Destination project GTD file DUP file GOT file GT Designer2 file DU WIN file GT Designer file GT Designer2 1 O GT Designer2 DU W
108. 2 lt z i 2 zZ 2 Cable to be created Use the F2 232CAB 1 connection cable when the PLC CPU and the GOT are z used at the same time with FX 2PIF by connecting the F940GOT or the F930GOT 5 to the A series CPU or the FX series CPU through the RS 422 cable A 3 QO 2 2 System Configuration of Data Transfer and Document Creation 2 6 2 2 2 RS 232 cable to be used 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 3 1 Screen Configuration and Basic Operation 3 1 1 Screen configuration and various tools Screen configuration and various tools The screen configuration and various tools are described Title bar a 1 Designer2 Untitled Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help nee Venu bar Toolbars D SO ARs 2 e ccne BAM vom AOS r OAdsa SOME fie fho e Ae I Title bar 57 Q e ot 2S OF HK AR ALA PIAS lb a in oe a a y axi BIB 4 Front Back Data Display Screen al Data View B 4 Front B ack Data Display Screen M Objects T Display Overlay Screen ai Project a EN Base Screen 1 Production Output Screen 1 2 Numerical Input and Display 3 Message Display 4 Data Display Screen 5 Error Cause Confirmation Scre 6 Multilingual Input 7 Main Menu C Window Screen C Report Screen H Common Settings H I Comment M Figures Object Numt Data View Data Indicator panel Data Input All obj
109. 2 Editing figures and objects Different types of editing can be made for the figures and objects arranged on the screen z m ED Select the desired figure object for editing gt 3 Perform the following operations according to the editing details Z Delete Figures and objects are deleted Edit Delete O O 2 t 2 Cut Figures and objects are cut da Cut O a e Edit Cut y 5 nO e Ep Copy Figures and objects are copied Copy O e Edit Copy S a Past 3 Paste The cut copied figures and objects are pasted PARE O S Z Edit Paste 8H aye The front back position of the figure object is me replaced Bring to Front 0 DO e Edit Bring to Front Ex Bringing selected figure to the front Front Back 2 ZY e H Send to Back O 5 T 26 e Edit Send to Back ra Li E X O O The selected figure is flipped Not available for objects e Flip Vertical Fe Ex Flipping selected figure verticall TE Flip Vertical Flin X F PPing ee eae Edit Rotate Flip Flip Vertical Bo Horizontal O g2 e Ak Flip Horizontal ra lt lt Ew Edit Rotate Flip Flip Horizontal AG Figure is rotated 90 degrees to right left Not F available for objects a An 2g Ex Rotating selected figure 90 degrees to left Rotate Left SE EO Rotate Lef
110. 2 Lamp 2 3 Lamp 3 Ap 4 Figure AP 5 Figure B 012945 HA 6 Numerical Display B Ag 7 3D Switch 4FigueA 5FigueB 6 Numerica H Lamp H Switch J Figure ro fom Uns xl 3 Project Category 3 Library 7 3D Swite Library workspace Library image list 7 3 Creating Original Library 7 3 1 Registering objects or figures on library OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT as gt X x ad co Z T 5 DRAW AND EDIT Point P Whether a template includes any objects or not can be identified by an icon display in the library workspace oj x Function CAMELSECSGOT OA User E a Library S E User Library d a My Favorites By 1 Figure A ma 4 amp 6 2 Figure B E 3 Numerical Display MTS 4 Panel A lM 5 Panel B A LA 1 Switch 3 ca HE 1 Toggle Switch Red ae Toggle Switch Bule fl 3 ToggleSwith 2 Aia 4 Radio Switch AE 5 Switch Aled BY B Switch A Bule aaj 2 Lamp ae HE 1 Lamp Red l 4 amp 6 2 Lamp Red seen 4 amp 0 3 Lamp Green a p 4 Lamp Bule Ey Project Z Category 34 Library 7 3 Creating Original Library ED ma User libraries created by GT Designer2 of version before 2 07H User libraries including objects User libraries not including objects 7 3 1 Registering objects or figures on library 7 3 2 Copying registered library template
111. 4 9 Overwriting and saving 4 4 56 Providing title 2 00200 ee 4 12 SAVING CAS ss a tbe eda deb ad eee kee E 4 56 Property sheet 2 00000 cee eee 9 1 R REAO esea a a ee wt Aa a Bk 8 18 Referring to device comment 9 21 REDANG a 2 uie VIG Y keak Koide teens e 8 18 RS 232 cable to be used 2 5 S screen Cascading tiling screens 4 38 Changing property 0005 4 40 CIOSING suutAtwhs redia tad Cees cates 4 21 Copying screen data 4 6 4 47 Creating anew screen 4 4 13 Deleting screen data 4 4 50 Making editing screen active 4 39 OPENING sareari terete tied eens oe ee 4 17 Operating multiple screens 4 38 Viewing screen image 6 4 43 Screen configuration 000005 3 1 Selecting figure and object 8 18 Setting communication 5 18 Setting screen switching device 4 52 Short cut list ai eiee mra a cuted midband esate App 1 System configuration System configuration in creating monitor screen a e a A a a aA a a Gal reer 2 1 System configuration of data transfer and document Crealo dened aa a erates E e tee arate te 2 1 T Transferring data using PC card 5 29 Transferring data with RS 232C cable 5 13 Transferring OS monitor data and special data 5 34 Type
112. 448 192 The name coordinates and object ID Sector 192 1 76 208 192 for objects only of the selected figures Sector 32 192 448 208 and the objects are displayed fee Peis a Sector 192 192 208 208 ee G3Bit Switch 48 32 196 80 10000 ee rs G3Numerical Display 48 128 195 143 10001 When the figures objects are selected G4Bit Lamp 144 32 1192 80 10002 the corresponding objects on the G4Numerical Display 144 7 28 1 91 143 screen are selected WE hein cane op ees a ee G is displayed before the name of a x eas ade li ee Ree ee ee Be grouped figure Q Z Useful for cases below If multiple objects or figures are overlapped desired figures or objects can be easily selected and edited eee ce Data View B 3 MV Objects IV Figures Object Number fo Object Figure Object ID Rectangle 64 80 144 160 Polygon 64 80 144 160 ete a E Circle 64 80 144 160 yet a Wie Desired figures to change Meee ers attributes can be easily selected from the data view Operation method ED Select the Tool Data View from the menu The data view is displayed Double click the object figure to be edited from the data list Point f Individual settings for grouped objects Grouped objects selected from the data list can have individual settings changed without ungrouping 9 1 Edit Function 9 16 9 1 4 Simple selection of overlapped figure Data view 9 1 5 Checking devic
113. 6 Confirm the setting 3 Screen Switch Device Base Screen GD100 O Overlap Window X Overlap Window2 oO Superimpose Window z a gt button Go back one screen 5O Y button Complete making settings using ai the wizard and the screen property dialog box is displayed a 7 gt Cancel button Cancel the settings and quit the re ad wizard m lt Back Finish Cancel l O Z D D Fn Q LU Q Z lt ad Q 4 2 Creating a New Project 4 4 4 2 Creating a New Project D The screen property dialog box is displayed Input the screen home Click the button to create base screen 1 2 Screen switching device setting method ojx l Pinna ED Double click Common Settings System z Environment in the project workspace z gt A O E Report fcr A Copak Cokhinaz ik oyster Environment 6 E ae Library 20 ie 26 l D O A zZ OOOO SE i As the System Environment dialog box is E o SS displayed double click Screen Switching 2 oy Prlect Folder oject LU i 35 O i aye dardkont t mothe liasge oe Cancel eo DP O A Double click Gi Ow Z Y LO One 9 ni O Ow ei System Environment i P 7 a E Sen Eronen at E As the Screen Switching Device Settings m ree Tile vitcting D100 A 22839 i is di 6 ea E oe feu eo dialog box is displayed set Base Screen ZO anmenara r Display P e EA E HE UEV C BCD re E ra eNi Switch
114. 86 176 10005 344 176 10006 402 176 0007 460 176 10008 518 176 10009 516 176 0010 M Details Points Screen Coordinates 0 FF Base 112 256 Base 1 160 256 Base 208 256 Base 1 256 256 Base 304 256 Base 1 352 256 Base 400 256 Base 1 i 448 256 Base 496 256 Base 1 i 544 256 Base 112 336 Base 1 160 336 Base 1 240 336 D Details Device Points Screen Number Object Coordinates Object ID 0 FF D100 b0 Base 1 Bit Switch 206 96 10001 Base 1 Bit Switch 96 48 10000 6 2 Printing example 6 2 1 Printer output Device Word D GD List Device List List of set devices is printed as shown below File Name DAMELSEC GT D2 Example900 Introduction aaa GTD Date 2005 07 23 List GOT Device evice Device OFF GD100 MELSE X List C OnA4vQ MELDAS C6 Bit Device Device OFF 0010 X0011 X0012 X0013 X0021 X0022 X0023 X0024 XOFFF Wl List Device O FF M100 M101 M102 M103 M104 M105 M106 M107 M108 M109 M225 M300 M320 Comment Created comments and their attributes are printed as shown below File Name C WINDOWS full monitor_data GTD Date 2003 07 03 Comment List Line A stopped Line B stopped Line C stopped
115. Appendix 4 3 Downloading monitor data POINT Make sure to download the monitor data after installing the same OS version as GT Designer2 into the GOT OS version of GT Designer2 m OS version installed Precautions used to download inGOT When the monitor data is downloaded using the software with the same or newer OS version installed in the GOT some functions settings are invalid due to OS incompatibility Solution It is recommended to reinstall the latest OS The OS version installed in GOT can be checked within the utility internal memory information Appendix 4 Applicable Monitor Data App 13 Appendix 4 3 Downloading monitor data USEFUL FUNCTIONS x lt O Z m A o lt x INDEX Appendix 4 4 Copying monitor data from one GOT unit to other unit with a PC card POINT When writing monitor data to a memory card make sure Memory card to write the OS as well Also when downloading the _ E GOT monitor data make sure to install the OS to the GOT A OS version of copy source OS version installed i GT Desi 2 or GOT jin GOT Precautions esigner2 or in If the OS version in the target GOT is the same or older than the one in the source GOT some functions settings are invalid due to OS incompatibility Solution It is recommended to copy OS with monitor data into PC card and copy them into the target GOT The OS version installed in GOT can be checked within the utility internal m
116. Cable for use Cable Manufacturer AC30R2 9SS 9 pin 9 pin FX 232CAB 1 9 pin 9 pin AC30R2 9P 9 pin 25 pin F2 232CAB 1 9 pin 25 pin Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 3 Connection diagram Use the screw in type inch screw connector for the GOT a Connection diagram for cables equivalent to AC30R2 9SS and FX 232CAB 1 Shield b Connection diagram for cables equivalent to AC30R2 9P and F2 232CAB 1 Shield 2 5 2 2 System Configuration of Data Transfer and Document Creation 2 2 2 RS 232 cable to be used Using GOT F900 series The cable shown below or in the connection diagram is required FX 232CAB 1 F2 232CAB 1 oe GOT 1 System configuration AO OVERVIEW 2 Cable for use zZ O H T a gt Oo LL Z O O SYSTEM Cable Manufacturer AC30R2 9SS 9 pin 9 pin Mitsubishi Electric Corporation FX 232CAB 1 9 pin 9 pin 6 3 Connection diagram P Use the screw in type inch screw connector for the GOT 66 a Connection diagram for cables equivalent to FX 232CAB 1 H OL No fa On 26 HE Z Q O Wl Shield b Connection diagram for cables equivalent to F2 232CAB 1 i 09 25 Be 38 i Shield O le 25 EE g Point 7 1 Cable to be used F e The cable for the Version A or later cannot be used The RS 232 cable for the Version A or later has the version name at the upper right of the model on the connector Check the version
117. Close menu The open project data is closed 4 3 Opening Closing Project 4 3 2 Closing project 4 4 Setting the Project Title Set the details of the project project ID detailed explanation author etc Lu gt ED Choose the Common System Environment menu i O Double click Project Title under System Environment As the Project Title dialog box appears set the following items and click the button z z i System Environment TORX a System Environment O System Settings Project Title E Project Title 2 O 2 Ausiliary Setting WO Gig System Information Project ID 698704 T saa stile Detailed Explanation He cai wien z Switching Station No w Video AGB q A Print Format D hra W 2 Z 692 On 20 a nO Cancel Appl A Z of LO On 20 EZ niz ro Ow 1 Set the project title as necessary Project title O LL Up to 32 characters can be entered Ds O The project ID can be set within the range of 1 to 4294967295 by the user although it is LE Project ID 1 l l l l O Po automatically assigned when the project data is created Lu LA Enter the explanation for the project as necessary ao Detailed Explanation Up to 512 characters can be entered O A line feed is counted as two characters gt O Set the author name as necessary W Author O O Up to 8 characters can be entered ne 5 A O Refer to the following for details of 1 fz Z u Z A Ww
118. D ID are displayed for each object Screen Color Screen background color is set i Screen Pattern Screen background pattern is set m ma Screen Background Color Screen background color is set Workspace Workspace is displayed Property Sheet Property Sheet is displayed 3 13 3 3 Toolbars 3 3 1 Types of toolbars Figure Z vV Om AOS OMA a ao z gt or Name Description O A Continuous line is drawn 5 x or L Rectangle Rectangle is drawn op ie 26 gt Rectangle Filled Filled rectangle is drawn nO 3 A Polygon Polygon is drawn Z mam R lt gt Circle Circle is drawn g if 69 Own ZO S Circle Filled Filled circle is drawn W BO f Arc Arc is drawn Zz Sector Sector is drawn aire ZY To 2 N x wW E ein ey Polygon and closed area are painted with the selected pattern i D Import Image BMP format file is imported on the editing screen 26 a EL lt i Rectangular Range Area Rectangular range area is captured a O L Dif Import DXF DXF format file is imported on the editing screen OL T 25 EO Zu oY On gt a lt x co za Z U gt Q im Q Z xt z O 3 3 Toolbars 3 14 3 3 1 Types of toolbars Object Sy h Qu 123 Ase 2 BP a
119. DIX INDEX 9 1 2 Batch setting and managing objects figures for each purpose Category workspace What is Category The set objects figures are stored in any of the following categories Switch Lamp and Others sorting objects and figures into the user category for each application allows management of objects and figures Switch category Lamp category Other category User category Category Switch category Lamp category Other category User category Hl GT Designer2 C WINDOWS Desktop Production A GTD Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help JO CSUARL aac ne MAR Z vom AOS r OAM II fs v fioox v fis amp ON orF bev 1D Z 2 ali L s Q Q 23 s BS R R h E A AE AL Mh D JA DY l ax ppm seein E 2 m Switch Bit Switch B 1 16 400 Bit Switch B 2 16 400 E Lamp Se Bit Lamp B 1 16 16 Se Bit Lamp B 2 16 16 Others D Line Graph B 2 80 144 8f Bit Parts Display B 1 576 24 h Bit Parts Display B 2 416 24 El Goto Screen Switch Goto Screen Switch B 1 44 Goto Screen Switch B 2 57 Screen Name Error Screen Screen Type Base Screen Security 0 Detailed Explanation e Screen Color Na GOTO SCREEN SWITCH is Selected AIPGOT GT SotGOT 640x480 256 Colors MELSEC OnA 0 MELDAS CE E 448 400 x 272 1 25 INUM S 4 Description Stores
120. Default Color Pattern O on M Category Others Category Others Cancel Cancel Change the setting of foreground The change is displayed on the figure Circle Style E Set as Default 7 Width Dot Clear Default Color Pattern E Foreground on e Settings dialog box of each figure Section 8 1 1 Drawing figures e Settings dialog box of object gt GT Desinger2 Version Reference Manual 8 29 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 2 7 Changing attributes of figures and objects 8 2 8 Changing size of figures objects im Changing overall size scaling up down gt gt Select the desired figure or object O D Move the cursor to a handle of figure or object Drag it to change the size of figure or object zZ Ex Changing vertical and horizontal sizes Ex Changing vertical and horizontal sizes from corner 2 o ie 26 HO Z e E o LZ ro 2 a O Q Hint 1 Operation in combination with the and keys aia z O Operation in combination with the and keys allows the following BO changes of size Ex Changing sizes without changing the horizontal to vertical ratio z efr Drag while pressing the key ie Ow 7 GE X O Ow or ma Ex Changing vertical and horizontal sizes from the center L gO Drag while pressing the key Eg lt U AG m O ES Dz Ex Changing sizes from the center without chang
121. E Z Q O Wl ad Lu D 25 FE lt U Ao _a 5 r N m Point F on e When the center of width or height is selected the guideline is displayed at ae i A z Z the center of the width or height of the display target E 5 ry F LU e The type of grouped figures and objects is group and the guideline is r displayed for the grouped figures and objects regardless of the contents of the group e The touch area of touch switch is not the target of the guideline z a e The guideline is not displayed when operating the keyboard ce za zZ ep 2 Q LL a Z lt z x a A 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 26 8 2 5 Aligning figures and objects 8 8 27 2 6 Enlarging or reducing multiple figures and objects Multiple figures and objects can be enlarged or reduced when they are selected D Select the figures and objects to be enlarged or reduced All the selected figures and objects can be enlarged or reduced by dragging the handle a a 5 af fe a oe 0 6 E I 4 A 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 2 6 Enlarging or reducing multiple figures and objects 8 2 Changing attributes of figures and objects Changing attributes with property sheet a ad Lu Select the desired figure object 6 D Change the attribute of the selected figure object on the property sheet 6 Ex Changing foreground color of a circle from black to white lt
122. E BQ mw els EF resi Yr omAC r amAAM mM fe SabeBBOeW a aRA m The monitor data of the GT Designer or DU WIN are read out with the GT Designer2 Ihk The read data is saved as the GT Designer2 data It cannot be saved as the GT Designer or DU WIN format file Refer to the following for reading or saving method lt a Section 4 3 2 Closing project Section 4 14 2 Saving as project name c Remark When converting the Du wim file to the GT11 data R 1 Start the GT Designer2 with GT11 2 Import project data with Import Project of the GT Designer 2 Refer to project Data Conversion Summary for details of the project data conversion App 6 Appendix 3 Using Existing Data Appendix 3 1 Outline procedures Appendix 3 2 Precautions Using the GT Designer monitor data 1 The object setting dialog box is displayed with all extended functions selected USEFUL FUNCTIONS Ex When setting the touch switch Tabs of the extended functions are displayed x lt O Z Lu A o lt x i Bit Word P Function Base Window i Station No Edt Key Code FFFF Delete Display Style R ON OFF Q Shape Rectangle 1 rect_ Li Reverse itch rea Frame M Background Category Switch v Extended Function IV Extended IV Indirect Text M Trigger Extended functions are checked
123. EEET EELE AN ETER EEEE EEEND xO0omBAOOC C AwA aM fe z o slic amp on for Ov 10 2 2 JB SHOmBACeCA AA mm fe 100 yfie T amp ON oF Dev D 2 E 2 Jem Bo B E h A B G A A Q GO E a E e n Er a A E 57 a Q e s B S O l e Sh K A S SL OA SN a PSs moe ee D gt z T Display Overlay Screen AST GOTS SAO ANAW ES Colors MESECOT MELOAS Co FT00 A2 Click O at the upper right to pop up the workspace property sheet or the data view Workspace Property Sheet Data View Screen Data View B 1 Front B ack Production Output Scr Display Overlay Screen Project tiute Value O M Objects Figures E Ion Cr T vem F cae Sieen Number Object Figure Position _Laper Obj indaw Screen 3 16 16 431 47 Back Common Settings Screesf ame Productign Output Scree Peretane aes Back Comment screen TYN Superimpose windowd 376 104 584 192 Click here Appendix 2 Q amp A of GT Designer2 Operation App 3 Q3 The cursor remains to be mark Objects are continuously arranged How can the cursor be recovered The cursor is not recovered A3 After arrangement of an object right click the mouse or press the key on the keyboard to recover the cursor to l To maintain the cursor to an arrow mark select Project Preferences and check Tool de select after use on the operati
124. Figure Displays the Figure toolbar v Propertysheet AI wv Object Displays the Object toolbar whe eat 3 Displays the Edit toolbar Library OO O O ee oi Displays the Align toolbar Zoom Draw Displays the Draw toolbar Window Preview Communication Displays the Communication toolbar es acer Displays the Report toolbar Redisplay F5 My Favorites Displays the My Favorites toolbar v Display Touch Area Comment Displays the Comment toolbar r T y Ceanna azie Displays the Coordinate Size toolbar al do Customize Displays the Toolbars tab of the Preferences dialog box Guidelines Options If you drag a displayed toolbar it may be arranged as a window on the screen The following pages also describe details of each toolbar 3 11 3 3 Toolbars 3 3 1 Types of toolbars W gt f Name Description S O i New New project file is created E Existing project file is opened 5 3 LA Save Project Editing project is overwritten and saved on the existing file D EiT 26 gt at Cut Figures and objects are cut Zz O z N D X LH A 60 Own Ww qa ae RO Figures and objects are copied Ke Figures and objects are pasted Z a The last operation is cancelled to recover the status before change a zZ
125. Frame Device Object ID text color Device Object ID background color Object Frame color Editor background color Parts Library E at Description Dot value 1 2 4 8 or 16 is selected for automatic arrangement of figures or objects on the screen Position of grid display is selected Front Grid is displayed at the front of the screen Back Grid is displayed at the back of the screen None Grid is not displayed Grid spacing 2 to 64 dots is set Color Display items 3 29 Device Object ID Grid display color is selected Items displayed on the GT Designer2 are checked Ex Filling in white When a closed figure is filled with Paint this item is selected to display the filled status Ex x 1000 This item is selected to display the device name set in the object This item is selected to display CH NO NW NO PC station number and the device name set in the object This item is selected to display the object ID of each object The object ID is automatically put on each object Ex 10000 It is convenient to display the object ID in setting the system CEE play j g the sy information Refer to the manual below for details of system information PS lt gt GT Designer2 VersionO Reference Manual 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars 3 4 3 Customizing GT Designer2 operating environment mn Display items Ex Display of l
126. GOT type error The GOT type is incorrect Corrective action Select the same GOT type as the GOT to be used Specify the valid ROM_BIOS folder Corrective action Select the same GOT type as the GOT for installation of the OS OS is not selected for Installing Item to be installed is not selected Select the item in the function tree 7 or more memories cannot be The extended function OS to be installed exceeds the number of selected from the extended function OS required memories 6 that can be Please reduce to a maximum of 6 installed on the GOT memoies Effective OS is not existed in the o The valid OS file is not found in the a specified folder me specified folder Please specify the correct folder The selected function is competing with Installing extended function OS is in the function already installed on the conflict with already installed GOT They cannot be operated at the same time on the GOT e g MELSEC A ladder monitor and MELSEC Q ladder monitor Please install again after deleting the installed function 5 37 5 4 Error Message for Data Transfer Select the extended function OS to be installed so that the number of the required memories may be within 6 L gt Section 5 1 1 function OS Extended Specify the valid OS folder Delete the function installed on the GOT with the built in memory information and reinstall it gt Section 5 2 2 Ge
127. IA gt ENE or Name Description u O L Bring to Front Selected figures and objects are arranged to front L Send to Back Selected figures and objects are arranged to back z O 7 rim Selected figures and objects are grouped n ae LL V zZ Ak Flip Horizontal Selected figure is flipped horizontally 3 6 Ke Flip Vertical Selected figure is flipped vertically g gt ra 69 if Rotate Left Selected figure is rotated 90 degrees to the left 2 it wt kz de Rotate Right Selected figure is rotated 90 degrees to the right il Edit Vortex Length of freeform line or polygon line is changed ain Ze ee Align Selected figures and objects are aligned D T 26 EZ c Ek Selection Figure Only figures are selected X 5 Ow Selection Object Only objects are selected Selection Figure and Object Figures and objects are selected i Oz ZO ie Adjust Direct Text Size Text size of the target object is automatically adjusted with the size of object area re ce Ew AG Align 3a eB 88 Ht UL ras Name Description aL OF 25 ae Align Left Aligned with the selected leftmost figure or object 5 r a i TE Align Center Horizontally Aligned at the center horizontally vel Align Right Aligned with the selected rightmost figure or object Be Align Top Aligned with the selected uppermost figure or object m zj A Align Center Vertically Aligned at the center vertically ao Align Botto
128. IN format 2 1 The newly created project or the project edited by using the GTD GOT file 2 The project edited by using the DU WIN file This file project remains GT Designer2 DU WIN format project cannot be changed to GTD file even when an attempt is made to save it as GTD file Status observation function The base status observation function cannot be imported from the common settings Import the screen data that includes the setting The project status observation function can be imported from the common settings Other cautions When selecting multiple screen No they will be imported into the screen No at the same intervals as before the import Source project Destination project Importing screen No 1 3 5 into screen No 100 head No and the corresponding No Screen No Screen No T Import i 9 39 9 6 Utilizing other project data 9 6 2 Cautions APPENDIX Appendix 1 List of Shortcut Keys List of shortcut keys for menu Project P O Hir a Edit E 15 iv She uy View V A t i Screen S Item New Screen N Open O Save S Print P Exit X Undo U Redo R Cut T Copy C Paste S Delete D Select All S Group
129. LO One 9 ni ro Ow on Soc D The initial screen of the Start New Project Wizard i Auta Sei OOO csc ono weLoesce to Hi o R is displayed 25 a eS ae button The wizard advances through QO each setting screen Double click l button Click this to cancel the wizard 5 If Show Wizard on New Project is unchecked 2 i mala the wizard will not appear the next time a new ea project is created a Zu oY i T ae s The initial screen of the Start New Project Wizard a Tie Switching ooo t t si Dev ai is displ ayed a Auxiliary Setting T Overlap Window1 gt a System Information T Disclay Position is specified with the device C BCD ad H Screen Switching eee p xt oan No PE ee joa th EB Pn Fomai ane button The wizard advances through 5 verlap Window2 a Z a ane ny eee each setting screen D Te Window bar None _ a button Click this to cancel the wizard eee If Show Wizard on New Project is unchecked K aoe the wizard will not appear the next time a new oo Cancel Apply i Q project is created a CZ lt x z Z Q 4 2 Creating a New Project 4 8 4 3 Opening Closing Project 4 3 1 Opening project A saved project data is read from the project save source ED Perform either of the following operations e Click amp Open e Select Project Open menu The open dialog box is displayed Item Look in File name Files o
130. N MANUAL GT Designer2 9 33 9 4 Inputting multiple language 9 4 2 Precautions 9 5 Confirming the created data size Before transferring the monitor data created using GT Designer2 to the GOT data size can be confirmed for each screen or project 9 5 1 Confirmation method o Z O H O Z 5 LL l gt LL Li aa 5 select Tool Data Size Screen Project menu x o The data size dialog box appears Confirm the data size 2 9 5 2 Confirmation items Screen i Q Z Item Editing Screen Title Data Size Project Item Project Path Title Data Size Editing Screen E ase Screen fi Title main zCTEEN Data Size 136 Byte F The editing screen type and screen No are displayed Ko O The screen title is displayed Keg O The screen data size is displayed O O Data Size Froject Project Path CAWINDOWS Desktop F2 002 GTD Tithe la line control Data Size ie Byte F The path for the editing project is displayed o O The project title is displayed O The project data size is displayed Rea O 9 5 Confirming the created data size 9 34 9 5 1 Confirmation method 9 6 Utilizing other project data It is possible to utilize other project data i e import other project data Source project into the currently edited project Destination data This function is effective when utilizing multiple project data It supports GT Designer data as well 9 6 1 Importing data
131. NB16M GT15 QFNB32M Option function board GT15 QFNB48M GT15 MESB48M GT11 50FNB Battery GT15 BAT GT11 50BAT Protective Sheet Protective cover for oil USB environmental protection cover Stand Attachment Backlight Multi color display board Connector conversion box Emergency stop sw guard cover Memory loader GT15 90PSCB GT15 80PSCB GT15 70PSCB GT15 60PSCB GT15 50PSCB GT11 50PSCB GT11H 50PSC GT10 30PSCB GT10 20PSCB GT05 90PCO GT05 50PCO GT15 UCOV GT15 90STAND GT05 50STAND GT15 70ATT 98 GT15 60ATT 87 GT15 90XLTT GT15 70VLTN GT15 XHNB GT11H CNB 37S GT11H 50ESCOV GT10 LDR GT15 90PSGB GT15 80PSGB GT15 70PSGB GT15 60PSGB GT15 50PSGB GT11 50PSGB GT10 30PSGB GT10 20PSGB GT05 80PCO GT11 50UCOV GT15 80STAND GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 77 GT15 80SLTT GT15 60VLTT GT15 VHNB GT15 90PSCW GT15 80PSCW GT15 70PSCW GT15 60PSCW GT15 50PSCW GT11 50PSCW GT10 30PSCW GT10 20PSCW GT05 70PCO GT15 70STAND GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 50ATT 95W GT15 70SLTT GT15 60VLTN GT15 90PSGW GT15 80PSGW GT15 70PSGW GT15 60PSGW GT15 50PSGW GT11 50PSGW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSGW GT05 60PCO A9GT 50STAND GT15 60ATT 96 GT15 50ATT 85 GT15 70VLTT m Software Abbreviations and generic terms GT Works2 Version GT Designer2 VersionO GT Designer2 GT Converter2 GT Simulator2 GT SoftGOT 1000 GT SoftGOT2 GX Developer GX Simulator
132. Nd SAVING PFOJCl ccccceeccssccescecseecaeeceeeceueceuecsaeecaueseeeceaeeseeeceeeseeeseeeeaeeesseesanees 4 56 4 14 29avVing as project NaNe eee ey ee eee ne eer eet eee eee ere 4 56 AS ENDANG GT DESINE seer a shea ole an abate S 4 58 5 DATA TRANSFER OPERATION 9 1t05 39 5 1 Type and Size of Transfer Data to GOT 00 ceccccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeas 5 1 5 1 1 Data type t beinstalled on GOT ssrsrsereesrh en a a n aaae 5 1 5 1 2 Memory space required for data transfer ccccccccccscccseeceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeesaeesaeesseeeseeesaees 5 8 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 Cable earsten nn a a a 5 13 D221 SCUING COMMUNICATION coiies steteadcc ccd sectinedacn a a aaa a witdsemetiec aa a 5 18 5 2 2 Getting built in memory INFOMATION ccc ceecccecccseeceeeceeeeceeeceueceucecaeecseesseesueesseeseuesaeessaeesaans 5 19 I 2S DIO ACUING iiaa a aa a E eE Na 5 20 52A nstalng ROM BIOS seanar aa a isc a aa a mua ER A a 5 21 O20 INS TANIA aaa a a a a a eateecuaealeaatc seoeean tales 5 24 5 2 6 DOWMIOAGING MONMOF dala sce coed ox ccuetloos Soe a a e a a e ar ides aes ech 5 26 5 2 7 DOWNIOAGING Special data rrn n aaa p a R ADA i aT a 5 28 5 3 Transferring Data Using Memory Cald ccccccccceecceeeceeeeee cece eeseeesseeeseeeaeeeseeeeaes 5 29 Sa nstalng ROM BIO Srs a E O a a SE S 5 31 5 3 2 Transferring OS monitor data and special data ccc cecccecccee
133. OF o a Ex 3 Movement of icon aa gt ma lt lt a a Ex 4 Icon grouping with partition S ep i E m Q zZ lt z o Q 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars 3 22 3 4 2 Customizing toolbars Adding or deleting toolbars icons Methods of adding or deleting toolbars icons are shown below G Select Project Preferences The preferences dialog box appears Add or delete toolbars icons with the toolbar tab or the command tab mM Toolbars tab Toolbars are added or deleted Preferences Toolbars Icon Operation View Toolbars TEE 7 Show ToolTips EA ivi V With Shortcut Keys Figure Reset All Object jEdit Align Draw Communication Report 4 Comment Toolbars Check the desired toolbars for addition To delete it remove the check EA O Show Tool Tips When the cursor is placed on the icon check this to display the icon name Fe O When the cursor is placed on the icon check this to display the shortcut key It is effective only when the With Shortcut Keys O Show Tool Tips is displayed Reset Only the selected toolbars are set to default status fe O Reset All All toolbars are set to default status Kog O 3 23 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars 3 4 2 Customizing toolbars E Icon tab Icons are added deleted or moved with the procedures below Preferences Fa z Toolbars Icon Operation View Category Icon
134. OM_BIOS ge EZ The ROM_BIOS version installed to the GOT can be checked with the GOT memory information or Te X O Ow the rating nameplate lf a user has upgraded the ROM _ BIOS the ROM_BIOS version installed on the GOT is different from the version on the rating nameplate Check the version from the memory information Immediately after purchase of the product the version may be checked with the rating nameplate O1 a Memory information b Rating nameplate md LU O Z Z0 ad Sw QAO S W Version GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL ROM BIOS ver 8 0 M M f os SYSTEM Ver 8 0 1 i COMM DRIVER Ver 8 0 1 SC IN 100 240VAC 50 60Hz a a N PLCMONITOR _ Ver 8 0 1 POWER MAX 115VA DATE 0010 A M AM ESC PRINT B CODE Not Installed 4 5 LADDER A Ver 8 0 1 LISTED 80M1 E eSP UNIT MON Ver 8 0 1 ROM_BIOS Version IND CONT 1 UL eee m a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Q SP UNIT DATA Not Installed l E a R a MADE IN JAPAN BD992C091H01 ROM_BIOS Version He gt O 25 O Z u Y ot gt a L Ge ca O zZ D Q m Q Z lt x z L Ge Q 5 1 Type and Size of Transfer Data to GOT 5 2 5 1 1 Data type to be installed on GOT Remark Display method of memory information A Display the GOT memory information on the utility lt Display example of memory information gt gt Touch the upper right Select the utility memory and the upper left of the in
135. OT A900 series GOT F900 series GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT 800 series E Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms Description Ses e GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE RS 422 conversion unit GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 RS2T4 25P Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 CC Link IE controller network communication GT15 J71GP23 SX unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z 2 Interface converter unit GT15 75IF900 1 A9GT QJ71LP23 GT15 75IF900 set 2 A9GT QJ71BR13 GT15 75IF900 set 3 A8GT J61BT13 GI15 75IF900 set gw Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT15 PRN Video input unit GT15V 75V4 RGB input unit GT15V 75R1 Video RGB unit Video RGB input unit GT15V 75V4R1 RGB output unit GT15V 75ROUT GT15 CFCD Printer unit CF card unit CF card extension unit GT15 CFEX CO8SET GT15 DIO GT15 SOUT 1 GT15 CFEX GT15 CFEXIF GT15 CO8CF set External I O unit Sound output unit mw Option Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT05 MEM 32MC GT05 MEM 64MC GT05 MEM 256MC GT05 MEM 16MC GT05 MEM 128MC GT05 MEM ADPC Memory card CF card Memory card adaptor GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB GT15 QF
136. Redisplay provides correct display Refer to the following for redisplay 8 gt Section 3 4 5 Redisplaying drawing screen Q LLI m Z lt lt L or A 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 8 8 1 3 Painting figures Painting Perform either of the following operations e Click A Paint e Select the Figure Paint from the menu 2 Move the cursor to the area for painting and click within the paint area D The paint setting dialog box appears Set the attribute and click the button Item Boundary color Pattern Foreground Background Category Set As Default Clear Default Set as Default Fatter bi Clear Default Foreground Boundary Background T Category Others OF Cancel The boundary color of the area is selected The line set here is the boundary line of the painted o area Filling pattern is selected Res The color of filling pattern is selected Feu Background color of filling pattern is selected f When a category is assigned to the figure the category is selected gt Section 9 1 2 Batch setting and managing objects figures for each purpose Category workspace Click this to use the current attribute as the default user setting In the next attribute setting the default user setting is displayed Click this to return the attribute as the default value to the initial status this to return the attri
137. Screen i ea 320 Security lo ei Detailed Explanation Use Screen Color No AS GOT GT SoftGOT 640 480 256 Colors MELSEC Qn4 0 MELDAS C6 Fr 0 0 591 7 78 Useful for cases below It is useful when the setting of multiple objects figures arranged on the same screen is changed at a time Ex Changing the display color of 2 lamps at a time Change the setting of the lamp color The colors of all selected lamps can be changed Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Object State Shape 9 1 9 1 Edit Function 9 1 1 Batch setting of multiple objects figures on the same screen Property sheet Operation method Select the desired object figure screen to change settings Multiple objects figures can be selected D The attributes are displayed on the property sheet Change the desired attributes Property Sheet x Bit Lamp a Circle cincle_14 o Z O H O Z 5 LL l gt LL Li aa 5 APPENDIX Blink Text Position Text Test Honzontal Align Center INDEX Point Attribute change Attributes displayed in the Property Sheet correspond to the setting items of the Object or Figure setting dialog box The attributes setting items can be set in the same way as the dialog box is set K gt For the figure setting items refer to Chapter 8 DRAW AND EDIT 1 Direct input some attributes such as text numerical value and device can be set by dir
138. Se ER OER AR AL OR lt 2 16 SS Lh Name Description 5Y Switch tool bar Switch function is set h Bit Lamp Bit Lamp function is set a Word Lamp Word Lamp function is set 3 Numerical Display Numerical Display function is set ASE ASCII Display ASCII Display function is set Numerical Input Numerical Input function is set ASCII Input ASCII Input function is set Time Display Time Display function is set Bit Comment Bit Comment function is set Word Comment Word Comment function is set Alarm History Alarm History function is set User Alarm Alarm List function User Alarm is set a PR el System Alarm Alarm List function System Alarm is set file Bit Parts Display Bit Parts Display function is set i vk Word Parts Display Word Parts Display function is set fil Fixed Parts Display Fixed Parts Display function is set F Panel meter Panel meter function is set J Level Level function is set KA Trend Graph Trend Graph function is set St Line Graph Line Graph function is set ir Bar Graph Bar Graph function is set 3 15 3 3 Toolbars 3 3 1 Types of toolbars Ta Ta ak oh te VO
139. T SoftGOT 640x480 256 Colors MELSEC Qn4 Q MELDAS C6 Fre 0 0 591170 NUM Only toolbar icons necessary for operation are displayed Unnecessary icons are not displayed 3 4 1 Customizing screen configuration Display non display of tools size change and display position change are available The areas shown below can be customized if 4 GT Designer2 Untitled LW T Ib Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help 5 a JO SHAR L Secs ae BH BN Vom A0 rCOA4aaOUE fe zipo He ans ze oforo 02 m 2 aa sv amp G es ae B oS we at Sh FA A AE AL Ah O 1A S E a E m A A A M oj x 1 _ ____ 0x l 54 B 4 Front Back Data Display Screen Data View B 4 Front Back Data mee Data View View Tl Display Overlay Screen Screen Z Project IV Objects V Figures Object Num O 5 Base Screen Data Indicator panel Data Input I 1 Production Output Screen 1 Text BS 2 Numerical Input and Display Rectangle 5 3 Message Display Rectangle D 4 Data Display Screen a m 5 Error Cause Confirmation Scre iat ke 6 Multilingual Input Rectangle g O 7 Main Menu Text on O G Window Screen Rectangle C Report Screen TN ee Text we Garion Settings a x a P A Text 3 Comment M Rectangle Dn a
140. T SoftGOT 640x480 256 Colors MELSEC OnA 0 fio 4 lt Z X O OW Item Description 3 Print Printing is performed ole O X TE mj One page The entire page is displayed G O Ds O a RO Zoom The display image is enlarged reduced O ss QO e Previous Next Image on the previous next page is displayed Bi O Print Preview is closed Ey O er O LU mp O x A ra H x A gt A LUI LL USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 6 1 Printing method 6 3 6 1 2 Setting items 2 Page Setup 1 Page Setup tab Item Space Initial page no Display position Header footer edit text box Insert Auto Text Page Setup Screen Image Space mm Top f10 Bottom f0 Left Right p0 5 Header Footer ss Header Left Center Right File Name amp File Date amp Date Initial Page No Insert Auto Text Page No Insert Footer Left Center Fight Hi Insert Auto Text Page No Insert Cancel F Set the upper lower left and right margins in mm 0 mm to 100 mm O O Set the initial page number to be used during printing io O Each display position for headers footers can be registered The position button for the character being registered for display will be highlighted Input edit printed headers footers Comments or auto text can be input to headers footers Headers footers have a maximum of two lines The selected auto
141. T dialog box ROM_BIOS Install GOT tab 5 Item Description F Es Points of caution are described for installation of the ROM_BIOS N Points of caution x Z Be sure to read this before installation PE F lt Path drive folder that stores the ROM_BIOS to be installed is specified lt ROM_BIOS path x ro Up to 5 historical data specified in the past are retained OQO GOT type The type of GOT to which the ROM_BIOS is installed is selected keg x Version Version of the ROM_BIOS is displayed O x 5 m Transfer size Size of the ROM_BIOS to be transferred is displayed key x z A a Instali The ROM_BIOS is installed O x S 5 Zw oY on gt or lt x oO ae Z T D E Q Ww Q Z lt x z O 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable 5 22 5 2 4 Installing ROM_BIOS After installation reset the GOT to start rewriting the ROM_BIOS Never turn OFF the power of the GOT or press the reset switch during rewriting The GOT may became inoperable Set UP ROM_BIOS Ver Step Status 3 Verify ing ATER BIREDSEWUTE SEL Vtybh Fue FAS ELC RELY Don t turn off the power supply Don t push the reset button GOT screen during rewriting ROM BIOS 4 After rewriting message Cycle power on unit appears After resetting transfer the OS or the monitor data Remark Installing ROM_BIOS of old version When the GOT is reset to install the old version ROM_BIOS the following mess
142. TPUT T Display Overlay Screen Base Screen a 1 Main menu 2Line A 3Line B LI Window Screen I Report Screen Common Settings System Environment Report g Hard Copy Operation Panel a Project Screen USING LIBRARY Screen Name lineBo Screen Type Base Screen Security 0 Detailed Explanation Use Screen Color No Pattern Fg Color Bg cor R Please select figures or objects AS7 GOT GT SoftGOT 640x480 256 Colors MELSEC Qn4 Q MELDAS C6 Er 0 0 x 326 Y 44 NUM DRAW AND EDIT 4 8 Operating Multiple Screens 4 38 4 8 1 Cascading tiling screens 4 8 2 Making editing screen active To edit a screen while multiple screens are displayed make the edit screen active with either of the methods below Select the screen name from the Window menu Ex Window W 1 Key window switch Cascade Tile Vertical Screen name Tile Horizontal Screen type and number Arrange Icons B Base screen W Window screen R Report screen 1 6 1 Main menu w Bes Lain_4 2 W 1PLC 140 monitor Click on a part of the screen Click on a part of the screen to make it active Ex ET B 1 Haim menu Click on a part of the left window The left window is displayed at the front N Remark Activating method with _ of toolbar Click of the toolbar to switch the active screen within a range of the same
143. Transfer Communication setting gt Section 5 2 1 Setting communication Error message Error definition and cause Error No Corrective action ee Set the Communication port to the a The communication port has not been Invalid communication port is using l port used for connection of the set communication cable to the GOT Built in memory gt Section 5 2 2 Getting built in memory information Error No Error definition and cause Corrective action Memory information for deleting is not Deletion item is not selected from the Select the deletion item from the built in E selected built in memory memory Upload PC 1 Section 5 2 3 Uploading Error No Error definition and cause Corrective action 0285 The input password is incorrect Input the correct password Invalid folder is specified Invalid upload destination folder e g Specify the valid upload destination Please specify the correct folder non existing folder is specified folder ROM_BIOS install GOT K gt Section 5 2 4 Installing ROM_BIOS Error No Effective ROM_BIOS is not existed in D Valid ROM_BIOS folder is not present the specified folder i in the specified folder Please specify the correct folder OS install GOT 1 Section 5 2 5 Installing OS Error No Error message Error definition and cause 0289 GOT type error The GOT type setting is incorrect Error message Error definition and cause 0289
144. Using Memory Card Precautions 1 Module mounted on the GOT When data are transferred remove the communication module board and extended module mounted on the GOT When the GOT has the built in communication interface remove the communication cable OVERVIEW 2 Detailed explanation and category set on project or screen Detailed explanation and category set on the project or screen are not downloaded to the GOT After downloading they are not saved when they are uploaded again from the GOT 3 Transfer method of monitor data to memory card Be sure to transfer the monitor data from the GT Designer2 to the memory card If data is copied with Explorer of the PC the GOT cannot check the data in the memory card CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 4 Data in GOT Memory card When the same data as the data to be downloaded is already present in the GOT Memory card it is overwritten in downloading 5 Memory card format Format the memory card before use The following format methods are available a Format with PC SRAM type flash PC card Format the memory card on the PC satisfying the conditions below 1 The PCMCIA card slot is available 2 Windows 98 Windows Me or Windows 2000 is installed The memory card cannot be formatted with Windows NT 4 0 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN O1 Point Formatting with PC Format the Memory card SRAM type memory card Flash PC card for the GOT
145. Z 5 LL l gt LL Lu aa ED Display the device batch edit dialog box Select Color from Attribute and All screen from Target Attribute N Replace x zZ Delete a Edited Screen E ear Screen Range Frarn is Tofazrer4 Base Screen Category Switch Selected Area f Common Settings The setting of screen is excluded Color of Objects x LW a Select black from Color of Objects and select white from New Color Color Batch Edit X Attribute FrdN Device Number Color Shape __Find Now Repl Target __Bemlace All Screen Delete Edited Screen cl ear C Screen Range Frarn 4 To 22767 Base Screen Category Switch f Selected Area Common Settings The setting of screen is excluded Color of ibjects E gmg E gmim Huuu E E A Colors Close 9 1 Edit Function 9 14 9 1 3 Batch editing attributes of objects figures scattered on multiple screens Batch edit _ Q Hin t button Click the button to display all devices colors figures either one only used in all screens It is convenient to batch edit multiple devices colors figures After selection click the button Items set in black are changed to white Precautions 1 Change of device a When the device format bit device word device bit specification for word device is specified the device cannot be changed to a different device type
146. a are transferred to the built in memory of the GOT If the built in memory does not have sufficient space the data cannot be transferred 2 Check the built in memory space and the transfer data size before transfer of the data Z gt as O Point Check method of memory space 1 New data transfer No data has been transferred to the GOT O l l l l Check the total count equivalent to the required memories for installation of s the extended function OS He ne i A i gt O L gt Section 5 1 1 EF 1 Combination of extended function OS that nO can be installed a Z Check the GOT built in memory size used by the extended function OS from z the total count equivalent to the required memories a amp T E Download gt GOT l Upload gt Computer Memory information Special data ae OS Install gt GOT ROM_BIOS Install gt GOT Communication configuration ome Standard monitor OS C Communication driver Extended function OS System monitor 9 60 zZ I Network monitor 9 60 L J Special unit Recipe Sound 9 40 lt ie C Ladder monitor for MELSEC A 9 74 Ow Ladder monitor for MELSEC Qn 9 00 Z C Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q 9 60 Hf C Ladder monitor for MELSEC F 9 75 T T C List editor for MELSEC A 9 00 C Motion monitor 9 00 CNC monitor 9 40 O1 Data path D MELSEC GTD240S GOT type A985G0T A97 GOT A960GOT M Transfer
147. ading Right click the mouse to Select All or Unselect After deleting the monitor data already downloaded to the GOT this is checked to download this monitor data Project ID is displayed When the built in memory information has the memory information of the GOT the available size for a user is displayed Check this to check the basic OS version of the GT Designer2 and the basic OS version installed on the GOT If the basic OS version installed on the GOT is older than the GT Designer2 OS version a message to prompt reinstallation of the OS appears in downloading When the built in memory information has the memory information of the GOT the available size for the user is displayed as a meter Size of the monitor data selected in the project configuration tree is displayed All items in the project configuration tree are selected 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable 5 2 6 Downloading monitor data 5 26 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN O1 ad LLI OD z ZO ad sp MLO PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT If download has been performed during editing items subsequently changed in the project configuration tree are checked After selection click the Download button to download the edited items only O When data has not been downloaded this is not available When the project is clos
148. age appears and the GOT stops The old version ROM_BIOS cannot be rewritten ROM BIOS setup Ver1 1 0 B ATER BRAD SEWCFSLY Jeyk Fy aePAS UCR SLY Don t turn off the power supply Don t push the reset button ROM_BIOS Not Rewriterble GOT stopped Please install operating system When the message appears transfer the OS or monitor data with the above screen status 5 23 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable 5 2 4 Installing ROM_BIOS 5 2 5 Installing OS SSE Point 1 Data installed in the GOT gt When the OS is installed the monitor data and special data in the GOT are gt deleted If the data must be retained upload them in advance 6 2 During installation of OS E The OS installation it can be interrupted Reinstallation of the OS is required e Do not turn OFF the power of the GOT PC or unplug the communication cable EE Otherwise the GOT may became inoperable ais lt GOT recovery method gt Z If the GOT goes down due to the operation above install the system program a again by the following procedure 46 Turn OFF the GOT E nO Remove the communication module board and option module mounted on GOT For GOT provided a communication unit remove the communication cable of lt x D Turn ON the GOT while pressing two locations shown below on the GOT at Qu the same time q ein O1 Message Reinstall the ROM_BIOS OS appears on the GOT md LU O Z Z0 ad
149. ails format Print to file Selectable only for output to file Fixed to List for output to printer Check this item to output a screen list Screen List Output ON images Outputs a screen image Screen Image In addition to a normal screen image the screen image on which the object ID or devices are O put can be output Print Object ID Outputs the screen image on which the object ID is put few O Outputs the screen image on which devices are put ex O 4 Device tab Items for Print f x Base windows Repot Device a ES poe isi ueeecratawes OO 6 8 6 1 Printing method 6 1 2 Setting items 6 2 Printing example 6 2 1 Printer output Title list Each screen title is printed as shown below File Name C WINDOWS full monitor_data GTD Date 2003 07 03 Base Screen Title List Main menu Line A Line B Line C Line D_ Alarm history Line ABC Graph Tank Line A Status Line B Status Base 11 Base 12 Base 13 Base 14 Base 15 16 Base 16 ojula AON Window Screen Title List 1_ The window for restoration Report Screen Title List 1 For the number output of product Screen list List of created screens is printed as shown below File Name C WINDOWS full monitor_data GTD Date 2003 07 03 Base Screen Image List 1 Main menu ON 2 Line A ON 3 Line B ON 4 Line C ON Main Menu u w S
150. all objects and figures set as Switch By default all touch switches are included Stores all objects and figures set as Lamp By default all lamp displays are included Stores all objects and figures set as Others By default objects and figures other than the touch switches and lamp displays are included It is a category created by the user Objects stored in the switch lamp other categories can be moved to the user category and categories can be created for each application 9 1 Edit Function 9 1 2 Batch setting and managing objects figures for each purpose Category workspace Convenient for the case below Color device of the Goto screen switch can be changed in batch It is convenient to make batch edit for each purpose Figures of the touch switch or the lamp can be changed in batch o Z O H O Z 5 LL l gt LL Li aa 5 Ex 1 Batch editing display color of Goto screen switch J B 1 Main menu amp 4 B 1 Main menu as Q Z LU oO an Batch edit lt Mein TeENU Ex 2 Batch editing lamp figure 4 B 1 Main menu x lt LU Q Zz gt Batch edit 9 1 Edit Function 9 6 9 1 2 Batch setting and managing objects figures for each purpose Category workspace Creating user category The method to create a user category is shown below In this section an example of category creation for the Goto Screen switch is described D Select a category from Switch Lamp and Others Rig
151. ample at left gt GOT used Color of Color of Color of figure part overlapped areas GOT900 16 colors Blue Dark white Yellow No problem will occur unless you have set Indirect using the Part movement function In addition there is no problem to set Indirect unless the device value becomes a negative numeric value or out of the Display range If the device value becomes a negative numeric value or out of the Display range range set the part number to 0 and out of the Display range Setting the Display part number to 0 hides parts With the GOT800 Compatible mode no action is required Continued to next page Appendix 3 Using Existing Data Appendix 3 2 Precautions App 9 USEFUL FUNCTIONS x lt O Z m Q lt INDEX Procedures to replace the GOT800 Series with the Item Description y GOT A900 Series System The values of system information before and after changes No problem will occur unless you enter a negative value via information vary depending on the GOT when you enter a negative value 16 bit signed BIN numeric value input Before after via 16 bit signed BIN numeric value input In addition there is no problem if the GOT references change Example Value before numeric value input 1 sequence programs using a negative value before changing Value for numeric value input 2 the system information as 16 bits lt System information of the GOT800 Series gt When the GOT references seq
152. and all screen check box are disabled The screen NO to be searched is specified from 1 to 32767 from 1 to 8 for only Report Screen All screens of the Screen Type that are selected in the collection target are the objects The list information is updated The specified setting screen is opened and the object is pointed with a cursor Jump button is enabled when a line is selected in the list The Device List currently displayed is output to the CSV or Unicode Text file When the device is set and when the return key or the Find button is pressed the search is performed Point f When using the Device List e Devices in the script cannot be displayed as a device list e Object ID misplacement After the objects on the screen are erased or the order of the objects are changed if the Jump is performed without updating the devise list an error that the cursor jumps to the different object may occur 9 1 Edit Function 9 18 9 1 5 Checking devices in use Device List o Z O H O Z 5 LL l 5 LL m aa APPENDIX INDEX 9 1 6 Checking Text in use Text String List Text List The Text List displays the direct text setting by the refining setting The specific figure or object can be selected by the jump function T Leas of x Collection Target rojec fall Figure Object x Find Text Text SY Eind Click on the Update button if project data is changed while Text List being displayed Usefu
153. and saved 6 Perform either of the following operations gt O e Click a Overwrite 7 e Select Project Save menu iE N Z D O Point 7 When using FD floppy disk OO When a project is overwritten and saved the same size of free disk space as the project data size is required If an FD is used overwriting and saving may not be carried out due to insufficient disk space If overwriting and saving is not allowed save the project in the PC hard disk Then copy it to the FD SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 A 4 14 2 Saving as project name When a newly created project is saved or an existing project is saved with a different project name set as follows Z Ot Z Y LO On Z0 EZ niz ro Ow D Select Project gt Save as 2 The save as dialog box appears ma W Set the following items and click the button Bz O 7 Save As Ei ae H aa Save in E production 4 S zl ci E QO gt production 4 470 O m O ES Z5 EO Z u mag A gt a Save as lype GT Designer Files GTD Cancel 4 2 O Z D 5 is Q LU Q Z lt z a A 4 14 Saving Project 4 56 4 14 1 Overwriting and saving project Save in The location to save the project is selected Oo O File name The project name to be saved is set on O GT Designer2 Files GTD The project data is saved in the GT Designer2 format GTD Intel Hex Files ITH Intel Hex Files ITH is the file f
154. ar ibrary Image List xi m l l Function x My Favor hss My Favorites GN OFF A NM BS Ho simple edit of parts Part objects or figures once registered can be re edited with the dedicated editor library editor Ox Fey Library Editor 1 Lamp 1 chor CAMELSEC GTD2 Userl Double click ir Library User Library fs Favorites H E Figure H E Key H E Special Parts eu Project Categow 3 Library 1 4 1 2 Feature 1 2 1 Easy to use operations 1 2 2 Useful functions Shortest setting without opening dialog box gt Section 9 1 1 Batch setting of multiple objects figures on the same screen Property sheet All setting items and setting details being currently selected are displayed in a list Objects and figures can be set without opening the dialog box and the setting details can be checked if gt a gi gt Z Multi Action Switch O H gt Position D Y Position 64 u TE Multi Action Setting ne 5 O Key Code FFFF MO Category Switch Object State OFF Shape Rectangle 1 rect_1 Frame 2 Switch e z Bg Color E or Pattern Z 5 Reverse Area No O a Text Position Center Setting without opening f Le dialog box Gu Text Horizontal Align nO Classifying objects for each applicatio
155. ary C The imported file is added to the user library ES Subject CAMELSEC GTD2 Userl Ea Library i I User Library EHO My Favorites fl 1 Start Switch marie 2 3D Switch H E Crystal H E Soft H E Retro H E Simple Ea Basic Figure H E 150 AEA Misan 3 Project B Category 3 Librar When importing files of Ibe e Multiple files can be selected e The selected lbe files are allocated to unused library numbers automatically and added to the User Library e The 000 My Favorites Ibe is imported by a template unit When importing files of GTD2 Ibd e The selected GID2 lbd files are allocated to unused library numbers automatically and added to the User Library e The My Favorites is imported by a template unit 7 20 7 3 Creating Original Library 7 3 8 Importing user library 7 4 Utilizing Panelkit of GT Designer The panelkit created by GI Designer can be used on GT Designer2 by importing to the user library The panelkit of GT Designer is equivalent to the user library of GT Designerz2 D Select the Project Import Panelkit of GT Designer menu 2 The Import Panelkit of GT Designer dialog box appears Refer to the following descriptions for setting Import Panelkit of GT Designer Source Path E WINDOWS Desktop Please specify pkt path under the installed path of GT Designer select pkt iles PKITO A9 PRITO2A9 PRITOS A9 Import Close
156. as shown below File Name C WINDOWS full monitor_data GTD Date 2003 07 03 Alarm History Mode Historical Number of Alarms to Monitor 10 Watch Cycle 100ms 20 Detailed Alarm Display Type Not Display Data Type Bit Device No Continuous Comment No Continuous Detailed Display No Number of Alarms Occurred History Clear Store to PC Card Min Store to File Format Delete oldest alarm occurrences No History Print No Title Print Date Print Time Print Message Print Cumulative Time Print Occur Frequency Print State Status Printout Occurred Status Printout Restored Status Printout Checks Lines Columns Top Space Left Space RST Value Mail No No No No No No Device Alarm Range Comment No M100 M101 M102 M103 M104 M105 No No No No M106 M107 M108 M109 oo ojo ojoo ooo oo ojo ooo ooo Device Details Details of set devices are printed as shown below File Name DAMELSEC GT D2 Example9 00 Introduction aaa G TD Date 2005 07 23 Device Details GOT Device Word Device GD Details Device Paints Screen Number Object Coordinates Object ID 0 FF GD100 Common Setting Screen Switching MELSEC QnA4 Q MELDAS C64 Bit Dev ice xX Details Number j Coordinates Object ID 0 FF 112 176 0002 i 170 176 10003 228 176 10004 2
157. ator authority AO OVERVIEW 4 The following functions are not supported e Compatibility mode e Fast user switching e Change your desktop themes fonts e Remote desktop 5 Only the 32 bit OS is available 6 For using the MES interface function a display resolution of 1024 x 768 dots or more is required 7 800MB or more when using Windows 98 Windows Millennium Edition or Windows NT Z e H lt a gt S LL Z O SYSTEM Applicable operating system and performance required for personal computer Performance required for personal computer Operating system P a CPU Memory Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German Pentium 200MHz or more 64MB or more versions SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German Pentium 200MHz or more 64MB or more versions Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Operating System Service Pack3 or later English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions Pentium 200MHz or more 64MB or more CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Service Pack4 or later English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions Pentium 200MHz or more 64MB or more Microsoft Windows XP Professional
158. ault These are the setting items only for rectangle circle ellipse polygon arc elliptical arc and sector 8 5 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 1 1 Drawing figures 8 1 2 Entering text D Perform either of the following operations z z e Click A Text gt O e Select the Figure Text menu Click on the screen The text figure dialog box appears Z O Enter the text set the attribute of the text and click the button The entered text is displayed 7 Text x D EiT Text N Z gt i b sation moni PE aE Eor Tent Es gs Line observation monitor C Clear Default er Line observation itor A ioe ciaarraion moria B are Z Line observation monitor C Clear Default 3 n ma Text Style Regular Direction Horizontal Vertical S Z Oy Text Color M Alignment Left Center Right P 2 i t Solid Calor E Text Color Mi Alignment Left Center Right x Size 1x1 7 fi gt fi gt bee Backoround Ealar M MV Bg Transparent nO Interval 0 m Size fix fi x x fi KY P AN ort Use 6x8dot font Category Others Category Others a f Z0 GOT A900 Series GOT F900 Series lt 2 oan Text you want to display is entered e Maximum 512 characters can be entered A line feed is counted as one character T e Text can be entered in multiple lines E Press the key at the end of the line to feed a line Eg lt Hu lt Input Ex gt lt Display Ex gt O Als Text Text 2 Line obse
159. aved file is 3 recovered N ag When either or is selected the automatically saved recovery file is Z erased it LL SCREEN CONFIGURATION It is advisable to select Yes and store the restored project data as necessary If the data is unnecessary do not save them and then close the project 2 Precautions for multiple start of GT Designer2 with automatic save setting 5 When automatic save is set do not perform the following a b operations lt The message in 1 above appears at the start up of the 2nd or subsequent GT Zo l lt Desinger2 and the automatically saved file is then erased we Reset the automatic save for the following a b operations aut a After new creation start the 2nd or subsequent GT Designer2 while editing a project which has not been saved at all Lu b Open the project which has been opened on the GT Designer2 with the 2nd Bz or subsequent GT Designer2 SE ce 38 5 W O ES 25 rant fi gt ma L ma co Z E i Q zZ lt z o QO 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars 3 28 3 4 3 Customizing GT Designer2 operating environment View tab Display for the drawing screen is set Snap 1 Grid Item Preferences X Toolbars Icon Operation View Snap fe x fis K Y Grid Position Front C Back C None Spacing fie H x ye SK Y Color M Display items M Paint M Device Short M ObjectID M Object MM Object
160. awing software ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS Abbreviations and generic terms used in this manual are as follows E GOT Abbreviations and generic terms Description Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT 1000 Abbreviation of GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD Abbreviation of GT1585V STBA GT1585V STBD Abbreviation of GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD Abbreviation of GT1575V STBA GT1575V STBD Abbreviation of GT1575 STBA GT1575 STBD GT1570 Abbreviation of GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD Abbreviation of GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD Abbreviation of GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD GT1565 V Abbreviation of GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD GT1560 GT1562 VN Abbreviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT1555 V Abbreviation of GT1555 VTBD GOT1000 Series GT1550 GT1555 Q Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD Gm1500 GT15 Gm1500 GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT1550 GT1155 Q Abbreviation of GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT 1150 GT1150 Q Abbreviation of GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GT1150 QLBD i CELLE Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS QSBD GT1150HS Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS QLBD GOD eT GOD eT Abbreviation of GT1155 Q GT1150 Q GT11 Handy GOT Abbreviation of GT1030 LBD GT1030 LBD2 GT1030 LBDW GT1030 LBDW2 Abbreviation of GT1020 LBD GT1020 LBD2 GT1020 LBL GT1020 LBDW GT1020 LBDW2 GT1020 LBLW Abbreviation of GT1030 GT1020 GOT900 Series Abbreviation of G
161. ayed O B Fi tysheet Alte oe a i 2 gt Clause 3 4 1 Customizing screen configuration of Library TA O Zoom b Z uw Z Window Preview gt A aL Redisplay E5 v Display Touch Area View Items gt Grid gt Guidelines z Options cn zZ ep 2 Q Lu Q CZ lt z oc QO 3 2 Menu Configuration 3 8 Screen Screen The Screen menu contains functions of screen management and New Screen b Open settings in a project Close Ctrl w Close All a New screen creation opening closing screen and change of window Delete Previous Screen size are available Next Screen Y _UnOpened Screens Chapter 4 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN Change Window Size 4 amp 3 Properties Header Repeat Common Common The Common menu contains functions of common settings System Environment eG The object functions used for the overall project can be set E ore Comment part and voice etc can also be registered Status Observation Time Action Refer to the manual below for details of common settings Alarm History Eloating Alarm K gt GT Designer2 VersionO Reference Manual Recipe Script Bf aN BAD oF Ethernet Gateway gt GOT800 Compatible mode Comment gt T Parts 30 Sound Files Figure The Figure menu contains functions of drawing figures Line i i Line FreeF om Various figures can be dra
162. blue xoa We a Bue 0x08 ee if 0 Purple 0306 Pe NO wit 0x07 oo Back 0x08 Ma U OG Dark red 0x09 ii O Dark yelow 0308 isl a i CT Dark green 0x08 aoa OO Dark ight blue eae ee ee Dark blue xon 4 jee Dark purple 0x08 Pakpuple tty 0 Dark whit el a o others Ores 5 iO 2 Editing DXF format figure data To edit the grouped figure data on GT Desinger2 ungroup it once After the edition group them again 3 Category After being imported the DXF format data will be registered and stored in None The ungrouped data will be also stored in None If necessary register it again 8 17 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 1 5 Pasting figure data of BMP file 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 2 1 Selecting figure and object z or gt Selection items with the cursor figures and objects can be changed by clicking O It is convenient to select the cursor type suitable for the editing item Selection and editing can be performed without lt distinguishing between figures and objects T Cursor set as initial setting E m i O Both figure and object are selected E Fi d 2 ale a Select Figure and Object q N a Edit Object of Selection gt of Figure and Object from the menu 6 D ae If the figure and the object 5 2 dp are overlapped the object is selected 2 7 o H Figures can be edited Z lt x O Own 26 SZ Only the figure is n X O selected Ow cel E
163. brary E Rae pase 9 H E New User Library Folder C Load User Library Folder fn Store to User Library Folder I Import User Library H E 7 aA Open Image View 9 Dialog 3 Project Category 3 Library As the Store to User Library Folder dialog box appears specify a folder to store the library folder The library file name is unchangeable When saving multiple libraries create a folder for each library file After the specification click the button Store to User Library Folder x Store to User Library Folder Path Ewi NDOWS Desktop production 4 Browse UserLib folder is stored in the specified place Cancel Point f Saving multiple libraries As library folder names are fixed make sure to create a folder for each library folder when saving multiple libraries 7 14 7 3 Creating Original Library 7 3 6 Saving library D The library file is stored in the User Lib folder which is automatically created in the specified folder A library for My Favorites is stored with a name of 000_My Favorites lbe A user library file created by a user is named by using the number and name of the library Example User library 1 abc 1 abc 001_abc lbe T o Poo Number File name Name ojx Subject CAMELSEC GTD2 Userl E34 Library A Eg User Library MGR My Favorites aa 1 Switch B GA 2 Start switch ag Av H E Crystal H E Soft 9 Retro H E Si
164. bute as the default value to the initial status a The paint mark is displayed at the click position and the figure is painted The paint mark is displayed on the GT Desinger2 only and not on the GOT To edit the attribute of painting double click the paint mark 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 1 3 Painting figures TI xX x X x x x 8 1 4 Capture function A specified area of the figure can be captured and imported to the GT Designer2 as BMP data m gt Operation method it gt Click the window that has the figure to import to make it active j untitled Paint Ioj x File Edit View Image Colors Help 5 3 o UW LL YE HO zZ 2 ae Of Lz ZO Or of T LU n E E omen E EET C5 o A PE Seen E Ean HO Draws a free form line one pixel wide 1 82 195 Ui Z afn ad B a x G Define capture area from Capture Image in the menu Figure on GT Designer2 9 9 i i oie Once capture area is defined GT Designer2 window becomes minimized Only the function to specify Be uj capture area can be operated To cancel this function press the key ou EGT Designer2 Untitled1 B 1 Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help lej xj 0 Saag Ss cms cA le TNC Pramen OH re cm WE o Pfc oNfor e w Z a e a s Q 23 mc 4 5
165. ccseeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeees 5 34 5 4 Error Message for Data Transter ccccscseccesssseesesseesssssecesesseessenserenaseeeseosteasones 5 37 6 PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT 6 1to6 14 O21 FINITE WINS TNO Gis ace pcrteeeinshee ane exenianeitanci E 6 1 Fx STUN PIAS EOC sess tat nace tiaiau wie a a oa anna uate waioel bald Se anwad saat dotientead 6 1 6 1 2 Setting ems ccc foresh ies ae lec eet eae a a he la te 6 2 6 2 PUNUNG EXAMP aecerncn ures cactaascoie dee E a eae eet ciee cae 6 9 622A ENN OULOUN stiseceea taccceatia hc pete tet gaactse tins a Nei eoe teat ie T E 6 9 6 222 PIG OUULDUL aeea ela taec uae a a an Male ctabet ie hc thence amin tou inns eeincn nel cate arene nen al 6 13 7 USING LIBRARY cccceccecceceececcesteseeseeseereesees 72116 7421 CRWN Na IS ENON AI 2 cana ice siete hese os ae essa aaa denl sania aad as ce saeaa esa 7 1 7 1 1 What you need to know before USING library ec ceccceeccceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseueeaeesseeeseeeaes 7 1 Tle BASIC operation Of MOLLY sich dec tded aden thc urea teca tens E r wen recenaent bien A 7 4 7 2 Pasting Objects or Figures from Library cccccccecccececeeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeesaeees 7 6 Lo Crealing OniGinall L IOLAN Y cessos aR OE 7 7 7 3 1 Registering objects or figures on library cccccceccceecceseceececueecececeeecsueceuessaeesaeeseueeeuessaeeseaesaas 7 7 7 3 2 Copying registered library template ss sui
166. cel 1 2 3 Eas IT 0 Base switching t evice Lommen Window 1 Window2 m Extended Superimpose System Information1 Bit positon 0 Block O Te g System Information2 Line A operation mode Line B operation mode r Device Network Host Other NW No a Line C ti d TXXXXIXIXIXKXII lt Ce Line E operation mode Import Line F operation mode Tank A Tank B Devices are set while checking the device number of the GX Developer Point 7 PC types available for the device comment check The device comment of the GX Developer can be checked when the PC type is MELSEC A MELSEC QnA Q MELSEC Q Multi or MELSEC FX 9 2 1 Importing device comment Import the device comment of the GX Developer to the GT Designer2 in order to check the device on the GT Designer2 D Select the Project Import Device Comment of GX Developer from the menu The Import Device Comment of GX Developer dialog box appears Specify the device comment file in the project of the GX Developer Click the button Import of device comment is completed Import Device Comment of GX Developer x Device Comment Path CAWINDOWS Desktop ladder 1 Resource Others COMMENT wed Browse Delete Cancel Clicking the button of the Import Device Comment of GX Developer dialog box will delete the path of the current device comment data 9 21 9 2 Referring to Device Comment When Setting
167. counter and current value change and current value change of buffer memory During test operation DO NOT change the devices data that are used to execute important system operations Mis output or mis operation may cause accidents ew ES SO OS Cautions for using this software Required PC memory The processing may be terminated by Windows on a personal computer of which main memory capacity is less than 64M bytes Make sure to secure the capacity of 64 M bytes or more Free capacity of hard disk virtual memory At least 100M bytes of free capacity of virtual memory should be secured within hard disk to run this software The processing may be terminated by Windows if 100M bytes or more of free space cannot be secured within hard disk while running GT Designer Secure enough free capacity of virtual memory within hard disk space in order to run the software When enough free capacity cannot be secured make sure to save projects frequently Error messages displayed while starting and editing Operation will be terminated because of insufficient memory Would you like to stop If the above message appears close other running application software or reboot Windows in order to secure at least 50M bytes of free hard disk space GT Designer2 and GOT display a Cautions for displaying straight line other than full line dotted line for example in Bold When straight line other than full line is drawn in bold the line
168. ct Category Library workspace Library image list ae Library gt Oo lt T a m Z T DRAW AND EDIT 7 3 Creating Original Library 7 13 7 3 5 Changing library property 7 3 6 Saving library A user created library My Favorite User Library can be saved as a folder different from the currently displayed storage folder If create multiple library folders you can choose a library from the multiple libraries at drawing L gt Section 7 3 7 Loading library from file In addition by saving the folder in a floppy disc the library can be shared with multiple PCs For the operation method to open a library refer to the following gt Section 7 3 7 Loading library from file Ex 1 Ex 2 ames folder Drawing data Hard disk Multiple library folder are saved in the PC hard disk A created library is shared with multiple PCs Point Creating GOT A900 series screen and GOT F900 series screen Make sure to create the library for GOT A900 series screen and GOT F900 series screen separately If the same library is used for both of them the settings may be changed when the library is overwritten Saving created library Save the created library according to the following procedure D Select Library and right click on it and then click Store to User Library Folder ojx x ea New User Li
169. ct can be moved on the screen display area by dragging When dragged screen display area pressing the ALT key it can be moved to the temporary area G Ww with ALT key move to Not checked A figure or object can be moved to the temporary area by dragging When dragged pressing a Z temporary area the ALT key it can be moved on the screen display area lt x or Q 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars 3 26 3 4 3 Customizing GT Designer2 operating environment Close an edited screen when opening another if the number of open screens is at its Set the maximum number of screens 1 25 screens maximum Setting values will be enabled at the next startup Effective from the next startup of GT Designer2 3 77 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars 3 4 3 Customizing GT Designer2 operating environment Point 1 Operation in automatic save setting If the GT Designer2 stops or a power failure occurs in automatic save setting the GT Desinger2 shows the dialog box below at the next start up a GT Designer i O recovered file exists Do you want to open the recovered file Z O H e If a project file is available a project is saved in the past this dialog box appears when the project file is opened a e If a project file is not available no saving after new creation this dialog box 26 appears when the GT Designer2 is started When is selected on the dialog box above the automatically s
170. d figure or object for consecutive copies gt m For consecutive copy of multiple figures or objects select multiple figures objects at a time 5 D Select the Edit Consecutive Copy Context menu Consecutive Copy from the menu The consecutive copy dialog box appears z After setting the copy details click the button to make copies z 5 20 UW Consecutive Copy T gt O r Number m Interval Dot aS H E Ea E 6 ii 1 B ai UW N Ot m Addess rerenent 2a 99g E Hot Increment DEE C Q te Priority 1 WW amp gt n i Y Priority MO r Copy Range Q Screen Temporary area ie Own Screen 2 E2 DE X O OF Cancel O u Item Description w LL The number of figures to be produced after copying and pasting is set For instance if the number of copies is ZZ set to 2 one selected figure is copied once and two figures are pasted on the screen aS ce zH Ex Number of copies 3 in the X direction 2 in the Y direction SO Number Copy source X 3 O y N 3 Y 2 Q AA a Or Before After a u The number of copies in the X direction rightward from the source is set 1 to 100 The number of copies in the Y direction downward from the source is set 1 to 100 The interval number of dots between the source and the copy is set for copying Re Ex Interval 5 dots in the X direction T m marval Dann Copy of single figure Copy of multiple figures T Zz T D Y direction
171. de the GOT display area 3 4 5 6 F900 does not transfer the figures or objects to the F900 main unit if they are placed on the temporary area GOT display area pme iInvalid Temporary area 4 23 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 4 7 1 Object placement area and display area on GOT 4 7 2 Basic operations for object placement This section explains object placement Refer to the following manual for object setting 2 gt lt gt GT Designer2 VersionL Reference Manual i O Placing figures and objects A series of operations for placing figures and are provided here 5 D Perform either of the following operations e From the Object menu select the object to be placed a D O Example Bit switch object Choose Object Switch Bit Switch The cursor changes to placement mode e On the object toolbar click the object to be placed Example Bit switch object SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 Click sy on the Object toolbar and click Bit Switch from among the submenu items The mouse cursor changes to placement mode saves 88 On xs ea da A Move the cursor to the desired position and click the mouse to place the object Objects of the same type can be placed consecutively by clicking the mouse repeatedly When stopping this operation right click the mouse after placing the object to release the cursor from the placement mode Gi Ow Z Y LO One
172. dialog for the GOT F900 Series communication with non GOT F900 Series is performed Error definition and cause The drive where the memory card is set is not specified The memory card is write protected The item to be installed is not selected The extended function OS to be installed exceeds the number of required memories 6 that can be installed on the GOT The left message is always displayed when CNC monitor or KANA KANJI JPN is selected in the Project configuration tree Corrective action Check the cable Check the cable Check the GOT condition Set the lower transmission speed in the communication configuration than the current value L gt Section 5 2 1 Setting communication Set the port that connects the communication cable to the GOT to the communication port of the communication configuration L gt Section 5 2 1 Setting communication Check the cable Check the cable Connect the GOT A900 Series Connect the GOT F900 Series 1 gt Section 5 3 2 Transferring OS monitor data and special data Corrective action Select the drive where the memory card is set in Memory card Disable the write protect of the memory card Select the item to be installed in the project configuration tree Select the extended function OS to be installed so that the number of the required memories may be within 6 L gt Section 5 1 1 function OS
173. dow Preview Custom OVERVIEW The Window Preview setting dialog box appears Window Preview T Overlap Window E Browse T Overlap Windowe BTOWee CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Superimpose window ETOWEE Dec kep Window E T All Screens Cancel amp Put a check mark y in the check box of the window to be displayed on the Base Screen When displaying Overlap Window 1 2 or Superimpose Window click the button and select the window screen to be displayed SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 A Example Make the following settings to display a Dec Key Window window Preview T Overlap Window Browse Gi Ow Z Y LO One 9 ni ro Ow T Overlap Window ETOWee T Superimpose Windows Key Window Dec Key Window it All Screens u gO aa re ee QO O Lu O Me oD Dz 23 HO Z u or A L gt ma L ad m a 2 QO Lu Q CZ lt L z lt L Z QO 4 10 Viewing Created Screen Image 4 46 4 10 2 Previewing the Base Screen with window D Click the button to display the windows set on the Base Screen To display the windows however the window display positions must have been set in advance Choose the Object Window Position menu and set the display positions Refer to the following manual for the settings of the window display position K gt GT Designer2 Version Reference Man
174. e RS 232 cable Refer to the GOT user s manual Details for the memory card RS 232 cable GOT A900 series The OS program and monitor screen data can be transferred written to the memory card LT Memory card GT Designer2 Printer cable Printer compatible with Windows 2 3 2 2 System Configuration of Data Transfer and Document Creation 2 2 1 System configuration Using GOT F900 series The system configuration using the GOT F900 series is shown below Refer to Section 2 2 2 for the RS 232 cable 2 RS 232 cable GOT F900 series AO OVERVIEW zZ O H T Y gt Oo LL Z O SYSTEM CS gt yo Printer cable Printer compatible with Windows SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 GT Designer2 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 2 2 System Configuration of Data Transfer and Document Creation 2 4 2 2 1 System configuration 2 2 2 RS 232 cable to be used The cable type for connection between the PC and the GOT and the connection diagram are shown below Using GOT A900 series The cable shown below or in the connection diagram is required 1 System configuration AC30R2 9SS FX 232CAB 1 AC30R2 9P F2 232CAB 1 1 GOT 9 25 pin converter Diatrend Corp D232J31 is required 2
175. e center or representative 5 721 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable 5 2 4 Installing ROM_BIOS Installation method of the ROM_BIOS is shown below Click the Communication To From GOT Q The setting dialog box appears Click the ROM_BIOS Install gt GOT tab Refer to the following description for setting After setting click the button to start installation Communicate with GOT x Download gt GOT Upload gt Computer Memory information Special data OS Install gt GOT ROM_BIOS Install gt GOT Communication configuration OVERVIEW Points of caution ROM_BIOS is installed in the GOT by applying ROM_BIOS install During ROM_BIOS install contents that are stored in GOT internal memory 1 Monitor data 2 Special Module Motion Servo amplifier monitor data 3 OS Basic functions PLC communications driver extended functions etc will be erased If necessary before carrying out ROM_BIOS install to preserve 1 Monitor data Using the screen creation software select Communication Upload Use the GOT utility Screen copy Internal memory gt Memory card to move the data CONFIGURATION SYSTEM During ROM_BIOS install on the GOT screen SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 FOM_BIOS path C MELSEC GTD2 0S GOT type A985GOT AS7 GOT ASB0GOT Version Ver 9 4 0 lt Transfer size 757848 byte Install CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN Communicate with GO
176. e desired position to place the object EE Then right click the mouse to exit from the placement mode D O 6 E of Set the Touch Switch Bit Switch object zt i Ow nO 1 Double clicking the placed Touch Switch Bit Switch object displays the dialog box 4 2 Set the Switch Action Display Style etc in the Basic tab a a Bit Switch A Y O Basic Text Lamp 5 gt GT Designer2 VersionO 94 i H Sic ate elie Reference Manual for details lt Device I Dev of objects 7 a Acton Set Altemate Reset Momentary gt Section 4 7 5 Basic Display Style operations of dialog box a m F L Shape Rectanale 1 rect_1 Others so e lt Reverse Smith Ares im Frame M Switch OOo M AG Background E Pattern O Category Switch ha O U O WME oD Dz EO Zu a A Ww Extended Function Estended T Action T Trigger gt mel z co Z op Q LW Q Z lt z a Q 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 4 34 4 7 4 Object function setting 3 Set the text lamp function etc in the Text Lamp tab The settings of ON Display and OFF Display can be made in the Text tab and both settings are required Click the button to set the ON status display and click the button to set the OFF status display Register a text for each display position Center Top Bottom Left Right The display position button turns red purple magen
177. e extended function OS is installed the memory space below is always used regardless of each extended function OS data size If the built in memory is not sufficient mount the memory board on the GOT Use M3 type for the A95 GOT to increase the built in memory space The space added with the memory board is used as the memory only for the monitor data and the special data md LU O Z Z0 ad Eg Su QAO O Total count equivalent to required Memory space used by extended Space to store monitor data and z memories for extended function OS function OS k byte special data k byte 1 a Or Ooo o nsa 23 Zu 1 256 896 Y A Ww 2 384 768 4 768 384 gt 5 1024 128 a 6 1152 0 S 1 The space without the memory board Use the type without M3 on the A95 GOT is assumed D D Q Lu Q Z a z 4 O 5 1 Type and Size of Transfer Data to GOT 5 6 5 1 1 Data type to be installed on GOT Monitor data It is the monitor screen data created by the user 6 Special data It is the dedicated screen data used for the special module monitor function motion monitor function and servo amplifier monitor function Refer to the manual below for details of each function GOT A900 Series Operating Manual Extended Option Functions Manual 5 1 Type and Size of Transfer Data to GOT 5 1 1 Data type to be installed on GOT 5 1 2 Memory space required for data transfer The extended function OS monitor data and special dat
178. e header is checked Whether the number of objects that can be registered on one screen exceeds the limit is Number of object entries x checked Nest level of set overlay Whether the nest level of set overlay screens is within 5 that can be set on one screen is screens checked A 4 13 Data Check 4 54 x x USING LIBRARY xX O O DRAW AND EDIT Check Key window screen data Whether there is any object that cannot be set on the window screen is checked Item Whether any object is set outside the screen range is checked O Carry out Checking during save or Data check is automatically performed when a project is saved or a monitor screen data transfer is transferred to the GOT All Screen Perform data check on all screens Eom Open Screen Only Perform data check on open screen o 4 When the data check is performed with the settings click the button To close the dialog box after updating the settings click the button If an error is detected after checking the following screen is displayed Ex Data Check Error 2 of more touch keps cannot occupy the same position Please correct i ih Mo B 2 Line_A Position 80 80 96 96 When is clicked data check is continued for any other error When is clicked data check is cancelled 4 55 4 13 Data Check O O O O O Tm 4 14 Saving Project 4 14 1 Overwriting and saving project When an existing data has been edited the project is overwritten
179. e or transfer T Camry out Checking during save or transfer All Screen f Open Screen Only All Screen f Open Screen Only Check Cancel Check Cancel Setting of GOT A900 series Setting of GOT F900 series Check Item Items for data check are checked EF O Whether overlap of touch switch functions occurs is checked Z Ot LO On 20 EZ niz ro Ow DATA TRANSFER OPERATION Touch Area e Touch switches are overlapped O e Numerical input ASCII input is overlapped with touch switches second Checks whether more than 1000 touch switch functions all touch switch objects are ey Coun 2 placed in the GOT display area for each screen Front and Back O Checks whether the objects exceeding the following numbers are set to be stored into memory Line graph path display 2 or more project PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT Memory Store Object Trend graph memory store 17 or more project Scatter graph memory store 17 or more project User alarm memory store 17 or more project Whether the data list or the alarm history is set on the window screen is checked Window Screen Data The data list and the alarm history cannot be displayed on the window screen Whether multiple objects with scroll display data list alarm history and alarm list are set Scroll Object on one screen is checked When the report screen is created whether the numerical print or the comment print is Report Data set on th
180. ect input A character string on multiple lines can be entered edited in the text attribute field but the first one line of the character string will be displayed in the text filed of the Property Sheet By x Bit Lamp Pattern Bek Text Position Center ET Directly enter Text Horizontal Align Center Text Vertical Align Middle Text Offset to Frame 0 Tensa Tase fi Text Size Y 1 gt 9 1 Edit Function 9 2 9 1 1 Batch setting of multiple objects figures on the same screen Property sheet 2 List box When setting the attributes such as function color layer text size and font select an option from the displayed list ol x Bit Lamp Blink Mo Test Position sili E Select from list box Test Test Hornzontal Align Text Vertical Align Text Offset to Frame Text Color Text Style Regular Test Solid Color Test Size Test Size l El l 3 Spin box When setting the attributes such as coordinates number of numerical value display digits and security directly enter a value or select the numerical value by clicking a M ol x Bit Lamp fuels Directly enter a value or click al M Y Foszition 160 Dev Circle circle_ Cerec Boce io Text Position Center 9 1 Edit Function 9 1 1 Batch setting of multiple objects figures on the same screen Property sheet 4 Dialog box When setting the attributes such as device and f
181. ect functions and its number and figures Text arranged on the screen Text are displayedin a list T F F F aar ka aa Section 9 1 5 a Tis y m o a a A ke J Rectangle 4 Project Screen Library Image List Pc Created screen Subject gt my Favorite e py on OFF A NM y ES Numerical Display Numerical Display Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Bit Lamp Numerical Display Numerical Display Multi Action Switch Multi Action Switch Multi Action Switch Multi Action Switch Screen Number Screen Name Data Display Screen a Screen Type Base Screen Security 0 Detailed Explanation Use Screen Color No Pattern Fg Color Bg Color Transparent Color ae Status bar Workspace Property sheet Library Image list Part Image list Settings on the overall Attributes of selected Library is displayed Parts used in the part display project such as created screen objects and figures Objects figures in library can be function are displayed screen and common are displayed pasted settings are displayed Settings can be made here in tree Eo ene a PECINA E euepele K gt GT Designer2 VersionO Reference Manual ka GT Designer2 Untitled2 Project Edit view Screen Common Figure Object D New Ctrl N i Open Ctrl O Close H Save Ctrl 5 Save s Import Project Import Panelkit of GT Design
182. ed Difference cannot be selected All items selected in the project configuration tree are deselected Items for common settings Deselect O are not deselected Download The monitor data is downloaded oy O Downloading only the changed monitor data Use of this function during monitor data debugging or editing only the screens and settings changed since the last download can be selected The download time can be reduced by downloading only the selected items Click the Communication To From GOT menu As the setting dialog box appears click the Project Download GOT tab Click the button Only the changed items will be selected After that the settings of the items to be downloaded and the other setting items can be changed Refer to the following previous section for the setting items of the dialog box K gt Section 5 2 6 Downloading monitor data When downloading only the changed data note that if the Delete all old monitor data check box has been checked only the changed items will be within the download destination folder after download Communicate with GOT dialog box Project Download GOT tab OS Install GOT ROM_BIOS Install gt GOT Communication configuration E Project U ntitled v4 Base Screen wy Data display screen L fy 2 Error screen fe _ Window Screen Project configuration C Parts display tree i _ Comment i f Common Settings T Delete al
183. ed ga O File name Set the project name for opening ol O Select the type of project for opening GTD fle GTD Project data of GT Designer2 is opened DU Win file 4 DUP Project data of DU Win is opened GOT file GOT Project data of GT Designer is opened Files of type 1 Using existing GOT data GOT800 series The data is converted to the monitor screen data for the GOT AS00 series with the GT converter A GOT and 64GO0T The data is converted to the monitor data for the GOT A800 series and this data is converted to the monitor screen data for the GOT A900 series with the GT converter Refer to the following for conversion to the monitor screen data for the GOT A900 series 2 GT Converter Help function 2 Using existig DU data access unit data DU series Sect the DU WIN file and open the project data The DU WIN fil amp s the project data prepared with the FX PCS DUAVIN drawing software 4 3 O 5 TEPENE Indicates the operation steps Brackets used for the menu and items differ Refers to menu in menu bar Refers to dialog box item or GOT utility menu __ Refers to dialog box buttons or PC keyboard Shows functions applicable to GOT A900 series GOT A900 GOT F900 series GOT F900 O Applicable X N A p Refers to information required for P oint operation Yf Q Hint Refers to information useful for operation Refers to supplementary explanations
184. ed and displayed only on the screen The GOT can display the following languages Japanese Korean Chinese Simplified Chinese and Traditional Chinese English German French Portuguese and Spanish Japanese Korean and Chinese include the same Chinese characters When displaying these characters the Japanese ones will be prioritized 8 1 3 Painting figures Closed area and polygon are painted Lu a _ S Before painting filling i Draw areas for painting as follows 2 1 Close the area to paint with solid lines Z Solid line Paint this area z Solid line P D O Solid line Solid line Solid line 2 Use the same color for outlines of the area to be painted a Of Paint this area z k nO Draw with the same color Draw with the same color a ad 09 O a EZ a Remark 1 Precautions for figure to be painted n KCK a Note that any opening of the outline leads to protrusion of paint from the edge a of the figure b Inside of the figure drawn with the same boundary color as the background v color cannot be painted Select a boundary color different from the n background color lt O pr ae 2 Display of paint mark 22 Figures are not painted unless the paint mark is displayed on the screen The paint mark is displayed The paint mark is not displayed on the 5 on the screen screen z 5 EO sa A L gt ma F 3 Redisplay If paint is used unpainted areas may occur S
185. edure below Turn OFF the GOT Remove the communication module board and option module mounted on GOT For GOT provided a communication unit remove the communication cable Turn ON the GOT while pressing two locations shown below on the GOT at the same time 4 Message Reinstall the ROM_BIOS OS appears on the GOT Complete installation according to the GOT instruction If the GOT is not recovered with the above method contact your local Mitsubishi service center or representaive 5 3 Transferring Data Using Memory Card 5 3 1 Installing ROM_BIOS Installation method of the ROM_BIOS is shown below Write method to memory card z fu Click the Communication To Memory Card gt Lu 6 The setting dialog box appears Refer to the following description for setting After setting click the Install button to start saving on the memory card Communicate with Memory Card 5 Memon card write ROM_BIOS Install lt Points of caution S D UW FROM BIOS ts installed in the memory card T l gt 0O How to install WO Make sure the GOT is OFF Insert the memory card with the ROM _ BIOS into the GOT Afr ou touch two pont of the GOT s screen In fact upper left side and Upper center side and power i applied to the GOT O Shen starting installing the ROM BIOS you take off the GOT s screen and wait a minute X o After completing
186. een Operation method ED Perform either of the following operations oe BMP format file is imported as an e a Image data image e Figure gt Import Image menu nee DXF format file is imported as an IF Import DXF image e Figure Import DXF menu Q The Open a File dialog box appears Select the file of the figure data to be imported and click the button Look in Sa Line Al c File name tank bmp Files of type Bitmap Files bmp Cancel Pasting a file by drag and drop The BMP DXF format file can be pasted onto the GT Desinger2 screen by drag and drop operation ar 2 Hint Pasting a file by drag and drop The BMP DXF format file can be pasted onto the GT Desinger2 screen by drag and drop operation Z wa sai GT Designer2 Untitled E Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help Tank bmp x wae ne m Rae peL se ae m jN Z w fioo Ry Status Observation Time Action PA Alarm History BA Floating Alarm wa Recipe B Script lt i Ethernet dih Gateway Server ha Gateway Client 4 Mail 8 13 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 1 5 Pasting figure data of BMP file BMP format file 1 Compatible BMP format file 2 color 16 color 256 color BMP format data can be imported OVERVIEW Point f Note the following points when importing data to GT Designerz2
187. eesaeeeaeeeaees 4 24 4 7 OF IGUrC OraW ING LOX WNDU srira n a acdatoys a unGde see everest A a Ravee aes 4 26 4 1 A Object functions eting iosian naaie e Stead aia Ea e song a ia aiaia 4 28 4 t 59 Basic operations Of dialog DOX aeni ennaa a aa a eee eo 4 36 4 3 ODE ath M lNIE SCEE Saren aun a E T eeeeiuanuentund 4 38 4 8 1 Cas ading tiliNg SCreenS sasinntciteecociescie ee a aa area gaceckeshamcciocstaarcd eesealceenttea oes auat 4 38 4 8 2 Making editing screen active 0annannennannnanansnnnrnrrrrorrrnrnrrrrnrrrrnrrsnrnnrrrrrrrrnrrnnrsnrnnernnrnrrnnrnnernen 4 39 4Y CGnanginG Screen F FODENY sierpe ae OREA EEE 4 40 4 10 Viewing Created Screen Image ccccceeccceccceeeceeeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeeceueeseeseeeseesseeeas 4 43 4 10 1Previewing the Base SCSI ccaic6ie dense iets hehe lindd aneeealoeaadecalinddoutie letdassnesSoddanebielelidoesuatectdauwelieties 4 43 4 10 2Previewing the Base Screen with WINKOW ccccecccseecseecceeeeeeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeesaeeeseeeseeeseeesaees 4 46 AA CODY ING DClETING Sree eiren a T 4 48 ATi VCODYING screen data seerste esii digelel na o a e Calabi lida catia ald 4 48 4 11 2Deleting sereen data ocra a E eee ed td 4 50 4 12 Setting Screen Switching Device ccc cece cccccsecceseeceeeseeeceseseeeeseeeaeeseeeseeeeseeees 4 52 AA OD Ala ING Cie reei a a a auns ee eeaeeamanebdacantanes 4 54 4 14 Saving Project ciirsa aaae aa a E Ea a ERa EEEa 4 56 4 14 1 Overwriting A
188. eeseeesaeesaeeeaees 8 21 OAA INGO sane redsun a a a a a a a veer A 8 21 8 2 5 Aligning figures and ODJeCHS cccccccecccseccseeceeecceecceeeceeecaeecueecueceueecaeecaeecsuecsueesueesueesseesausenaes 8 22 8 2 6 Enlarging or reducing multiple figures and objects ccc cccccceeceseeceeeeseeeseeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeseeeaeeeanes 8 27 8 2 7 Changing attributes of figures and objects eee cc eeecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseees 8 28 9 20 Changing Size of fig res oDbjEClS sanss aahi a a E a a ects 8 30 8 2 9 Copying figures and objects CONSECULIVELY ccccccceecceeeeeeeeceeece cece eeseeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeeeaeetaeeenees 8 32 5 2 VOCODYV ING figures ANG ODJCC S ararnar aa a a ane eee ees 8 34 9 USEFUL FUNCTIONS cece eee ee eee es 9 1to9 39 LIC T WIIG HOLM einna E AETA TT EE ATA E edna tem wrens 9 1 9 1 1 Batch setting of multiple objects figures on the same screen Property sheet ccccceeee 9 1 9 1 2 Batch setting and managing objects figures for each purpose Category workspace 9 5 9 1 3 Batch editing attributes of objects figures scattered on multiple screens Batch edit 9 12 9 1 4 Simple selection of overlapped figure Data VICW cccccceeceseeceeeeceeeeeeeseeeeaeeeseeseeeseeseeeeaees 9 16 9 1 5 Checking devices in use Device LIST iesiuitieinntovinarietivuyaudaneudv ancien andenenniaeterncaten enna 9 17 9 1 6 C
189. elect the Paste The screen property dialog box appears Set the screen number of the copying screen X f i U K Section 4 5 Creating a New Screen D Z gO After setting click the button to display the copied screen eS Lu LA T Display Overlay Screen E A Project a Base Screen ee EE 1 Main menu O 2 Line A fo S 5 i EO gt Window sae g Ban C Report Screen Ou of Common Settings z s Comment Eara M Farts Base 3 Sound Files X ad lt ad co Z op St Project 32 Library ie QO LW Q Z lt z ad QO 4 11 Copying Deleting Screen 4 48 4 11 1 Copying screen data 4 49 Remark To copy screens continuously One screen can be copied to multiple screens Select Screen Utilize The utilize dialog box appears Set the following items and click the button FH Base Screen ALD Window Screen H I Report Screen Destination Copy Number f coe Project display list The screen to be copied is selected up to 25 screens fol O Destination Set the copy destination screen number 1 to 32767 o O The number of copies is set Up to 100 screens can be copied at a time Ex Copying with destination number 6 and number of copy 3 The screen is copied to base screens 6 7 and 8 AA Project EREU Project Fl Base Screen _ 1 Main meny Copy Number E 2 Line A 2 Line A O 3 Line_B E 3 Line_B Ea Window Screen 6 Main
190. emory information App 14 Appendix 4 Applicable Monitor Data Appendix 4 4 Copying monitor data from one GOT unit to other unit with a PC card MEMO USEFUL FUNCTIONS x lt m Z m Q Q lt INDEX Appendix 4 Applicable Monitor Data App 15 Appendix 4 4 Copying monitor data from one GOT unit to other unit with a PC card INDEX A Aligning figures and objects 8 22 B Basic operation of dialog box 3 2 C Category workspace 00 00 eee 9 5 Changing attributes of figure and object 8 28 Changing size of figure and object 8 30 Copying figure and object continuously 8 32 Customizing Customizing GT Designer2 operating environment PERETE ENTA ENTE aoa cake ean tite ane eee 3 26 Customizing screen configuration 3 20 Customizing toolbars 4 3 22 D Data CHECK wir but ante ok ee eats Eee esd 4 54 WANA SIZC ss hw bt PEARED CAGE oS EE Be 9 34 Data transfer operation 046 5 1 Data type to be installed on GOT 5 1 Data VIEW seid sind areca vives a a a una eaeadae 9 16 DEVICE Sb rs dcp sens 3 ts i aa Shay tb Wind ee oe eet 9 17 Display with frame 0 000000 ae 3 32 Downloading monitor data 5 26 Downloading special data 5 28 Drawing figureS 0 000 eee eee 8 1 E Editing figure and objects 8 20 Ending GT Designer2
191. emporary area and Screen 8 33 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 2 9 Copying figures and objects consecutively 8 2 10 Copying figures and objects Figures and objects can be copied at a time z KD Lu he eg N a a ae i Select the desired figure or object for copies gt Lu 6 D Select Edit Duplicate menu Context menu Duplicate from the menu When the Copy is selected copied figure or object is placed Zz gt z O GT Designer Untitled Project Edit View Screen Common Figure O Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tc T P x hes Undo Ctrl Z He 2 Ie fie Sy ie 24 wah 49 E e Ped T PEI EEERT EET D Gy cu wx DZ 7 z ae z sv amp Copy Ctrl C MO Sy Gh Gu ea f5 amp Be at Paste Ctrl V eee i Consecutive Copy z O Delete DEL 7 N Edit Vertex a wi aks Object of Selection Duplicate Select All Ctrlecy D Consecutive Copy f v Adjust Direct Text Size Za Delete WW amp OL Guidelines if Tau we Add to Category Attribute Stacking Order Rotate Flip Benteng Align SSPE SNE E z Bring to Front Ctrl F Q ON aR Ha 9 Send to Back Ctrl B Z x f Edit Touch Area Frame Region 2 9 Fit in Touch Area Z l EZ Move Mode Altributg Saaie a OW Add To Category Adjust Direct Text Size Edit Touch Area Erame Region Fitin Touch Area ad Display Touch Area Ta E EE ene A EA A OS g0 ad
192. en 6 2 Enor apran I Window Screen _ Report Screen Use Screen Color E Common Settings Security Repant P Hard Copy J Operation Panel Detailed Explanati Aue Pattern System Environment Fg Color Repot o Ba Cal E Hard Copy oes EH Operation Panel ie Se Screen Number Change the window size of the workspace Toolbars size cannot be changed Screen Name Data display screen Screen Type Base Screen S ecurity 0 Netailed F vnlanatinn v a a r a A ba a GT Designer2 C WINDOWS Desktop production A GTD Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Wind JO sO Bane ne wi BNh Age AGe COS ea mint fs 57 amp Q e me g BE ee Sen ee eee Screen Attribute T Display Overlay Screen Screen Number s a Project a Screen Name E35 Base Screen Screen Type 1 Data display screen 2 Error Screen I Window Screen sain Report Screen Use Screen Color Common Settings Security Detailed Explanati 1 4 Si Pattern System Environment Fg Color Repot o i Ee Hard Copy Bg Color Operation Panel eh Bahri sgt ay Category 2 Project Re ieee ten wrt cheese Cee mere oe D When it is dragged to the original position full display can be recovered KaJ GT Designer C WINDOWS Desktop prod
193. en the color setting is changed to the setting of less colors in the system environment 256 colors 2 colors e The color palette for setting color will be changed according to the updated settings e The color on the drawing screen will be kept the same as prior to the change If the color setting for a red rectangle figure is changed to the 2 colors B W the red color will remain e The colors of the image data BMP format file will be reduced when the project is stored the screen is closed and that image data is double clicked Object function and device type The object bit lamp or word lamp for which bit device setting and word device setting are separated cannot be converted between bit device and word device When device type is changed Confirm the device type when the set bit device is changed from bit device into word device The device flag may be represented as depending on the settings Example DO bO DO DO b5 OS setting Set the font size as Small Font when setting OS Windows screen The GT designer2 dialog box cannot be displayed correctly if the font size is set as Large font When the toolbar icon appears in smaller size after startup of GT Desinger2 The toolbar icon may appear in smaller size right after GT Deseiger2 is started up To correctly display the icon initialize it as instructed below Click on Project References from the menu and select the toolbar tab Click on bu
194. end de OUUING PrOCCOUTCS via tihinctes tence a a a a r e aa App 6 Appendix 3 2 iPrecatliohs arine A a aae aa a ict App 7 Appendix 4 APPICADISE MONK DlA enii E A App 11 Appendix 4 1 Opening monitor data c ccccecccceccceeccececeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeueceeeeseeeseueeeeeseeeeseeeseeeeesaneess App 12 Appendix 4 2 Uploading monitor Cataiieixsccaceeteceeeaei cdi vaiaieesd Bae attest ee ee App 12 Appendix 4 3 Downloading monitor data ccccccccccceecseeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeesueseeeeseeesanees App 13 Appendix 4 4 Copying monitor data from one GOT unit to other unit with a PC card 04 App 14 Function Quick Reference Edit Operation GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual Preview Show the preview of screen image of GOT Page 4 43 8 AN Align Aligns objects or images Page 8 22 v Property sheet o 00 gt oaa Guidelines Sets same attributes to objects or images in the same screen Page 9 1 Displays lines to align figures and objects when arranging a Page 8 25 l placed figure or object Replace colors Base 2 SE Changes the color s of the objects and figures arranged on Page 9 12 a plural screens at the same time Base 1 Replace shapes Base 2 Base 3 e a gt Changes the switch lamp figures at the
195. ening another if the number of open screens is at its maximum War 25 4 y Effective from the next startup of GT Designer2 5 Og O i ZO Te Sie nO Close Click the button z Ot Z Y LO On Z0 EZ niz ro Ow DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 4 1 Selecting Project at the Start of GT Designer2 4 2 4 2 Creating a New Project When a new project is created the settings can be done using a wizard or not using a wizard Using a wizard At the Operations tab of the Preferences dialog box if the Show Wizard on New Project box is unchecked the New Project Wizard does not start If the wizard is used select the Operations tab at Project Preferences and check the Show Wizard on New Project button Select Project Ed Open MV Show this dialog next time you start GT Designer2 V New New Project Wizard Eg Start New Project Wizard Essential settings of GOT can be easily performed using this wizard GOr A 900 The wizard can do the following setting 2 Communication Settings G Omiooo 1 System Settings 3 Screen Switch Device Settings GOT Fogg IV Show Wizard on New Project Ly ahamiats entre alieke Ae pie abe coe V me New Project Wizard xi System Settings for GOT B New Project Wizard System Setting Confirmation Please select the type of GOT and the number
196. ent fT Parts f Sound Files PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY 2 Project 3 Library DRAW AND EDIT 4 11 Copying Deleting Screen 4 50 4 11 2 Deleting screen data Remark Deleting screen data from menu bar A Select Screen Delete menu 2 The screen deletion dialog box appears Select the screen to be deleted and click the button Delete Screen E A Project a Base Screen ve 1 Main menu 2 Line_4 3 3 Line ACO Window Screen AHO Report Screen e The selected screen is deleted 4 51 4 11 Copying Deleting Screen 4 11 2 Deleting screen data 4 12 Setting Screen Switching Device To switch the screen on the GOT or to display the window screen use the dedicated device for screen r i Lu switching gt Refer to the manual below for details of the screen switching device ui O K gt GT Designer2 Versiond Reference Manual select Common System Environment menu of the menu bar z O E Double click Screen Switching of the system environment he i Z The screen switching setting dialog box appears gt O After setting click the button lolx z en Environment ey ee ow a ystem Settings Dor E Project Title Switching D100 Dev m T Auriiay Setting M Overlap Window1 8 D System Information E E A ee ne ee 2 12 Screen Switching E Display Position ts specified with the device k z ii Password T Window bar None S m Key W
197. er Import Device Comment of GX Developer Dropdown menu Preferences Page Setup E Print Preview amp Print Ctrl P Recent Files Exit Alt F4 3 1 3 1 Screen Configuration and Basic Operation 3 1 1 Screen configuration and various tools Dialog box Refer to the following section for the operation method z 5 Section 4 7 5 Basic operations of dialog box gt Lu gt Go up one level O Display menu 2 O0Example GTO 6 Creation of new folder q SO se Me 26 HO File name Files of type at Designer Files GTD GTE Cancel ZA ou Basic Text Lamp Extended Action Trigger Tab m Switch Action Device po H Dev Data Size Radio button Zz O lt 5 Q LL Z oe O zZ im i X O 9 N or LU Z O D Lu m oO LL O ee Signed BIN SetValue V Fixed fio I Indirect Dev Spin box m Display Style ON OFF Shape Rectangle 1 rect_1 x Others gt Heverse Giviten Area Frame z Switch M Background M Pattern El M Category Switch v CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN m Extended Function o M Extended IV Action di DATA TRANSFER OPERATION List box Function list check box Check box Command button Data Set Switch x Basic Text Lamp Extended Action Trigger Extension tab Security Display fo Security Input fo
198. es in use Device List Device List The device list displays the devices used for the editing screen or the entire project Devices are seached After entering a desired device click the Find button to start the search a Device List Collection Target yapewa est x fi IT All Screens Devies Points Screen Obiect Position ObiectID_ a ee ee eee Click this tab to select the device types and display them in the list Useful for cases below The Device List is useful to check devices used for the project screen created Operation method Select the Tool Device List Screen Project e When the Screen is selected the collection target is Base Screen e When the Project is selected the collection target is the whole Project D The Device List is displayed Check the devices used mark is displayed when there is data which is not updated Displays a list of ee device used O pe p e a Object ID oF_ xoooo B1 Bit Switch 3216 o ko e esw e20 o oF mo BT BitLamp 01216 10002 O oF MTB BitLamp 112 80 10003 9 17 9 1 Edit Function 9 1 5 Checking devices in use Device List Item Collection Target Screen NO All Screens check Box Update button Jump button Export button Find button Description The display target is selected from Project Base Screen Window Screen and Report Screen When the Project is selected Screen No
199. escending order EJ x View 6 Overlap 1 Select whether Overlap Window 1 will be displayed 1 or hidden O x z N Overlap 2 Select whether Overlap Window 2 will be displayed 1 or hidden o x 2 if Z 692 Select whether Superimpose will be displayed 1 or hidden O x i Te Key Window Select whether Key Window will be displayed 1 or hidden o O S 2 2 Colors EL Eeg 5 4 2 Colors Blue Back x O au Z y 2 Colors Screen colors to be displayed are set O 9 Monochrome Select the colors available for the GOT to be used 2 9 lt colo Ow 16 Colors G x 256 Colors O O Select the security level of the displayed object X Security x im Object with a number lower than the selected level are displayed D Z O 141 To display a window in the preview window the window must have been displayed in the Editor window of the ZE Base Screen Sm C gt Section 4 10 2 Previewing the Base Screen with window QO 2 The image displayed by Preview will be displayed with reversed colors for monochrome type GOT Draw screens considering the above The display on Preview and the actual GOT is different T W The created project data can be monochrome reversed with the following method Q oD OE Example Screen to be displayed on the GOT D wt Projection situation screen1 A L A 1254 B 348 gt X F 1 A95 GOT monochrome type The monochrome display can be reversed by the utility after downloading the project data to GOT S T Screen c
200. esigner2 Versiong Reference Manual This is checked to display overlap window 1 and overlap window 2 Overlap Window 1 a After checking the screen switching device of each window is set O Overlap Window 2 Se ce a When the screen switching device is not set the window for that type is not displayed Display Position is specified with the This is checked to specify the window display position with the device value x device Window bar None This is checked not to display the movement key and the close key O x This is checked to display the superimpose window Superimpose Window After checking the screen switching device of the super impose window is set x When the screen switching device is not set the superimpose window is not displayed ae oo When 1 is to be input to the device set in Base screen at power ON this is unchecked The Uninitialize switching screen or device value is reset when the PLC is powered ON and it prevents the screen data error from x O evice being displayed on the GOT screen a a Remark 1 Setting in project workspace z Double click the system environment The system environment setting dialog box appears Double click Screen Switching o x T Display Overlay Screen JA Project BHC Base Screen AAC Window Screen Es Report Screen a Common Settings en System Environment il Double click click Bae Report ol Hard Copy 2 What is the screen switching device
201. evel l This item is selected to display the set object O W Object fr Ww gt O Object Frame Select this item to display the boundary of the object O Z Device l l l O Specify the text color of the object or object ID I Object ID O Y Text color Black 5 text color LL 26 DO OO Specify the color of the object boundary Object Frame Object Frame If the same transparent color as one used previously is specified for the color front layer it will appear transparent so specify the layer s transparent Zz O g 5 Q LL Z oe O Zz im i X O 9 N aa WW op Ww QO Le color and another color Ex Text background color Device j i Specify the text background color of the object or object ID of ME object IDE White Object ID O Background color White a background color Library Editor Baie Editor _ f Z The background color for the Parts Editor is selected m The background color is selectable from 256 colors m O 5 F O Editor z2 wW background G color a5 The background color for the Library Editor is selected Example i The background color is selectable from 256 colors Background O x color Red Example Be Background color Yellow Z0 F Refer to the next page for details of 1 Su QO 1 Snap Figures and objects are arranged with the dot value set in Snap 7 Ex n Drawing a rectangle Snap is set to 16 dots ras i A gt
202. f type 4 Look in Cal production Al ee 1 productions GTD Files of type GT Designerz Files GTD GTE Cancel F Select the location where the project is saved Ol O Set the project name for opening Eeg O e Select the project type to be opened e GT Designer2 Files GTD GTE The GT Designer2 project data will be opened GTD GOT 900 series GTE GOT 1000 series e GT Designer Files AQGOTP GOT The GT Designer project data for GOT 900 series will be opened e DU Win Files DUP The DU Win project data for GOT F900 series will be opened l O lt gt Appendix 3 Using Existing Data e GOT1000 Binary Files G1 The project data for GOT 1000 series saved in binary format will be opened This binary format file is the project data equivalent to the GTE file of GT Designer2 Select this file format mainly when opening the project data copied in the CF card using the utility function of the GOT e FQOOGOT Binary Files Fl Only GOT F900 series The project data for the data transfer tool will be opened For details of the project data conversion from GOT F900 DUP to GT11 refer to Project Data Conversion Summary 4 9 4 3 Opening Closing Project 4 3 1 Opening project Point f Data within a memory card Do not directory edit the project data within a memory card i e project data transferred from GT Desinger2 to a memory card or uploaded from the GOT toa
203. faster or pick a Control Panel icon aa Administrative Tools z Power Options rA Scheduled Tasks YE System Click System J Choose Ports and double click the Communication Port icon The Communication Port Properties dialog box will appear When COM1 is selected Device Manager File Action View Help 88223 xA epceoios 1 Computer See Disk drives 2 Display adapters 4 DVD CD ROM drives Floppy disk controllers 23 Floppy disk drives IDE ATA ATAPI controllers Keyboards Mice and other pointing devices Monitors Network adapters 4 Other devices 9 Ports COM amp LPT amp 4 Communications Port COM1 ay ECP Printer Port LPT1 N aR Processors 7 i G Eramaa r Double click the current communication Port OVERVIEW Universal Serial Bus controllers CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Click the Detail Setting button of the port setting tab to display the detail setting dialog box of the port Communications Port COM1 Properties Communications Port COM1 Properties General Port Settings Driver Resources General Port Settings Driver Resources F Communications Port COM1 Click Port Settings tab Bits per second he Device type Ports COM amp LPT Data bits 8 Manufacturer Standard port types Location on Intel R 82801EB LPC Interface Controller Device status gt Stop bits 1 This device is working properly
204. fault Advanced Cancel Apply languages O Arabic m Language settings for the system C Armenian Your system is configured to read and write documents in multiple O Baltic languages o Central Europe Simplified Chir O Cyrillic Ad O Thai Traditional Chinese O Turkic D1 vietnamese x Set default Advanced 9 4 Inputting multiple language 9 4 1 Input method o Z O H O Z 5 LL l gt LL Li aa 5 APPENDIX INDEX Click the Input Locales tab and click the button in Installed input locales General Numbers Currency Time Date Input Locales r Installed input locales Input language Keyboard layout IME NI English United States US Remove Properties IME Settings Set as Default m To turn off Caps Lock Press CAPS LOCK key C Press SHIFT key m Hot keys for input locales ltem Key sequence Switch between input locales Left Alt Shift Switch to English United States US None Change Key Sequence IV Enable indicator on taskbar Cancel Apply D The Installed input locales dialog box appears 21x Keyboard layout IME United States Dvorak Cance Set the necessary language and click the button When the input language is set for the first time the Windows 2000 CD ROM is required To validate the added setting make sure to restart Windows 2000 Add Input Locale
205. fficiency Main functions of the GT Designer2 are described below if gt a gi gt ka GT Designer2 Untitled2 B 1 Main menu o x EF Project Edit view Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help la x 0 oe dd Gs mo em we ls Th l vom AOS AAA mm fe f0 fie z amp on forr bev 0 Z m 2 fal A OTET ee eee z Display Overlay Screen e l BE Data View B 1 Main menu F 3 12 Projec iF 2 7 il a Sereen M Objects V Figures O 1 Main menu A HR T J Window Screen lt O CI Report Screen MO Common Settings B System Environment f Report p Hard Copy Z Fria z 5 S7 Project 3 Library x oi xi bz Screen D Za nig Screen Number 1 65 LL DO Main menu Screen Type Base Screen Security 0 Detailed Explanation Use Screen Color No it Pattern H Fg Color x O Ba Calar gt Ow Search AIT GOT GT SoftGOT 640x480 256 Colors MELSEC Qna Q MELDAS C fi 0 0 X 387 3 PZ Zo EZ JE Z QO O W 1 2 1 Easy to use operations ad L D SZ Easy to know the overall project c gt Section 3 1 2 Operation of workspace lt 9 f i lt Settings of the overall project such as created screens or common settings are displayed on the tree lt i co It is convenient to know the current settings to check progress of work and to copy the screen AO T Dis
206. fficient but the insufficient space message appears Delete all old monitor data check and download all monitor data When it is necessary to back up the monitor data upload it to the PC or memory card before downloading 5 1 Type and Size of Transfer Data to GOT 5 1 2 Memory space required for data transfer Check method of GOT free space 1 Check the space with the GT Designerz2 When the space is checked with the GT Designer2 connect the GOT to the PC with the RS 232 cable f S GD Click the Communication Memory Information menu The communication configuration dialog box Memory information tab appears Click the Get gt Latest button 2 re G The free space is indicated in the Available space and the Memory meter of the GOT built in O memory 7 Z Refer to the following for details of each item in the built in memory information ies gt Section 5 2 2 Getting built in memory information a O Communicate with GOT q og 45 Sa J Project Untitled WW bs ase screen or Hi aie Screen D gt Special Module monitor data J OS information fa On 26 HE ein O1 Memory meter Mi Used MM Empty bie M Available size 5516 kbyte User area size 9088 kbyte Installed memory 12288 k Project ID 2006292 Delete Setite D Close Ma LL O Z ZO Q g Su mO 2 Check the space with the GOT The space can be checked with the built in memory information of t
207. figures are displayed by SOR Cancel Change the order of switch i Priority of duplicate setting for the touch switch is changed to priority of the GOT800 Series x action Delete USER ROM CHECK Bit The user check area of the GOT utility self diagnosis is deleted x utton x Enable change of XOR display When the XOR display is set in display mode of the part display function grouped figures are in part display XORed at a time and displayed PN A Remark Delete USER ROM CHECK button B App 8 When the user area is checked on the GOT the monitor data in the GOT is deleted Deletion of the user area check can prevent deletion of the monitor data by incorrect operation by a user Appendix 3 Using Existing Data Appendix 3 2 Precautions 2 Different actions of functions between GOT800 Series and GOT900 Series and corrective actions Part Display Part Movement Touch Switch When you have selected Display mode XOR display the parts that group overlapping figures are displayed as follows GT800 Series All grouped figures are displayed at once when using XOR display GOT A900 Series Each in the grouped figures is displayed one at a time in the overlapping order when using XOR display When you create data by setting the same line color and pattern color with pattern type 8 fill after selecting Display mode XOR display in the GOT800 Series and then convert it into the GOT A900
208. figures scattered on multiple screens Batch edit Attribute Find N Device Number Color Shape st Replace Target AllScreen Edited Screen Screen Range Frorn 1 To 2767H Base Screen Category Switching screen switch Selected Area f Common Settings The setting of screen is excluded Delete FER Clear Color of Objects a 9 9 9 1 Edit Function 9 1 2 Batch setting and managing objects figures for each purpose Category workspace D Specify the color white after change Attribute FrdN Device Number Color Shape __Find Now Repl Target __Bemlace All Screen Delete Edited Screen cl Ear C Screen Range Frarn i Tofsarer 4 Base Screen o Z O H Z 5 LL l gt LL Lu aa f Categor Switching screen switch Selected Area Common Settings The setting of screen is excluded APPENDIX Color of ibjects a INDEX 4 Click the button The color is changed to the specified color Click the button to close the dialog box Color Batch Edit x Atribute Fd N Device Number f Color Shape __Eind Now Repl Target a Ste AllScreen Delete Edited Screen S eal Screen Range Frarn is To i2767 H Base Screen Category Switching screen switch Selected Area f Common Settings The setting of screen is excluded ca Color of Obiects NewCo 9 1 Edit Function 9 10
209. formation screen at the same time Refer to the manual below for the start up method and the operation method of the utility gt GOT A900 Series Operating Manual Extended Option Functions Manual 2 Upgrading method The ROM_BIOS can be upgraded with the method below a Upgrading with RS 232 communication K gt Section 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable b Upgrading with memory card K7 Section 5 3 Transferring Data Using Memory Card Standard monitor OS It is the program to control the monitor function 5 1 Type and Size of Transfer Data to GOT 5 1 1 Data type to be installed on GOT gi Communication driver It is the driver to make communication between the GOT and the PLC CPU Select the communication driver suitable for the connection type Connection type QCPU Q mode Bus Q Bus connection A QnACPU Bus Communication driver name A QnA A QnA QCPU MELDAS C6 C64 A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 MELDAS C 6 CPU direct connection FXCPU MELSEC FX QCPU A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 MELDAS C 6 Computer link connection QnACPU AJ71QC24 QCPU A mode ACPU AJ71C24 UC24 Data link system MNET2 B MELSECNET connection Network system Remote device station CC Link connection Intelligent device station MNET 10 A QnA Q MNET 10 A CC LINK RD CC LINK ID Through G4 CC LINK G4 Ethernet connection OMRON PLC connection YASKAWA PLC Connection Microco
210. g user library Another library with the being edited library can be imported from the context menu of the library workspace Importing a user library The following describes how to import a user library OVERVIEW O Select Library and right click on it and then click the Import User Library menu II Subiect C MELSECSGTD2 Userl 2 New User Library CONFIGURATION Dl SYSTEM New User Library Folder Load User Library Folder Store to User Library Folder Import User Library FF t t t t t t P Open Image View Dialog SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 eu Project Z Category 3 Library Select a file type GTD2 Ibd or Ibe for the file to be imported open 21x Look in a Gmdp gt S ey EJ CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN Files of type GT Designer Library Files Ibe Cancel DATA TRANSFER OPERATION Select a file to be imported and click Open Open eee 2x Look in UserLib amp c E a 000_My Favorites Ibe 001_Switch be a 002_Start switch Ibe PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT as File name oo1_s witch Ibe Files of type aT Designer2 Library Files Ibe Cancel a gt X L oe Z T D DRAW AND EDIT 7 3 Creating Original Library 7 19 7 3 8 Importing user libr
211. get to be displayed in the list is refined When the device is set and when the return key or the Find button is pressed the search is Find button performed When the User Library is selected the name becomes All User Library S 0 Including My Favorites 9 1 Edit Function 9 20 9 1 6 Checking Text in use Text String List 9 2 Referring to Device Comment When Setting Devices The device comment and the device name created on the GX Developer can be checked when setting devices on the GT Designer2 Since devices can be set on the GT Designer2 while checking the devices used for the PLC program errors in device number setting can be prevented Only for GOT A900 Series GX Developer project w MELSOFT series GX Developer C WINDOWS Desktop ladder 1 Device comment COMMENT Project Edit Find Replace Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help Dota S e Qala s s ele Ble Efile lo Program gt EY a ki a Tel x ladder 1 Device name D0 x p Program E Device comment Device name Comment GT Designer2 project pe H La Parameter 129 E Device memory D130 Line A operation mode Device lt Specification 16bit Signed BIN gt iB Device init D131 Line B operation mode l 1 D132 Line C operation mode Device Comment x D133 Line D operation mode JD aa jo xi D134 7 Linee Speracien node 7 2 3 Device Commen Machines pss C CSCSCSC SY lsis _ show Can
212. gurat lai f Q Fon ino i ledt Start Program MELSOFT Application GT Designer2 D tra erion E Tre project wen daoota is displayed eal 7 Returns to INDEX MENU 5 O zZ T 5 O Lu Q Z lt z a O 3 5 How to use Help 3 34 PDF manual viewing procedure When Index is selected After performing operation in El the following screen appears Click the manual to be viewed Bi Acrobat Reader IndexGTWK2 E_pdf Iof x T Eile Edit Document Tools View Window Help lej x je2AS alli gt ville p2 o DED0 E ay INDEX MENU GOT A900 Series GOT F900 Series PDF Manual b P GT Dasianar2 jon 0 jog Mi P GT Designer2 Version 1 Reference Manual GOT A900 Series PDF Manual Bookmarks Thumbnails P GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works2 Version 1T Desiqner2 Version1 compatible Extended Option Functions Manual P GOT A900 Series User s Manual GT Works2 Version 14GT Designer2 Version1 compatible Connection System Manual P GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Work ersion Designer Version comestible Gateway Function P GT Simulater2 Version Operating Manual P GT SofGOT Versiont Operating Manual GOT F900 Series PDF Manual P GOT F900 Series HARDWARE Manual CONNECTION D The selected manual is displayed For details of the Adobe Reader operation method refer to Help of Adobe Reader Ei Acrobat Reader
213. h v 1 Tabs 2 Radio buttons 3 List box 4 Function list check boxes Extended Function T Extended T Action T Trigger Cancel Basic Text Lamp Text ON f OFF Copy OFF gt 0N All Settings Text Only Text Mi Style Regular ig z Size fis 7 fi x fi z KY PHI t gt Use Hig it a 6 Spin box ayob lo Center Top Bottom Left Bight p Horizontal Vertical AR ce gt Aaner tft y Offset to Frame Dot 7 Text box Lamp Key Bit C Word fest vi Signed BIN r Extended Function T Extended l Action Trigger caeal 8 Check box 1 Extended tab I Hine Patter Lal aa E up fo Use Aight auaiy kant Buzzer aiwaysSet OneShot During Push Offset lias ey Extended Function MV Extended MV Action W Trigger Cancel 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 5 Command buttons 1 Tab Click __ to switch from one tab to the other Checking the Function list check box additionally displays the corresponding extended tab On the extended tab more details can be set than on the basic tab 2 Radio button Select an item by clicking the corresponding O 3 List box Click y to display the selection list and click and select an item 4 Function list check box When displaying the extended tabs click to put a check mark The settings made on the e
214. hanging Screen Property WE Auxiliary setting tab Settings for data input operation and use non use of the object function are changed on the setting screen z WW Screen Property a gt Basic Ausiliary Kep window O Key window Cursor display setting Action when condition success Don t display cursor and key window O Acton when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window q Action when condition success setting takes priority when Display is set P in both Action when condition success and Action when switching success i Om 2 Z Cursor position Lett top User ID fi on 8 Acton when condition fail Don t erase cursor key window and input obje Cursor input area fi char blink 6 A IY When touch input is detected open key window at the same time Ps 5 O ma Cursor Movement L Z l OS Defined key action As aright arrow key O A LI L Position to specify area Bottom Right m a Other T Cary out station no change A M Carny out display of alarm flow Move key window Don t move l Screen Size Z oi Z Y LO On ZO EZ niz ro Ow E Key window tab Settings for key window used on the setting screen are changed Screen Property Ea TE Basic Ausiliary Fey Window Dr tO ad Key window setting Screen Ez r a WER EP E DE a tee COMER Lae A ce H W Sannurunsnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnn nd
215. hanging library property Number or name of user created library or registered template is changed Lu ED Select the user created library template for copying z Fi a Library Image List x 5 C MELSECAGTD2 UserLib My Favorites Y ER Library HoOxRrRSseaxe A 3 User Library El My Favorites Fran Z wae Lamp_1 E O fig 2Lamp_2 bd fe 3Lamp_3 T Ap 4 Parts 1 4 Parts_1 5 Parts_2 6 Parts_3 5 Ap 5 Parts_2 j O LL nz E gt O aa 1 Switch nO GA 2 Start switch E Project J Category 3 Library eT Library workspace Library image list og Perform the following operation 26 Of Z Q 1 Editing in library workspace H5 Right click the mouse to select Property iad 2 Deleting in library image list zZ Click the Property button T To oe O The template creation dialog box appears 9 GE Change the library template number and the library template name Click the button ST Template Froperty x Mo f z L i Mame Switch ze gO Eg ea QO 4 Property of the selected user created library template is changed o 8 x Library Image List x te C MELSEC GTD2 UserLib My Favorites 9 Ea bay b D 2Z E axe o gt 9 User Library 2 5 aR ais Pea LEE E O amp_ Ww fe 3Lamp_3 Ap 4 Parts 1 4 Parts_1 5 Parts_2 6 Parts_3 Ap 5 Parts_2 F Ap 6 Parts_3 DAA Lg 1 Switch aa 2 Start switch 3 Proje
216. he currently edited library data is saved or not When saving the library click the button GT Designer2 x 2 Do you want to save the current library to C MELSEC GTD2 UserLib D Specify the folder to store the library file The library file name is unchangeable When saving multiple libraries create a folder for each library file After the specification click the button x New User Library Folder Path CAWINDOwWS Desktopiproduction B Browse UserLib folder is created in the specified place Cancel Point f Saving multiple libraries To save multiple libraries create a folder for each library folder as library file names are fixed 4 The library file Ibe is stored created in the User Lib folder which is newly created in the specified folder automatically oi Display on Windows emea fE wnoows weon iix 3 Library File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help E emp User Library 4 Back gt Qsearch GyFolders History as La My Favorites H E at Address C WINDOWS Desktop production B UserLib gt Go Crystal 7 9 Soft a Retro 000_My H Simple Favorites be H Basic Figure H E Iso Dialog 1 objectis 772 bytes g My Computer ae Library a Project Category 7 16 7 3 Creating Original Library 7 3 6 Saving library 7 3 f Loading library from file The specified user library folder can be opened to
217. he image of alignment is displayed Select the direction of alignment and click the button Item No Top Bottom Left Right Center Align Equally Align Align Equal Horizontal Vertical Center E l Bottom No Left Center Right Cancel Apply Description Alignment is not performed Figures are aligned with the top figure Figures are aligned with the bottom figure Figures are aligned with the leftmost figure Figures are aligned with the rightmost figure O Figures are aligned at the center in the selected direction Kog Check this to align figures equally Across Figures are aligned equally in the horizontal direction Down Figures are aligned equally in the vertical direction 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 2 5 Aligning figures and objects o O O O O O J O JO 8 24 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT fee USING LIBRARY Q LUI m Z lt lt L or A Alignment using the guideline function Select View Guideline Context menu Guideline from the menu View Screen Common Figure C A Preview ON Image Toolbars w Status Bar Workspace s Propertysheet 4 Library oom Window Preview Redisplay w Display Touch Area View hers Grid Guidelines Options
218. he utility Refer to the manual below for start up method and operation method of the utility gt GOT A900 Series Operating Manual Extended Option Functions Manual PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT MEMORY INFORMATION S W Version Al e ROM BIOS Ver 8 0 1 M e SYSTEM Ver 8 0 1 COMM DRIVER Ver 8 0 1 PLC MONITOR Ver 8 0 1 ESC PRINT B CODE Not Installed LADDER A Ver 8 0 1 SP UNIT MON Ver 8 0 1 SP RECIPE WAVE eSP UNIT DATA Not Installed NETWORK MON Ver 8 0 1 v USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 5 1 Type and Size of Transfer Data to GOT 5 10 5 1 2 Memory space required for data transfer Check method of transfer data size D Select Communication To From GOT To Memory Card menu The Communicate with GOT dialog box or the Communicate with PC Card dialog box appears Each data size can be checked in each dialog box Refer to the following for details of each dialog box e Communicate with GOT dialog box gt Section 5 2 4 Installing ROM BIOS e Communicate with PC Card dialog box Section 5 3 2 Transferring OS monitor data and special data 1 Communicate with GOT dialog box Communicate with GOT OS Install GOT hh BIOS sca gt i Download gt GOT Click the tab and click the desired tab to check data size Project Untitled rata seen When the transfer items are clicked the boobs 44 Opa SCreer r g a ae ine transfer size to
219. hecking Text in use Text String LISt ce ccccccecccseccececeeeeceeceaceceecaeeseeeseeessueesaeesseeseeesnans 9 19 9 2 Referring to Device Comment When Setting Devices cc ecccececeeceeeeeeeeeee ees 9 21 9 2 1 IMPOMING device commenteren a e a a r aaa a a aaa ani 9 21 9 2 2 CNeCk Mmethod of device commentis naana ee E EE AA TEE 9 23 9 3 Checking Monitor Data TOF Errors cussies a T N 9 25 9 4 Inputting multiple language ccccceccececeecceeceeceeceeecaeecaeeeeesaeeeceeseeeseesaeesaeeseens 9 26 9 4 1 IN PUG Me MOO a antes acs conavstiaseue oh cctect len caceuentu sated tece ne natavenlened E A AA 9 27 DAZ PRO CAUTIONS assaia a a oat une Sens tateent a a a aaa aD 9 33 9 5 Confirming the created data size 2 0 0 ecccccccesecceeceeeeceeeceeeceueeaeeseuseceesueseaeesaees 9 34 9 9 1 COMMA ATION Methodes a a ae a ae 9 34 LIZ OMNI AUO MN IENS p a Meee A E a E R 9 34 LOUN ONS proe dala cas ioe ctdoabaadaatesiguedivedieeeueeuasdheeieandacks 9 35 9 6 oA IM POM GG AA eia aa a a a a aa a 9 35 90 2 Cations asaan aaa Janel cath A A a a aa 9 36 APPENDIX ooreen App 1 to App 15 Appendix 1 Listor SMONGUL KEYS rinami a ined a a elute arene ie App 1 Appendix 2 Q amp A of GT Designer2 Operation aes 2ene cee Secusvnisoxdedes vexneenneuatayngasstaanwennacsseal Geeswuedeuenuaetelins App 3 Appendix 3 Usmo EE XIS ING DA als sesesteteae ties acute iausea tetra e naeanamean eens ouetyanenaesend yaussnct a aden App 6 App
220. hite and letter background is filled in black to make clearly visible Fill Black at Text BG reversed when printing based on the printer file setting based on the printer file setting 4 43 4 10 Viewing Created Screen Image 4 10 1 Previewing the Base Screen OIOJOIO JO IO O O O O O O O i Checked Display Word Comment and Word parts Display of the set Preview No Use Preview No x z Not checked m Display Word Comment and word parts Display according to the settings of each state Z Li Every time the menu is selected the preview screen display is switched to ON OFF status 5 The display is the same as the ON OFF display on the drawing screen When ON is selected e Object with bit device set The shape or text set to ON is displayed ON Image l ae O 5 e Object with word device set The status set to state 1 is displayed When OFF is selected e Object with bit device set The shape or text set to OFF is displayed e Object with word device set The status set to state 0 normal case is displayed 7 6 nO Next State Screen display status set with the State in the object is switched in the ascending order O x Previous State Screen display status set with the State in the object is switched in the d
221. ht click the mouse and select New Category i ojx Category New Category Color Batch Edit Device Batch Edit Switch Lamp Shape Batch Edit 3 Project The Edit Category dialog box appears Enter the category name enter Goto Screen Switch here Click the button The dialog box is closed Edit Category x Category Ento Screen Switch Cancel D The user category is added BI x E Category C Switch C Lamp Others f Goto Screen Switch 2 Project Select the Goto Screen switch under the switch category and drag it to the Goto Screen Switch category i BY x E 5 Category C Switch Bit Switch B 2 32 32 Goto Screen Switch es i 2 Project j 9 7 9 1 Edit Function 9 1 2 Batch setting and managing objects figures for each purpose Category workspace The Goto Screen switch is stored in the Goto Screen Switch category 09 Z O m ojal O E E Category EJ Switch L Bit Switch B 2 32 32 7 Bit Switch B 1 32 32 Ta H Lamp A H Others 9 Siem EGoto Screen Switch EE Goto Screen Switch B 1 32 27 4 gt a Project x Q Z U a i i ft Q Hint Category registration of objects and figures Create a user category first The created user ca
222. i A m A E Rectangle Yo N E ze TEN EA 6 Text O Bl x Rectangle z Screen Text 5N Library Image List Parts Image List oe D x Screen Number Subject L D sT s Numeral Display a 5 Screen Name Data Display Screen i on a ZuE a paia 2 it Screen Type Base Screen Bit Lamp Ww Security p pm peA AA a Detailed Explanation ort Numerical Display a O Use Screen Color No Multi Action Switch E Multi Action Switch Pattern _ 1 Multi Action Switch Fg Color Muli pani Switch Bg Color Transparent Color gt gt n Status bar O LL ASPGOTAGT SoftG0T2 640x480 256 Colors MELSEC On4 0 MELON C6 FF 0 0 M16y186 NUM Z T LO a 9 Workspace Property sheet Library Image List Parts Image List 9 GE Z Q O W Display non display Click the options in the menu below to display non display various tools ma View Common m 3 z Z E Preview Ctri l System Environment Z0 OH Image r A Report ao Show Terminal Display TE Hard Copy qo Toolbars Toolbars Operation Panel w status Bar Status bar Bar Code a workspace Workspace z v oaral Property sheet Status Observation z Library Library Image List Time Action X 5 i O Zoom a Alarm History Z Floating Alarm Z u Window Preview i mF 9 Yr A Ww Redisplay F5 aE Recipe e Display Touch Area al Script View tems Ethernet gt Grid Gateway b gt Guidelines i TAT GOT S00 Compatible mode O Comment p Too
223. ication settings KA a Memory Information Communication Configuration be Chapter 5 DATA TRANSFER OPERATION Window x nn i i sae F LL Window The Window menu contains functions of tiling multiple screens G Cascade Z fie Vertical l I T 2 eens KL gt Clause 4 8 Operating Multiple Screens wre Arrange Icons lt a v 18 1 Main menu AG 2 B 2 Lain_A 3 W 1 PLC 1 0 monitor Help 5 Help The Help menu contains functions of viewing the PDF manual related z Operating Manual i v E Reference Manual to the GT Designer2 and checking the software version a Index i A Z About GTD2 L gt Clause 3 6 How to View the Product Information EO Connect to MELFANS web Zu or A Ww The commands in this chapter is shown for the case of the largest display of the GOT A900 series For the GOT F900 series there are some differences for each model and some models do not display all commands gt ad L ad cn zZ a QO LW Q Z lt z ad QO 3 2 Menu Configuration 3 10 3 3 Toolbars 3 3 1 Types of toolbars The following types of toolbars are available When desired toolbars are checked for display non display the toolbars can be displayed non displayed accordingly View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Commun Preview Ctrl on ome e ON Image Eg EI 3 Show Terminal Display fa sl Mt Toolbars W Main Displays the Main toolbar ow Status Bar View Displays the View toolbar Workspace Ale w
224. igure select an option from the displayed dialog box Image List Library 134 Circle oj x Bit Lamp Category Lamp Object State DEE Circle circle_1 Shape Frame Color Lamp Color ink i Test Position Center Precautions 1 Different types of objects figures cannot be checked set at a time Ex Touch switch and lamp Bit lamp and word lamp Circle and rectangle Different types of grouped objects figures cannot be checked set at a time 2 Objects figures distributed on multiple screens cannot be checked set W Q Hin t Batch editing objects figures scattered on multiple screens Use of batch edit allows change of attributes color device etc in batch that are different in types or scattered on multiple screens Section 9 1 3 Batch editing attributes of objects figures scattered on multiple screens Batch edit 3 The property sheet makes the settings of all selected objects and figures same Note that if different devices has been set for each object using the property sheet will change the settings of all selected objects to the same device 4 The figure frame of the object cannot be set with Yes No on the property sheet Set Yes No of the figure frame by using the dialog box of each object 9 1 Edit Function 9 4 9 1 1 Batch setting of multiple objects figures on the same screen Property sheet o Z O H O Z 5 LL l gt LL m aa 5 APPEN
225. implified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions 3 4 5 Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions 3 4 5 Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions 3 4 5 Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean German versions 3 4 5 Refer to Applicable operating system and performance required for personal computer on the next page For installation 1 1GB or more For execution 100MB or more CD ROM drive High Color 16 bits or more Resolution 800 x 600 dots or more 2 1 System Configuration in Creating Monitor Screen 2 1 1 System configuration Item Description Internet Explorer 5 0 or later must be installed Others The mouse keyboard printer and CD ROM drive must be compatible with the above OS 4 Administrator authority is required for installing GT Designer2 2 Administrator authority is required for installing and using GT Designer2 3 Administrator authority is required for installing GT Designer2 A standard user or Administrator account is required for using GT Designer2 For interactions between GT Designer2 and the other MELSOFT applications use GT Designer2 under Adminis trator authority when the other applications are used under Administr
226. in memory information has the memory information of the GOT the data size used for each data is displayed SP Motion Memory card Drive assigned to the PCMCIA slot is selected Data are written on the memory card 5 35 5 3 Transferring Data Using Memory Card 5 3 2 Transferring OS monitor data and special data Installation method on GOT Turn OFF the GOT OVERVIEW Remove the communication module board and option module mounted on GOT For GOT provided a communication unit remove the communication cable Mount the memory card to the GOT 4 Turn ON the memory card access switch CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Turn ON the power while pressing two locations below on the GOT screen SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 Message Monitor data is installed appears on the GOT The OS and the monitor data are installed a Q Hint Downloading monitor data and special data Rz The monitor data and the special data can be downloaded with the GOT utility screen amp OS copy Refer to the manual below for details of the GOT utility CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN lt gt GOT A900 Series Operating Manual Extended Option Functions Manual O1 Ma LL O Z ZO Q Su mO PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 5 3 Transferring Data Using Memory Card 5 36 5 3 2 Transferring OS monitor data and special data 5 4 Error Message for Data
227. indow Switching Jeo Switching Station No 4 Video RGB Display Position 9 Print Format A M Overlap Windowe2 Display Position is specified with the device jE Window bat None Switching Display Position Z Lu Lu x n Z E O TT a Z x Z x W X O Superimpose Window Switching Dey ag Lu LL 25 Setting of GOT A900 series aS ow Lu LA QO W systemenvironmee ixi System Environment TE E System Settings Deoa i Project Title D100 Dev a i Auxiliary Setting O System Information Overlap Window ne 5 Screen Switching oR tot A Password per 2 5 Key Window M Overlap Window2 EO La Got Setup g W f Language Dey oo Menu K H ai E A Uninitialize switching screen device g Serial Port o Cancel lt iad co Z op ie Q LW Z Setting of GOT F900 series lt Ss lt ad Q 4 12 Setting Screen Switching Device 4 52 Select the data format for the screen switching device value BIN The screen switching device value will be handled as a binary value BCD The screen switching device value will be handled as a BCD binary coded decimal value Data Type x The range of the screen screen No that can be switched changes depending on the set data format BIN 1 to 32767 BCD 1 to 9999 The base screen switching device is set Base Screen Refer to the manual below for the device setting method O lt GT D
228. ine FreeForm e Figure Line FreeForm menu e O Rectangle e Figure Rectangle menu e MM Rectangle Filled e Figure Rectangle Filled menu _ OoOo a Polygon e Figure Polygon menu e 4 Circle Figure Circle menu e Circle Filled e Figure Circle Filled menu f Arc e Figure Arc menu B OoOo Sector e Figure Sector form B e Figure Scale menu ww Scale Drawing figures 1 Line Drag from start point 1 to end point 2 and release the left button of the mouse gt Z Draw while pressing the key Draw while pressing the key 7 O start point Z O o UW LL VN Z cas Lines can be drawn at the angle of 45 A line can be drawn from the start point as degrees a center zZ 2 Rectangle 2 Drag from start point 1 to end point 2 and release the left button of the mouse o LZ eo Draw while pressing the key Draw while pressing the key 8 o ZO oa MO Pre ee ee sgtartpoint A TO On Zu ras A square can be drawn A rectangle can be drawn from the start X O point as a center 3 Circle Drag from start point 1 to end point 2 and release the left button of the mouse re m LL Draw while pressing the key Lee O S lt H
229. ing Pr Hen No Bet ay e co Be Pin roma agar ag Mean IS specified With the device Set data Base Screen Switching D100 i l Boeren Nne ree 5 m oO m 4 Clicking the button completes the setting DE of the screen switching device a gt a lt lt ad m O zZ ep Q LL Q Zz lt x z o Q 4 2 Creating a New Project 4 6 If the wizard is not being used o Perform either of the following operations Click D New e Select Project New menu The system environment dialog box appears Perform the system settings For items other than System settings refer to the manual below L gt GT Designer2 Version Reference Manual E System Environment OF x 4 System Environment Project Title gl Auxiliary Setting PLC Type MELSEC On4 0 MELDAS C6 ia System Information Screen Switching GOT Type AS GOT GT SoftGOT 640x480 iin Folder Password We Key Window Switching Station No Color Settings 256 v sto Video RGB LE Print Format 65536 colors are used to display the image data dard Font te othe E kdir Cancel Enp GOT type The GOT type to be used is set O The PLC type to be connected is set PLC type Refer to the manual below for details of the PC type L gt GT Designer2 VersionO Reference Manual System Project Folder Not available for creating the GOT900 series project soulngs Screen color displayed o
230. ing the horizontal to vertical ratio 5 Z u Drag while pressing the and keys 10 BE gt x lt lt or m O Z a a o 2 Changing font size The font size can be changed by the operation above in 1 8 However if the size of the high quality font is multiplied 1 3 5 or 7 times the high quality font setting becomes invalid When using the high quality font set the font size again to 2 4 6 or 8 times m T m Z lt z x Y A 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 30 8 2 8 Changing size of figures objects 8 31 Changing length of specified side Edit Vertex Select the desired figure or object Perform either of the following operations to change the handle to the Edit Vertex mode e Click t on the toolbars e Select the Edit Edit Vertex menu D Move the cursor to a handle of the figure Drag the handle to move the vertex Ex Vertex edit of Line free form Point 7 Adjust Direct Text Size Text size can be automatically adjusted to fit a character string by setting Adjust Direct Text Size Refer to the following manual for the target object and setting for Adjust Direct Text Size 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 2 8 Changing size of figures objects 8 2 9 Copying figures and objects consecutively Figures and objects can be copied at a time im ED Select the desire
231. ion 0 Block 0 Unit top 140 00 m Network fe iase iit finer NW No Station No 0 A The device comment dialog box appears A device can be set while checking the device comment After setting click the button Device Commen Machines Do Show Cancel SUpermpose System Information System Information2 Line 4 operation mode Line B operation mode Line C operation mode Line D operation mode Line E operation mode Line F operation mode Tank A Tank E Tank C In the device comment dialog box device number comments and device names can be used for search Ex 1 Search of device number After entering a desired device number click the button The corresponding device is displayed at the top of the list Device Commen_ Machines ok Device C Commen Machines OK D1 50 Show Cancel Cancel Base switching Line A Di Window 1 D151 Line B De Windowe 0152 Line C DS SUperimpose DISS Line D D100 System Informationl D154 Line E 9 23 9 2 Referring to Device Comment When Setting Devices 9 2 2 Check method of device comment Ex 2 Search of comment device name Enter a desired keyword and click the button The comment or the device name containing the entered keyword are displayed in the list E Device it Commen Machines OK Device amp Commen Machines OK Line amp Show Chnicel Line amp i o Z O H O Z 5 LL l gt
232. ity AddNew Add Remove Date Time Display Fonts Game Options Hardware Programs Controllers Control Panel ji F pe Ss yy eG 25 Use the settings in Control Panel to Internet Keyboard Modems Mouse Multimedia Network ODBC Data personalize your computer Options Sources 32bit Select an item to view its description oh ey S 9 at g amp Passwords Power Printers Regional Sounds System Telephony Management Settings E Double click System IE My Computer Click the Device Manager tab when displayed by type choose System devices and double click the Advanced Power Management Support icon The Advanced Power Management Support Properties dialog box will appear Sy perties System Properties 24 x baseal General Device Manager Hardware Profiles Performance View devices by type View devices by connection System devices LIB Advanced Power Management suppor m APM Battery Slot a gaseto Double click Advanced Power a career Management Support Second Edition 4 10 2222 A Registered to SANGYOU KIKI MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORP 50578 270 0188047 06272 p Intel 824438 Pentium Motherboard resources Compar Motherboard resources G k Tte Motherboard resources Sunes Motherboard resources Intel r Celeron tm Processor Numeric data processor m PCI bus Plug and Play BIOS OF ee 64 0MB RAM bd gt Propertie
233. ject El Base Screen 1 2 C Window Screen C Report Screen EJ Common Settings System Environment Report R Hard Cony 35 Project 3 Library Ex 2 Part registration A figure is registered as a part using the workspace Tl Display Overlay Screen E aj Project B Base Screen 1 2 C Window Screen C Report Screen H Common Settings Comment T Parts 53 Sound 1 Project Category 3 Library T Display Overlay Screen E al Project El Base Screen 1 2 CJ Window Screen C Report Screen H Common Settings AN Comment El T Parts SF cer ies 23 Sound Project Category 3 Library 3 1 Screen Configuration and Basic Operation 3 1 2 Operation of workspace Select the copy source screen and right click on the mouse to select the Copy menu Right click the mouse again to select the Paste menu When the screen property is set the screen is copied Select the figure for registration and drag it to the Parts folder in the workspace When the part number and name are set the figure is registered as a part SYSTEM OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION OO CREATING AND PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT Zz O lt 5 Q LL Z oe O zZ im i X O 9 N or LU Z O D Lu m oO LL DATA TRANSFER OPERATION EDITING SCREEN USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT Basic operations of Screen Image
234. k Monitor data transfer BS To transfer monitor data the project must be opened on the GT Designer2 Other data than the monitor data can be transferred when the project is not opened on the GT Designer2 5 13 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable Caution 1 RS 232 cable Make sure that the RS 232 cable connector is securely connected to the GOT and the PC a 2 Precaution for uploading gt When the upload destination is specified as a project file GTD of the GT Designer2 all data in the specified project file are deleted Even for a partial uploading comment data etc all data in the file are also deleted z 3 Monitor data uploaded from GOT If monitor data downloaded to the GOT is uploaded again from the GOT all tabs of the object iE setting dialog box are displayed 26 4 Data transfer timing While the message Communicating with CPU is displayed on the GOT when the GOT power is Z turned ON communication from the PC is not accepted E a Transfer the data after the message has gone EE 82 5 Detailed explanation and category set on project or screen H Detailed explanation and category set on the project or the screen are not downloaded to the GOT BO Therefore they are not saved if they are uploaded again from the GOT after downloading 6 Data in GOT z When the same data as the data to be downloaded is present in the GOT it is overwritten in z i O downloading z 2 EZ 7 Power saving func
235. kGround J Pattern LJ M Elink No k Category Lamp Extended Function Extended Security Offset a 4 31 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 4 7 4 Object function setting 3 Set the text color text size etc The settings of ON Display and OFF Display can be made in the Text tab and both settings are required Click the button to set the ON status display and the button to set the OFF status display i Register a text for each display position Center Top Bottom Left Right 2 The display position button turns red purple magenta when the corresponding text is entered Basio Tent gt GT Designer2 VersionO q Reference Manual for details o D ettings ext On i W on OFF Copy OFF gt 0N All Setting Text Only sf obiegs Tr Tet M Style Regular Solid M on 8 s fha fi PX fi Rew Section 4 7 5 Basic operations Use High Goality Font of dialog box Edit Text Center Top Battom Let Right P i Se So Ta ef Offset to Frame jo Dat A Extended Function Cancel 4 Then click the button Z Ot Z Y LO On Z0 EZ niz ro Ow a LL oe D Q Hint Making the ON Display and OFF Display the same rae Z z lt To set the ON display the same as the OFF display after setting the character tab lt Co ON or OFF click the or button at or ae button button Copy characters Character formats character sizes a
236. l W a Lat My Favorites z mw Ea Lamp lt x O E Fae as Library image view On Oke ipn a i The library can be operated while o j pecial Farts x d displaying image of registered objects me or figures G Library editor Cees A Double click the registered objects x or figures to edit them with the u dedicated editor Z6 tO A Template Name lt Ww AG Please select figures or objects AQS5GOT GT SoftS0T2 800x600 256 Colors MELSEC Qn4 Q MELDAS C6 fi 0 0 358 762 NUM oa O Lu O nS Dz 25 EO Z u Y O L i gt X lt Oo a l Z N DRAW AND EDIT 7 1 What is Library 7 1 7 1 1 What you need to know before using library Library type _ Function CAMELSEC GTD2 Userl 5 3 Library aj fa User Library Al a My Favorites il 2 3D Switch a Ha 3 Lamp S fai i T Measuing Switch l Ha 1 Numerical Display bG e Start Switch EA 1 Start Switch A i ad 2 Start Switch E Ga M E HEJ Switch H E Figure H E Key H E Special Farts 37 Project Z Categom 3 Librar Template Figures and objects registered to the library are registered as templates Templates are registered under any of libraries 2 Library which can be created by a user Objects or figures created by a user can be registered a My Favorite 5 La My Favorites eh 1 5mitch ija 23D Switch E A 1 Measuring Switch a User library a 1 Numerical Display EI A 2 Sta
237. l for cases below The Text List is useful to check and search direct text settings used for the project screen created 9 19 9 1 Edit Function 9 1 6 Checking Text in use Text String List Operation method Select the Tools Character String List oe Z O H O Z D LL l gt LL Lu a D The Character String List is displayed Check the devices used Text List Iof x Collection Target roject fi OF AllScreen Update far Figure Object J ump Find Text dan Text Find x lt Click on the Update button if project data is changed while Text List being displayed Lu QA A lt x lt UI Q Item Description The display target is selected from Project Base Screen Window Screen Report Screen Collection Target Parts and User Library For Base Screen Window Screen and Parts the screen NO to be searched is specified from 1 to 32767 Screen NO 7 For Report Screen the screen NO to be searched is specified from 1 to 8 For User Library the screen NO to be searched is specified from 1 to 250 All Screens check box All screens of the Screen Type that are selected in the collection target are the objects Update button The list information is updated J bit The specified setting screen is opened and the object is pointed with a cursor ump button j Jump button is enabled when a line is selected in the list Find target 2 The tar
238. l old monitor data Check 05 version of GOT Project ID ER Memory meter MUsed M Empty Available size kbute Transfer size ETE bute Select all Deselect Download Biterence Close 4 Click the button to start downloading 5 27 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable 5 2 6 Downloading monitor data 5 2 7 Downloading special data Downloading method of the special data is shown below Click the Communication To FromGOT OVERVIEW The setting dialog box appears Click the Special data tab and refer to the following descriptions for setting After setting click the button to start downloading Communicate with GOT OS Instal gt GOT ROM_BIOS Install GOT Communication configuration Download GOT Upload Computer Memory information Special data CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 7 Special Module monitor data eC Motion montor data ow Servo amplifier Monitor 297 600 Servo A985 Monitor ALL O 13 Sero A585jlarms ALL 2 CI 615 Servo A395 Alarms Hist ALL 2 Q E17 SerofAS585 0 Display 5 A 615 SerofA585 0 Display 5 CF 2 613 Servo 4395 1 0 Display H A IFU L 0 620 SerofA585 0 Display M A 001 2 CJ 624 Sero 385 Function Dew 5 CF J 625 Servo A395 Function Dey M4 FU J 626 Servo A385 Function Dev M 4 DAU SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 T Delete all old Special Module Motion Servo amplifier data Peel 109 Memon meter MiUsed M E
239. lay for each icon E Only checked items 2 is also allowed E are set T m Frame Format Shape Category i S O Extended Caretta Q I Trigger YT Data Operation W passene i Workspace or property Cancel _ Please select figures or objects ASrGOT aT socotea s M sheet can be moved lt x z x wa m 1 2 Feature 1 5 1 2 2 Useful functions Quick selection of desired screen for editing lt Section 4 6 1 Opening screen Double click the screen in the project workspace to display the desired screen for editing gt h KS GT Designer2 Untitled1 Project Edit View Screen Common Fi igure Object Tools Communication Window Help D saat ees mo me tA 4 r om4scera w A A mad Dll Ifs z foz fie z amp ON orr be 1D 4 el D lta les sy amp Q 3 at BE Bf BS EH EB SE OL Oh V1 SB lb ea Tl Display Overlay Screen ox Tl Display Overlay Screen oj x Eo B 1 Main menu El ai Project B Base Screen 3 Line B Window Screen C Report Screen a Common Settings Report E Hard Copy Operation Panel MM Bar Pad Category 3 3 Project System Environment E 2 a 1 Main meru ine aime ID pies E Window Screen E Report Screen Common Settings System Environment Report EB Hard Copy a Operation Panel Library The screen can be displayed by double clicking the
240. licate Consecutive Copy Delete Guidelines Attribute Stacking Order z Ot LO On 20 EZ niz O O Centering ON A ni ad Lu D ZZ Move Mode a 6 Add To Category x Adjust Direct Text Size lt a ou Edit Touch Area Frame Region Ao we gt we r O Q Hint Edit Touch Area Frame Region f By selecting Edit Touch Area Frame Region the figure frame and object can be a gt moved separately Z3 Z u Z A Ww gt ma L ad cn zZ ep 2 Q Lu Q CZ lt z Z QO 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 4 30 4 7 4 Object function setting Setting the Lamp Bit Lamp object A series of operations for setting the Lamp Bit Lamp object is briefly explained here G Click amp Bit Lamp on the Object toolbar The mouse cursor changes to Por 23 ast 3 9 O ae e h CK ER SE L Ok PIG SN lh G Click the mouse on the desired position to place the object Then right click the mouse to exit from the placement mode Set the Lamp Bit Lamp object 1 Double click the placed Lamp Bit Lamp object The dialog box appears 2 Set the Device View Format etc in the Basic tab Bit Lamp Ed Basic Test ex GT Designer2 Version Oo z __ Reference Manual for details on of objects iplay Style oN J oF Section 4 7 5 Basic operations Shape Circle circle_1 thers e n of dialog box Frame d Lome Bac
241. lication to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
242. ls Batch Edit gt ik Parts Parts Image List Doe coe Sound Files Text List Q v Data View Data View m Q zZ Data Check z Data Size z o QO 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars 3 20 3 4 1 Customizing screen configuration Size change Click the buttons below to change the screen size The selected screen is minimized The selected screen is returned to the original size D The selected screen is maximized X The selected screen is closed Click Gj to pop up the workspace property sheet and data view Ex Moving or changing size of workspace Click X a GT Designer2 C WINDOWS Desktop production GTD Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Wind 2 The workspace pops up as a window a GT Designer2 C WINDOWS Desktop production A GTD Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Wind JOSUARLaec rae BBR JO SHOAR LS SelS Rem AWA Z yom Aos Awa e a Z xom Joer O AA wm I fs al sy 23 ac BEO A GE AE A A O a e sy Q 23 sc H amp S Be g FE AE AL A Gla e Se x POARTE Screen r s T Display Overlay Screen Workspace BE ee E424 Project Attribute I Display Overlay Screen HC Base Screen J Window Screen 0 Report Screen S pla sh 5 87 Project Screen Name Ei Base Screen Screen Type display scre
243. lt 5 On mia The last operation is repeated 2 DE 6 fl E Screen Preview Settings are displayed with the display image on the GOT ou Screen with the number before the current screen number is opened i D naj Next Screen Screen with the number next to the current screen number is opened 26 Ei a Unopened screen is opened with Previous Next Screen in the ascending descending ah E UnOpened Screens ro order ao Screen Device List List of devices used is displayed im Ely All figures and objects arranged on the screen are displayed in a list O K5 DE iN Comment to be displayed with the object function is registered 5 Z ra On k Figure And Object Objection of selection is switched to Figure and Object gt X L A oO Z T D Q Ww Q Z lt z or Q 3 3 Toolbars 3 12 3 3 1 Types of toolbars fe fox Ahe amp ON oFF De ID E amp I S Name Description E Snap Snap movement of the cursor is set Jro0 Zoom Screen display magnification rate shrinkage rate is set ee Zoom In Screen display can be zoomed in up to 400 in 10 increments eo Zoom Out Screen display can be zoomed out up to 50 in 10 increments 16 Grid Spacing Grid interval is set Ay Grid Color Grid color is set ON Image OFF Image Screen is switched to the display of device ON device OFF Dey ID Device Object ID Device Dev and object I
244. m Image Alarm List 02 04 18 13 25 40 RUN STOP Time message 13 25 RUN A STOP 13 05 Hight limit over 13 03 Motor trip oo Alarm occur Parts Parts Display Parts Movement Displays message at alarm occurence Page 8 1 Displays alarm history Page 8 31 Displays alarm in floating Page 8 67 Display entered device Page 9 1 Displays moving parts Page 9 28 Graph Meter Panel meter rN gt rN Displays device data on panel meter Page 10 1 i i Displays device data in proportional level Page 10 14 Level Trend Graph A gt PALS Displays device data in trend graph Page 10 28 Line Graph gt Displays device data in line graph Page 10 44 gt Displays device data in bar graph Page 10 59 Bar Graph Statistics Graph Pie Graph Bar Graph Displays device data in statistics graph Page 10 71 Scatter Graph Displays device data in scatter grap Page 10 81 Sampling Collect the device value and edit collected data on PC Page 10 102 6 Trigger action Image Status observation function J A D100 0 gt 150 to Write PE 000 Recipe functioin D100 150 D101 300 Image Hardcopy DD ii
245. m 6 Jis 5 Line DION 6 Alarm history ON 7 Line ABC Graph ON 8 Tank ON 9 Line A Status ON 10 Line B Status ON 11 Base 11 ON 12 Base 12 ON 13 Base 13 0N 14 Base 14 0N 15 Base 15 0N 16 Base 16 0N uu K _ Screen setting information Setting items in each screen are printed as shown below File Name C WINDOWS full monitor_data GTD Date 2003 07 03 Base Screent Base Screen Details Screen Name Main menu Size 640X480 Detailed Explanation Key Window Setting Key Window _ Same as the project setting Object List Coordinates Object ID_ Goto Screen Switch 32 128 10000 176 128 10001 320 128 10002 464 128 10003 528 432 10004 Time Display Screen image Each screen image is printed as shown below File Name C WINDOWS full monitor_data GTD Date 2003 07 03 Base1 Main menu Screen size 640X480 Hain Menu Hain Menu The number of screens displayed on the screen image view is fixed to 16 screens 4 x 4 per page 6 2 Printing example 6 9 6 2 1 Printer output SYSTEM SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 CREATING AND DATA TRANSFER OPERATION OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION EDITING SCREEN ep O LI pe O X A Z H Z A A A LU LL USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 6 10 Common Setting Details of common setting are printed
246. m Aligned with the selected lowermost figure or object Align Across Selected figures and objects are evenly aligned in the horizontal direction Q L Align Down Selected figures and objects are evenly aligned in the vertical direction lt x z DA O 3 3 Toolbars 3 16 3 3 1 Types of toolbars Name Description Line Style Line style is set or changed Line Width Line width is set or changed Line Color Line color is set or changed Fill Pattern Fill pattern is set or changed Pattern Fg Color Fill color is set or changed Pattern Bg Color Fill background color is set or changed Text Color Text color is set or changed Text Style Text style is set or changed Text Solid Color Text solid color is set or changed Communication a Ass ae A E Name Description To From GOT Data is transferred to GOT To memory Card Data is transferred to memory Card Communication Configuration Communication setting is made 9 Report HA i2 a Ta E B 3 17 B rc Name Description Report Line Report line Rectangle is drawn Report Text Report text is input Numerical Print Numerical value for report printing is set Bit Comment Print Comment Bit for report printing is set Word Comment Print Comment Word for report printing is set Report Repeat Header Header line is set Report Repeat Line Repeat line is set Selection Report Line
247. memory card as these operations may cause the following problems e The data cannot be transferred to the GOT e The GOT cannot monitor correctly When editing the project data within a memory card copy the data from the memory card to a PC and then edit them OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Remark 1 Using existing GOT data e GOT800 series The data are converted to the monitor screen data for the GOT A900 series with the GT converter e A GOT and 64GOT The data are converted to the monitor data for the GOT A800 series and then converted to the monitor screen data for the GOT A900 series with the GT converter Refer to the following for conversion to the monitor screen data for the GOT A900 series L gt GT Converter Version Operating Manual 2 Using existing DU data access unit data SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 4 e DU series Select the DU WIN file and open the project data of The DU WIN file is the project data prepared with the FX PCS DU WIN drawing S9 software S Up to Ver 1 01B a temporary file is created in the some folder of DU WIN file in Aa reading Accordingly a write enabled memory device such as folppy disk and hard disk should be set to the write enabled status ma The read screen data is compatible because the menu name and data handling of 5 the software DU WIN are same SE H e The base screen No starts from No 0 i e The system information consists
248. menu H E Report Screen Main menu _ 8 Main menu H E Window Screen H a Report Screen Before copy After copy The screen is copied 7 Property name attribute etc of the copied screen is checked or edited L gt Section 4 5 Creating a New Screen 4 11 Copying Deleting Screen 4 11 1 Copying screen data 4 11 2 Deleting screen data O Select the desired screen for deletion in the workspace project tab and right click the mouse to select z the Delete menu lt gt O o x E T Display Overlay Screen T Display Overlay Screen EHAA Project Fl Base Screen S A 1 Main menu aa BS 3 LENE T dca wnal ME o oe Eg wind E Open wi oe Report E Repor lose 7 Z H Commo H E Comm Close All MOO 2 vn an Commen 2 a Comm Cut fT Parts ae iy Parts Copp isi Sound Files a Soun z 3g Previous Screen 6 u Mest Screen a s UnOlpened Screens m D MMMM Ok D O Rename Open Image View Property A St Project Confirm Screen Delete x F ltem B Line_ amp Z Lu Lu x n Z E O TT m Z lt lt u X O Do you want to delete Ho Cancel D The selected screen is deleted Tes to All DATA TRANSFER OPERATION z x T Display Overlay Screen E4 Project Fl Base Screen 1 Main men E SE un CJ Window Screen E Report Screen H E Common Settings been ay Comm
249. mple H E Basic Figure H E 50 HEA Mialan Ex Project Category 34 Library Point the folder on the Explorer UserLib File Edit View Favorites Tools Help lo x SS RIG oce EA Search Loy Folders Address E CAMELSECGTOZUserLib p s OOO My 00i Switch lb O02 Start Favorites Ibe E switch Ibe 3 objectis 6 99 KB E My Computer a Do not operate adding deleting or renaming or others the User Lib folder or files in 7 3 Creating Original Library 7 15 7 3 6 Saving library OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT as gt X x ad co Z T 5 DRAW AND EDIT Creating a new library irrespective of the one already created Create a new library folder separately from the one already created according to the following procedure D Select Library and right click on it and then click the New User Library Folder menu Subject C AMELSEC GTD2 Userl x 5 3 Library a a N P ew User Library N ar Aste New User Library Folder Load User Library Folder Store to User Library Folder Import User Library L gt D gt L E E 7P Open Image View Iso Z 1 98 Nialna 3 Library u Project Category C H A S The dialog box appears asking whether t
250. mpty Available size kbyte Transfer size 33064 byte Data path D MELSEC GTD2 GMDP Download CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN 5 or L LL 25 Communicate with GOT dialog box Special data tab a gt eee U a S The special data are displayed in a tree Check the desired item for downloading Special data tree x Right click the mouse to Select All or Unselect H Delete all old Special module After deleting the special data already downloaded to the GOT this is checked to download this x T Motion Servo amplifier data special data Q A a Project ID Project ID is displayed K x 2 EO When the built in memory information has the memory information of the GOT the available size g r Available size o x CL for the user is displayed When the built in memory information has the memory information of the GOT the available size Memory meter o x for the user is displayed as a meter gt Transfer size Size of the monitor data selected in the project configuration tree is displayed Eel x x or Dat i Path drive folder that stores the project of the special data to be downloaded is specified z n ata pa j Up to 5 historical data specified in the past are retained 2 T The special data is downloaded K x Q Ww Q Z lt x z or Q 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable 5 28 5 2 7 Downloading special data 5 3 Transferring Data Using Memory Card Data transfer method with the
251. mputer connection Allen Bradley PLC connection SHARP PLC connection TOSHIBA PLC connection SIEMENS PLC connection HITACHI PLC connection MATSUSHITA Electric Works PLC connection QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 OMRON SYSMAC YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS Series Microcomputer connection AB SLC500 AB1 N connection AB Micrologix SHARP JW TOSHIBA PROSEC T V SIEMENS S7 300 400 HITACHI HIDIC H HITACHI H Protocol 2 MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP Refer to the manual below for details of the connection type _ gt GOT A900 Series Users Manual Connection System Manual 5 1 Type and Size of Transfer Data to GOT 5 1 1 Data type to be installed on GOT OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN O1 md LU D Z Z0 md Eg Su QAO PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT Extended function OS It is the program to use the following functions on the GOT e Ladder monitor function e System monitor function e Special function module function e Network monitor function List editor function e Gateway function e Motion monitor function e Servo amplifier monitor function CNC monitor function e KANA KANJI function e Recipe function e Sound function e Bar code function e Report function e Operation panel function e Hard copy function e Printer output e Creating CSV format file with alarm history function or and recipe function This f
252. n e a a DE all a a a a a LL Since the touch switches are classified for each application the desired touch switch for setting can be z i simply selected The lamp display function and the part display function are classified into the bit device 9 2 and the word device In this way the number of setting items is reduced lt ra gt a Object Tools Communication Window Help EE 61 Scr Lamp MB Data Set Switch A ma 124 Numerical Display se TE ASC Ascii Display A TETEE NS BE Data List Change StSUIEl No Switch Z 6 eee E Key Code Switch a AF Numerical Input A Multi Action Switch Be Lu Ta QAO Customizing screen gt gt Section 3 4 1 Customizing screen configuration The screen can be customized for the workspace movement of property sheet or toolbars display non O display You may create figures in the preferred environment m i O The dialog box for setting objects may also be customized w Or Z gt GT Designer2 l l l Fo FEIGT Designer2 CAWINDOWS Desktop production A GTD Dialog box for object setting Z u gt Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help 5 Ma gt PC een wl OL Sr OmBAC roOARa fs Afro he A amp on forr fov o 2 D ala a ox Z B 1 Data display screen BEE Type Bonate z EFA Hi an sv Q Q es e 3 E O R l T A E Se SL B OJAS a DAA aoiz SSE SS Data Size 16bit C 32bit eae ee gt View Format gt Format x Digits ag Size n Display non disp
253. n the GOT is set Color settings Select the color according to the GOT display color Use 65536 colors for Not available for creating the GOT900 series project image data display 16 dot Standard Font Not available for creating the GOT900 series project Point f Change of GOT type Refer to the manual below for cautions when changing GOT type L gt GT Designer2 VersionL Reference Manual D After system settings click the button to go to operation of New Screen L gt Section 4 5 Creating a New Screen 4 7 4 2 Creating a New Project Setting the screen switching device 1 What is screen switching device 7 ae A A screen switching device is a word device used to switch the screen on the GOT The GOT switches to the screen of the numeric value stored in the screen switching device i Use the screen switching device for screen switching only 2 When the value of the screen switching device is 1 When the value of the screen switching device turns the GOT displays Base Screen 1 from 1 to 2 the GOT displays Base Screen 2 O D100 7 mD o se Me 26 D O zZ gt 2 Base Screen1 Base Screen2 Base Screeni Base Screen2 2 ae 69 C Q The screen on the left is displayed when GT mig BO Designer2 starts Click the button to create a new project A Gi Ow Z Y
254. nctions may be deleted due to the GOT type incompatibility 2 Ifthe PLC type set for the source project differs from that for the destination project the PLC type of the imported data is changed to the one set for the destination project GT Desginer2 may delete some devices as the device type is incompatible or they are out of the applicable setting range Make the device settings as necessary 9 6 Utilizing other project data 9 36 9 6 2 Cautions _ a Hint Hold the incompatible devices 2 The incompatible devices i e devices to be deleted after the data import described in 2 above can be held by executing the following Change the PLC type set for the source project to the one for the destination project Check for the objects converted to in the device list The incompatible devices are converted to Make the settings of the devices for the objects converted to So Save the modified source project Then open the destination project and execute the series of operations for Import project i e utilizing other project data Incompatible data 1 The GT Designer2 cannot import the data of functions if the functions are unsupported by the GOT type of the destination project 2 Ifthe monitor data is imported using the GT Designer2 version that is older than the one used to create the source project some functions or settings may be deleted To import the relevant data
255. nd lt 3 GT Designer2 Version Reference Manual New Screen Base Screen Window Screen menu Screen Humber E Base Screen fo 3 Screen Hame Screen Type Security Level Detailed Explanation GOT F900 series aston TT Screen number is selected Screen name is input Set the text within 32 characters If a line feed is used it is considered as 2 characters Screen type is selected Base screen Window screen Window screen is created Security level 1 to 15 of each screen is set Base screen is created O When the security function is not used set to 0 Refer to the manual below for details of the security function lt gt GT Designer2 Version Reference Manual 4 5 Creating a New Screen 1 Explanation of the new screen to be created is input as required Detailed Explanation l O 512 characters can be input Color of the overall screen is set Use screen color o Sa x gt Pattern type is displayed with filled color on the background k gt O Pattern type Filled color A Ex Background E Pattern ES Z Background Foreground _ x O Background lt 5 Background Color of the overall screen is set O 2 He Z Size is displayed only for creation of the window screen S O Screen Size 1 x nO Size of the window screen is set Refer to the following for details of 1 a 1 Screen size 3 amp l l m Set the foll
256. nd ul display positions oO button Copy only text Z u a i gt ma lt lt a co O Z 5 E nm Q Zz lt x z o Q 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 4 32 4 7 4 Object function setting _ a Hin tl Placing the Lamp or Switch objects with figures from the library Lamps or switches with figures can also be placed from the system library by drag and drop Click the Library tab in the workspace The workspace display changes to the Library workspace Bi xi EE Category C Switch ep Lamp C Others a Project Double click the Lamp Circle 256 1 or Switch Circle 256 1 folder in the Lamp folder The System Library window appears Library Image List Function Lamp Circle2 x M Bue afo OF 7 i 2B Y Gs amp i ve D Click the target lamp or switch object in the System Library window and drag and drop it on the desired position Library Image List Function Lamp Circle2 M Bue 4 33 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 4 7 4 Object function setting Setting the Touch Switch Bit Switch object A series of operations for setting the Touch Switch Bit Switch object is briefly explained here LL Click 7 on the Object toolbar and click Ml Bit Switch from among the submenu items gt The mouse cursor changes to gt Z O H E SO Click the mouse on th
257. ng SCIEON cccceecccseccesececsececsececeuceceuseseueeeceeceueeseueeesseeensesensuectensensatecsaess 3 33 JS ROW OUSE MEID anA aera raneseeenaiasneaeaeleae 3 34 3 6 How to View the Product Information cccccccceccceccceeeeaeeeaeeseeeseeeseueeeeeeseeeseess 3 36 4 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN 4 1to4 58 4 1 Selecting Project at the Start of GT Designer2 occ cecccceccceeeceeeseeeeeeeeaeeeseees 4 1 42 Creating a NEw ProjeCk ccna erst cua atte tte r E R eaee ea eects 4 3 4 3 OPeEning CIOSING Proje C rsen a ORARE E 4 9 4 3 POpenmng projec esera a antec a a N vAhoudey a eameeted emer 4 9 A2 CIOSING DIOJ eC l asnrep eaae a ues aaa Ea EERE a Aar ETE eee 4 11 4 4 Setting the Project Title 0 0 ccc cccccececeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeesseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeess 4 12 4 5 Creanga NCW SChCC Ms seeaiarntacaiie teehee a youd seta sadviesee eet dented 4 13 4 6 Opening GIOSING SCheCN wotave oie dnarseuiveracaviortenidosntiataverseewawiusmverecsazebserudosascote ona 4 17 4 Oe be OPENNO SCCO hosie vader rane eee Er a eee re eee eee ee 4 17 KO Z CGIOSNO SCOE auna eg a A a a 4 21 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor cccceeccceceeececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeees 4 22 4 7 1 Object placement area and display area on GOT cece ceccc cece eeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeeeseeeseeeseeees 4 22 4 7 2 Basic operations for Object PIACEMENL cece ccc eee ceecee cece eeeeeeeseeeseeeseueeeeeseeeeseeese
258. ng multiple language o Z O H O Z 5 LL l gt LL Li aa 5 APPENDIX INDEX 9 4 1 Input method Procedures of inputting multiple languages are shown below Refer to manual help of Windows for detailed operation method of Windows setting for each Windows 1 For Windows XP Professional Windows XP Home Edition Choose the Start Control Panel menu and click Date Time Language and Regional Options S Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q a JO search gt Folders EN ress F Control Panel Vg Control Panel Pick rs category CA Appearance and Themes a GB Switch to Classic View See Also A Windows Update a A Help and Support ov Network and Internet Connections e Y Add or Remove Programs r 9 Sounds Speech and Audio Devices Accessibility Options m y Performance and Maintenance Click Regional and Language Options Date Time Language and Regional Options File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q sak 7 wy JO search Folders EN Address CG Date Time Language and Regional Options See Also A ip A Scheduled Tasks Date Time Language and Regional Options Pick a task Change the date and time Change the format of numbers dates and times Add other languages or pick a Control Panel icon s J Date and Time Regional and Lanquage Options lt gt 9 27 9 4 Inputting multiple
259. nglish United States v Keyboard layout IME United States D vorak a 9 4 Inputting multiple language 9 28 9 4 1 Input method Set the necessary language as Input language and click the button Add Input language ee Setting example see Input language Chinese PRC E Keyboard layout IME Chinese Simplified Microsoft Pinyin IME 3 0 Clicking the button will result in the following settings Text Services and Input Languages Settings Advanced Default input language Select one of the installed input languages to use when you start your computer Chinese PRC Chinese Simplified Microsoft Pinyin IME 3 0 i v Installed services Select the services that you want for each input language shown in the list Use the dd and Remove buttons to modify this list Chinese PRC Keyboard Chinese Simplified Microsoft Pi GN English United States Keyboard Add gt Preferences Lanquage Bar Key Settings Click the button to apply the settings and close the dialog box At this time the Windows XP CD ROM may be required depending on the added language 9 29 9 4 Inputting multiple language 9 4 1 Input method 2 For Windows 2000 professional Choose the Start Control Panel menu and double click Regional Options 210 x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back GQSearch Gy Folders Histon We GE X A Ese Address E Contr
260. nition instead of Group the layer O The scale and rotation angle are not supported e The figure is converted to be a line free form the end points are connected in a straight Line Free Form fine x ine C S E e The figure is converted to be a line free form or polygon the end points are connected in a Line Free Form or straight line x Polygon e The curved lines between the points are ignored e The MLINESTYLE is not supported Line Free Form Each line free form color and the line style are converted based on the layer definition x e Cap processing is not supported e The text size is converted to the nearest one 0 5 to 8 times of GT Desiger2 e The rotation setting is converted to the nearest one in 90 degree units Text For GOT F900 series always converted to O degree i e No rotation O e The form code is deleted e The text style is not supported Circle Rectangle Line e The figure is converted to a line free form or polygon the end points are connected in a Line Free Form or straight line x Polygon i e The curved lines between the points are ignored aE Line Free Form or e The figure is converted to be a line free form or polygon the fit lines are connected in a o Polygon straight line e The text size is converted to the nearest one 0 5 to 8 times of GT Desiger2 Text e The rotation setting is converted to the nearest one in 90 degree units ex For GOT F900 serie
261. od on GOT Turn OFF the GOT Q Remove the communication module board and option module mounted on GOT For GOT provided a communication unit remove the communication cable D Mount the memory card to the GOT 4 Turn ON the memory card access switch Turn ON the power while pressing two locations shown below on the GOT screen Message The system will be initialized appears on the GOT The ROM _BIOS is installed O After installation message Cycle power on unit appears on the GOT After resetting the ROM_BIOS is automatically started rewriting Never turn OFF the power of the GOT or press the reset switch during rewriting Set UP ROM BIOS Ver Step Status 3 Verify g AES BIRZUSEUCR SL Vey br Fy a FHSS RSL Don t turn off the power supply Don t push the reset button GOT screen during rewriting ROM_BIOS After rewriting message Cycle power on unit appears on the GOT After resetting transfer the OS or the monitor data 2 Remark _ Installing ROM_BIOS of old version a When the GOT is reset to install the old version ROM_BIOS the message below appears and the GOT stops The old version ROM_BIOS cannot be rewritten ROM BIOS setup Ver1 1 0 B AHS BREUM SEUSS Yeoh JV eFR EUS RSL Don t turn off the power supply Don t push the reset button ROM _ BIOS Not Rewriterble GOT stopped Please install operating system When the message appears t
262. of control devices QO For the details refer to the GOT F900 SERIES OPERATION MANUAL GT Designer2 5 m O ES 25 EO Zu fi gt ma L ma m Z E i Q zZ lt z o QO 4 3 Opening Closing Project 4 10 4 3 1 Opening project Click the Open button to open the specified project ah GT Designer2 C Documents and Settings Administrator Desktop 1228 GTD B 1 Main menu jo x Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help a la x O SOARS hR ne ig E N I ZYrOeEACelC OA a he z 100 JIE v amp ON orF Dev 1D 2 6 2 alk E we BS wt at BOB MMM 8S sn EELEE i BI x l Display Overlay Screen Base Screen 1 Main menu E 2 Line_A 3 Line_B C Window Screen C Report Screen Common Settings System Environment EP Report EA zi m E EMTT E e T TT 4 Project Categor 32 Library 4i E E Screen Attribute Screen Number Screen Name Main menu Screen Type Base Screen Security 0 Detailed Explanation Use Screen Color No Pattern Fo Color hall Point f DU WIN file cannot be converted to GOT data 4 E A Remark Opening project directly Double click the project data GTD The GT Designer2 starts with the project data open 4 3 2 Closing project Close the open project CD Select Project
263. of the mouse Draw while pressing the key 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 1 1 Drawing figures A scale with the same vertical and horizontal sizes can be drawn Draw while pressing the key a ae ee ee A scale can be drawn from the start point as a center D Double click a figure to determine the attribute Arc Sector x IY Sector or Style m Set Defaut aiyle et as Uefan TEE Ea gt width Clear Default 1 Dot Scale Points fio Set as Default Color M Direction f Horizontal Wertical Clear Default Center line None Center gt Patter E Li Style k O x Forel round ___I width 1 Dot Y ae D Back Ground O Color LU Fy Category Others Category Others a z OF Cancel Cancel Ex Setting of arc sector Ex Setting of scale 6 nak D X O This is checked to create a sector i a Checked Not checked avg nO Sector 1 x lt gt zZ Scale Points 2 Number of lines 2 to 255 on the scale is set kej x a ZY Direction of the scale is selected 5 T 26 ra Direction 2 x uy Horizontal HHH Vertical G Position of the center line that makes a right angle to the scale is selected Center line 2 x w Center HAH None i gt Z O Style Line style of the figure is selected Key O ZE ce Width Line width of the figure is selected fey x TE QO Color Line color of the figure is selected Ke
264. og box to confirm if the currently editing library data are saved or not appears Click the or button GT Designer2 x 2 Do you want to save the current library to C MELSEC GTD2 UserLib amp The Load User Library Folder dialog box appears Specify the folder one upper hierarchy of the user library folder to be loaded and click the button Load User Library Folder x Load User Library Folder Path C AWINDOWS Desktop Line A Browse Please specify the path of UserLib folder or GTD2 Ibd file Cancel 7 3 Creating Original Library 7 3 7 Loading library from file OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT as gt X x ad co Z T 5 DRAW AND EDIT 4 The display switches to the library contents My Favorites User created libraries of the library file in the specified folder _ axl Subject bi C AWINDOWS Desktop 5 3 Library C User Library My Favorites fig 1 Lamp 1 tig 2 Lamp 2 tig 3 Lamp 3 G av Crystal G Soft C Retro J Simple C Basic Figure CI 150 Dialog a Project Category 3 Library FE Lg Q Hint Loading multiple library files to create project Alternate loading of multiple library folders facilitates use of multiple library folders
265. ol Panel gt Go ay S mw i Accessibility Add Remove Add Remove Administrative CSNW Control Panel Options Hardware Programs Tools Use the settings in Control Panel to pa wy ST personalize your computer Date Time Display Folder Options Game Select an item to view its Controllers description Internet i Network and Options Dial up Co Phone and Power Options Regional Scanners and Modem Options Cameras ge g sf Scheduled Sounds and Users and Tasks Multimedia Passwords 24 object s g My Computer Z The Regional Options dialog box appears Set the language to be added in language settings for the system Example When using Simplified Chinese General Numbers Currency Time Date Input Locales m Settings for the current user Many programs support international settings for numbers currencies times and dates Set the locale in order to use the standard settings General Numbers Currency Time Date Input Locales m Settings for the current user Many programs support international settings for numbers currencies times and dates Set the locale in order to use the standard settings Your locale location Your locale location English United States ba m Language settings for the system Your system is configured to read and write documents in multiple Check the Simplified Chinese check box Set de
266. on tab Preferences Toolbars Icon Operation View M Figure Object deselect after create F System setting on new l Chanae nhiect after create Q4 The device comment cannot be selected in device settin Device lt Speciication Bity Ok Cancel Kind of Device Sa Range oo00 1FFF DG nn en Click here Bit position 0 Block U 5 Unit top 120 JU i Host Other Nw No 10 Station No E A4 To select the device comment the comment data of the GX Developer needs to be imported into the GT Desinger2 Before setting the device select Project Import Device Comment of GX Developer and select the project of the GX Developer to be imported Refer to the following for the device comment reference of the GX Developer Section 9 2 Referring to Device Comment When Setting Devices 3 GT Designer Untitled Project Edt View Screen Common Figure Object Thy New Ctrl i Open Ctrl O Close I Save Ctrl S Save As Import Panelkit of GT Designer Import Device Comment of Ges Developer call po App 4 Appendix 2 Q amp A of GT Designer2 Operation Q5 Object figure is not accurately arranged USEFUL FUNCTIONS A5 Right click the mouse on the object and select Edit Touch Area Frame Region and Centering The object is then accurately arranged When Centering is selected the object is automatically moved to the center of the figure
267. on the drawing screen Se It is easy to edit a figure at an screen end OD No frame With frame Ee ER Ak AL ok 2 da cl h Eb bh AL 6k 4 da e I i 26 Be as i O ES 25 EO an Handy ET and Keypad This function allows an image of the GOT body on the drawing screen When a switch or an LED on the body image is clicked device assignment for the operation switch LED or the function switch and switch function for the function switch can be set It is easy to edit a figure at an screen end S E i Q zZ lt z o QO 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars 3 32 3 4 4 Display with frame 3 4 5 Redisplaying drawing screen If paint is used unpainted areas may occur Redisplay provides correct display Ex Moving an object on paint Dara 4 Move an object on pain The figure shows unpainted areas Refresh the display with View Redisplay menu Select the View Redisplay menu D Display the drawing screen correctly 3 33 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars 3 4 5 Redisplaying drawing screen 3 5 How to use Help Help displays the GT Designer2 relevant PDF manuals and the software version z Lu gt SS O Point 7 Before viewing the PDF manual To view the PDF manual GT Manual and Adobe Reader must be installed i Operation method gt O EiT D Click the corresponding menu within Help 26 amp 9 ER GOT1000 GOT900 Item Description Series
268. or data and special data is shown below Write method to memory card o Click the Communication To Memory Card D The setting dialog box appears Refer to the following descriptions for setting After setting click the button to start writing to the memory card Communicate with Memory Card x Project Untitled h C Base Screen eT Window Screen _ Parts 7 _ Comment 7 Common Settings Standard monitor OS a Communication driver 4 0 Extended function DS S O Special Module monitor data SP A Motion path C MELSEC GTD2 GMDP E 05 install path C MELSECAGTD2 05 E GOT type AISoGOT AI GOT ASBOGOT Available size 3416231936 byte 05 0 byte Monitor Data bute SF 7 Motion O byte Memory card Ic write Communicate with Memory Card dialog box Memory card write tab The project configuration tree is displayed in a tree Check the desired item for downloading Project configuration tree Right click the mouse to Select All or Unselect SP Motion path Path drive folder that stores the data to be installed is specified OS install path Up to 5 historical data specified in the past are retained GOT type The type of GOT to which the data is transfered is selected When the built in memory information has the memory information of the GOT the available Available size size for the user is displayed Monitor data OS When the built
269. ormat for the data transfer between the ROM writer and the PC The project data is saved in the Intel hex format ITH F900GOT Binary Files Fl Only GOT F900 series The project data for the data transfer tool is saved in the FQ00GOT binary format F1 Save as type The project data cannot be saved in the other formats including GT Designer and DU WIN Point When an existing project is saved as a different project The library data GTD2 Idb with registration of user created objects and figures are not saved as a different project file The project saved as a different project refers to the same library data GTD2 Idb as the existing project If you want to separate a library from the existing project data save the existing project library as a different file gt Section 7 3 6 Saving library 4 57 4 14 Saving Project 4 14 2 Saving as project name 4 15 Ending GI Designer2 C Select Project Exit ad Lu E The GT Designer2 is ended a Remark Ending GT Designer2 from title bar z E3 O 7 Click I on the title bar to end the GT Designer2 aie oS D O Window Help SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 A Z Ot LO On Zo EZ niz ro Ow DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 4 15 Ending GT Designer2 4 58 5 DATA TRANSFER OPERATION 5 1 Type and Size of Transfer Data to GOT 5 1
270. ory Screen T ype Base Screen F Soui 0 Screen display area Detailed Explanation Screen Gi Ow Z Y LO One 9 ni O Ow Temporary area or Li ASP GOT GT SoftGOT 640 480 256 Colors MELSEC Qn4 0 MELDAS CE 0 245 430 NUM 7 LL Oz g0 Item Description E lt lt lt Ww Screen display area Area displayed on the GOT lt 0 Temporary area Not displayed on the GOT In this area however figures and objects can be placed during screen creation O m O nA oD Oe 25 O Z u Z A L gt X L A m Jj Z T D Q Ww Q Z lt x z or Q 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 4 22 4 7 1 Object placement area and display area on GOT Point P Figures or objects placed on the area boundary When placed on a boundary between the GOT display area and temporary area figures or objects will be handled as described below e Figures The all figures inside the GOT display area will be displayed GOT display area Not displayed Figure a a Displayed Temporary area e Paints When paint marks X shown below are placed in the temporary area the marked figures will not be painted F900 series does not provide a paint function GOT display area A Paint mark Temporary area e Objects The object is displayed if its entire object frame is inside the GOT display area 1 2 but not displayed if any part of its object frame is outsi
271. owing items to determine the window screen size 66 Change Window Screen Size x 6 N Range 4 k Z O Y Range 81 400 A i So i 176 ET 7 z X O Ow SRR Edit FE x Oz Fe X Horizontal window screen size is set fey O TO Eg Y Vertical window screen size is set O O im LA A handle for size change is displayed on the screen Move the cursor to the handle position and drag ag it to change the size Edit When the screen becomes the desired size click it to determine the window screen size O O This cannot be set when the screen is newly created m This can be selected for editing after creation of the screen A 25 EO Zu oY aire gt a lt x co za Z U gt Q im Q Z xt z O 4 5 Creating a New Screen 4 14 m Auxiliary setting tab Settings of the cursor key window or data input for the screen which is newly created and use non use of some object functions are specified Settings here can be changed after creation of the screen Refer to the manual below for details of the settings K gt GT Designer2 Versiong Reference Manual Basic usiliam Key window Key window Cursor display setting Achon when condition success Don t display cursor and key window Action when switching screens Don t display cursor and key window Acton when condition success setting takes priority when Display i se
272. p The color for the outer frame on the lamp remains Appendix 3 Using Existing Data Appendix 3 2 Precautions App 10 Appendix 4 Applicable Monitor Data This section provides the precautions for using monitor data Pay attention to the precautions outlined in this section when handling monitor data When opening uploading monitor data When opening or uploading monitor data make sure to use the same or newer version of GT Designer2 than the one used to create the monitor data When the older version is used the file may not be opened or the functions and settings may be deleted Refer to the following section for details L gt Appendix 4 1 Opening monitor data or Appendix 4 2 Uploading monitor data Open Se Pret When downloading copying monitor data to the GOT Make sure to install the same OS version as the copy download source monitor data If the OS version of GT Designer2 used to create the monitor data does not match the OS version installed in the GOT download the monitor data after installation of the OS Refer to the following section for details Upload Appendix 4 3 Downloading monitor data or gt Appendix 4 4 Copying monitor data from one GOT unit to other unit with a PC card Download Copy Memory card GOT GOT gt gt The following shows the points to be check by the subject when using monitor data This section provides the
273. play Overlay Screen a D PRET Project a a Base Screen A T 2 9 oT 2 Error cr New O E Window Sere fal Open g W EB Report Screer lase X AL Common Setti Close All Bo bee System Er oa Report of a i beats fa Hard Cnn Lopy 2 Project Categc gt Delete A screen can be newly T eee created copied or deleted n u Mest Screen 2 v UnOlpened Screens D a E 5 Rename Open Image View Property Q LI Q Z lt x z ad Q 1 2 Feature 1 3 1 2 1 Easy to use operations Easy to manage objects for each application c gt Section 9 1 2 Batch setting and managing objects figures for each purpose Category workspace The overall project settings are displayed on the tree by category type Classification for each application allows simple management of objects gx D gt E B Category I Switch C Lamp H E Others E E GA R4 Goto Screen Switch B 3 16 64 Goto Screen Switch B 3 80 64 Commom Alarm Lamp Se Bit Lamp B 3 16 128 Z Bit Lamp B 2 16 128 Ze Bit Lamp B 1 16 129 EQ Alarm Frame CD Rectangle B 1 16 192 CO Rectangle B 2 16 192 CD Rectangle B 3 16 192 Managed for each application Easy to select parts frequently used lt s Chapter 7 USING LIBRARY Objects or figures can be registered and pasted on the screen Objects or figures frequently used may be registered as buttons on the toolbar gt Pasting Pasting from toolb
274. ple figures and objects can be aligned in several patterns f i f i gt Aligning in one direction i 6 Select the desired figures and objects for alignment Perform the following operations according to the alignment z z UW Figures and objects are aligned with the leftmost E Align Left 7 Z e gt figure nO e Edit Align Left Figures and objects are aligned at the center in ign i center WHonzonai g j g HI Align Center Horizontal Z the horizontal direction Er Edit Align Center Horizontal a o m Right Figures and objects are aligned with the e 3S Align Right 6 D rightmost figure l ne e Edit Align Right wo BO T Figures and objects are aligned with the Align Top O P uppermost figure i e Edit Align Top Z Fi d object ligned at the center i Alion Center Vertical am igures and objects are aligned at the center in ign t ti Center Vertical i l i a h T the vertical direction OW e Edit Align Center Vertical 9 iE Figures and objects are aligned with the ign ra Satan g j g Align Bottom OW lowermost figure e Edit Align Bottom Selected figures are equally aligned in the e Align Across Across Bae it horizontal direction m Edit Align
275. port Screen aa Fi N E Operation Panel amp Alarm History s Set as Default RA Floating Alarm Common Settings Lalli Line A production condition AN Bar Code Pug Status Observation Clear Default of Hard Copy s E a I PE GS gt r gt ni eE 2 H Time Action Text Style Regular gt Direction Horizontal Vertical Text Color Alignment Left Genter Right Text EFRA EPR Text Solid Color Text Style Regular Sie Text Color Text Solid Color Internan Size 3x3 J High Guality Font Size x xl oa Category Others d Size Y 3 Direction Horizontal Alignment Left gt TEXT is Selected AS7 GOT GT SoftGOT 640x480 256 Colors MELSEC QnA Q MELDAS Ct Astare daea 5B GT Designer2 C Docum ae 5 12 PM 9 4 Inputting multiple language 9 32 9 4 1 Input method 9 4 2 Precautions Use of multiple language input system software Chinese Writer Korean Writer The Chinese Writer and the Korean Writer which were used on the GT Designer cannot be used on the GT Designer2 Chinese Writer and Korean Writer are trademark of Kodensha Precautions for printing When Output to file is executed at the time of printing only the language supported by the used OS Windows as standard can be output Import export of comments input in multiple languages When comments input in multiple languages are imported exported use the Unicode te
276. r off cannot be converted e Only the Shift JIS code text is compatible e The coordinate unit 1 is converted to 1 dot on GT Designer2 e 10 minutes or longer may be required in some cases e The figure bigger than 2048 x 1536 dot cannot be imported fee USING LIBRARY A LUI m Z lt x or A 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 14 8 1 5 Pasting figure data of BMP file c Details of DXF data import The following DXF data can be imported to GT Designer2 If some figures or attributes cannot be imported draw them or make the relevant settings on GT Designer2 Before rt Aft t efore impo er impor E alf GTD2 data DXF data ARC ATTDEF ATTRIB CIRCLE DIMENSION ELLIPSE INSERT LEADER LINE LWPOLYLINE MLINE MTEXT POINT POLYLINE SOLID SPLINE TEXT TRACE e The text size is converted to the nearest one 0 5 to 8 times of GT Desiger2 e The rotation setting is converted to the nearest one in 90 degree units Text For GOT F900 series always converted to O degree i e No rotation e The text style including slant angle is not supported e For GOT F900 series converted to a line o O e The color and line style are converted based on the DIMENSION block definition instead of ane the layer O e The slanted figure is converted so that its main axis will be rotated horizontally or vertically ko x e The color and line style are converted based on the DIMENSION block defi
277. ransfer the OS or the monitor data with the above screen status 5 33 5 3 Transferring Data Using Memory Card 5 3 1 Installing ROM_BIOS 9 3 2 Transferring OS monitor data and special data SEE Point 1 Data installed in the GOT gt When the OS is installed the monitor data and special data in the GOT are gt deleted If the data must be retained upload them in advance 6 2 During installation of OS E The OS installation it can be interrupted Reinstallation of the OS is required e Do not turn OFF the power of the GOT PC or unplug the communication cable EE Otherwise the GOT may become inoperable ais lt GOT recovery method gt Z If the GOT is inoperable due to the operation above install the system program a again with the procedure below 46 Turn OFF the GOT E nO Remove the communication module board and option module mounted on GOT For GOT provided a communication unit remove the communication cable of lt x 3 Turn ON the GOT while pressing two locations shown below on the GOT at Qu the same time q ein O1 Message Reinstall the ROM _BIOS OS appears on the GOT md LU O Z Z0 ad Eg Sw QAO Complete installation according to the GOT instruction PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 5 3 Transferring Data Using Memory Card 5 34 5 3 2 Transferring OS monitor data and special data Transfer method of the OS monit
278. rary 7 3D Swit z uy Library workspace Library image list D Z 85 BO Perform the operations below a 1 Editing in library workspace Right click the mouse to select the Edit menu a i Lu The template can be edited by double clicking Zx On 7 i Z 2 Deleting in library image list EZ Mim a x AQ Click the z Library Edit button OW The template can be edited by double clicking The library editor screen appears Edit the template a DBs Fy Library Editor 7 3D Switch Miel Ea lt 0 Fe lt lt H W Ao O Lu O K5 Dz Z 2 O Z u Z O L m E After editing the template close the screen Click the button on the upper right of the screen lf you want to cancel the edited reslt on the library editor screen cancel the edition operation before closing the library editor screen lt 3 Section 8 2 4 Undo and redo gt X x ad co Z T 5 DRAW AND EDIT 7 3 Creating Original Library 7 11 7 3 4 Editing registered objects and figures _ a Hint Undoing and redoing the action e Undo Reverses the last action just performed Click 2 Undo Choose the Edit Undo menu Redo Re executes the last action undone by clicking Undo Click f Redo Choose the Edit Redo menu NA Z 7 12 7 3 Creating Original Library 7 3 4 Editing registered objects and figures 7 3 5 C
279. rary folder Import User Library 7 4 7 1 What is Library Another library file with the currently edited library data My Favorites User Library is imported 7 1 2 Basic operation of library ereraa raoe ane wrn OO permanere o z Reson ncmateiwmbeibayatin LO z a parere LO egestas oreore O zz preme LO Perata manera LO Template image is displayed on the Library image list screen OI OJ OJOIO OIO OIO JOJIOJOJO Basic operation of library image list dialog box Select the View Library User Defined Libraries System Libraries menu The library image list appears if Library Image List x My Favorites z O 0o02 EE BAXE y a Template image Zz O Template name q SO LW L V Z A Part Pat 6 Part a z DE te g Library type selection menu The library type to be displayed is changed KJ O a gt 5z 69 tH Register Objects or figures selected on the drawing screen are registered on the library o O i LU EG BO New Screen Template is newly created O aa Edit Registered template is edited with the library editor O ain Ze O H Name Template name is displayed not displayed o O 2 Z az jE db Cut Selected template is cut O KO Copy Selected template is copied o O ma m GA Paste Template copied with the button is pasted Oo O 2z Eg Pai Delete Selected template is deleted O im at Property Property of a
280. re a QO mi GT Designer Untitle z Project Edit View Scree m ES oie Pie ill O l E x z2 ap Y Cela ad 23 T min LU 57 G GQ 3 Ast ie X u A L aa lt L iad co Z a Q LL a Z lt z x a A 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 34 8 2 10 Copying figures and objects 9 USEFUL FUNCTIONS 9 1 Edit Function This chapter describes useful edit functions of the GT Designerz2 9 1 1 Batch setting of multiple objects figures on the same screen Property sheet What is property sheet The property sheet displays all setting items and details of object figure screen currently selected in a list Since the property sheet allows setting of the selected object figure screen the setting details can be checked and set changed without opening the dialog box E GT Designer2 C YWINDOWS Desktop Production A GTD Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools JO sco AT dBase ws Nh IZ7 OEACer OM AA wi iit fe fix zje z amp on orr bev 0 Z BH amp alt Sy 23 e f i Oe a EK GE SE OL S A Ja SD la Communication Window Help Property sheet I Display Overlay Screen an E Common Settings SNUMe riches til System Environment j Report TE ar ay Hard Copy Operation Panel Riy Status Observation Time Action B Alarm History B4 Floating Alarm Ee Recipe Data display screen Screen Type Base
281. reated with nodia 5 GT Designer2 display is Projection situation screen1 Projection situation screen1 reversed by Projection situation screen1 T S JA gt I Ww mjm 2 Z lt z or Q 4 10 Viewing Created Screen Image 4 44 4 10 1 Previewing the Base Screen 2 A970GOT monochrome type Reverse the monochrome display with Batch Edit of GT Designer2 and then download the project data to GOT Screen created with GT Designer2 Projection situation screen1 Download Aj1254 B 348 mun Batch edit In Projection situation screen1 GT Designer2 Projection situation screen Aj1254 B 348 EN Remark 1 Items displayed on preview ltems displayed on the preview display non display of object object ID device name etc can be changed with the settings of the GI Designer2 KL gt Section 3 4 3 Customizing GT Designer2 operating environment 2 Display of object ID and device name Object ID and device name are displayed on the preview screen It is not displayed on the GOT Object ID Device name 4 45 4 10 Viewing Created Screen Image 4 10 1 Previewing the Base Screen 4 10 2 Previewing the Base Screen with window This section explains how to preview the image of the windowed screen that will be displayed on the GOT ED Choose View Win
282. reset It is convenient to arrange D Release the selective different figures objects lt O state of tools Not checked After setting figures objects the selected status remains active It is convenient to arrange Pr Ww the same figures objects continuously a Checked The system settings dialog box GOT type PC type etc appears in creation of a new project System setting on new Not checked The system settings dialog box GOT type PC type etc does not appear in creation of a O new project O aS Checked After arranging objects on the drawing screen the settings dialog box automatically appears aa Change object after F A S 5 i Not checked After arranging objects on the drawing screen the settings dialog box does not automatically o create appear i On Checked _ File is automatically saved Auto File Save Saving interval 5 to 720 is set Not checked File is not automatically saved gt Checked When the GT Designer2 is started the project selection dialog box New Open etc oc Show Select Project T appears T dialog when you start z Not checked When the GT Designer2 is started the project selection dialog box New Open etc does D GT Designer2 gt not appear T D Show Wizard on New Checked The wizard is displayed when a new project is created Project Not checked The wizard is not displayed when a new project is created Figure Object move on Checked A figure or obje
283. reviou screen button Advance to the next screen button Cancel the settings and quit the wizard 4 3 4 2 Creating a New Project ___ eee 5 The screen on the left Communication Settings m srie is Please select the equipment to be connected with GOT is display e d 2 ome Eto Besse Select the connection PLC Type Z 9 imi button Go back previous screen zn button Advance to the next screen button Cancel the settings and quit the z Jb wizard q ananas Prone The screen on the left Setting of Screen Switch DZ 5 reen e N Device is displayed Oe pat OE m Click the button and set the Base Screen es i eae exchange device displayed at the GOT i Also if necessary set the Overlap Window and oy ma Superimpose Window screen change device Ee ae Device Setting dialog box display example 5 is Device lt Specification 16bit Unsigned BIN gt A Z Ot Z Y LO On Zo Ee Z niz ro Ow button Go back to the previous screen X LU button Advance to the next screen D z zO button Cancel the settings and quit the vi ad wizard Su QO New Project Wizard xi Set confirmation of System Environment D The screen on the left Communication of System The wizard reflects it in the setting of the project by the following content E nvi r onm ent i S di spl ay e d GOT Type A985GOT GT SoftGOT 800x600 O cas AE Tes MEL SECANO MELDAS C
284. rt Switch td 1 Start Switch e 2 Start Switch B a wor Lamp My Favorite Objects or figures registered as My favorite are registered on the My Favorite toolbars When frequently used objects figures are registered on My Favorite toolbars it is convenient to use them User library It is a library to register user created figures objects When folders are classified for each type it is convenient to use them User created objects or figures are registered Displayed on My Favorite toolbars E a 1 Measuring Switch fig 1 Numerical Display system library The library not changed by a user provided by the GT Designer2 has been registered Retrieving a preset template and arrange it on the screen facilitates settings of lamps or switches Libraries templates in the system library cannot be registered deleted or changed for their attributes Sieg Library EI Da Library Been of My Favorites Ly Lamp Fl Switch Ea Figure H E Key aH Special Parts 4 System library Number of templates that can be registered The maximum number of user created libraries except for May Favorites is 250 For one library up to 200 templates can be registered 7 1 What is Library 7 1 1 What you need to know before using library Library file configuration Each User Library including My Favorite is stored as Ibe in the User Lib folder
285. rvation monitor 4 Line observation monitor E O Line observation monitor Ci 5 a Input an external character to be displayed which should be created in advance using the external S H character creation function g W When the external character No is sandwiched with half width vertical bar a corresponding x O a external character is displayed as one character When 1 2 is input two characters whose external character Nos are 1 and 2 are displayed The display format of the text is selected gt lt x a gt Z Standard Bold Solid color Sculpture Text Color of the text is selected Rou O 8 Direction of the text horizontal vertical is selected oo Horizontal AAA Vertical A Direction Xx WwW A m A z Oo O 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 6 8 1 2 Entering text Item Alignment Solid Bg transparent Size Interval High Quality Font Category Use 6 x 8 dot font Set as Default Clear Default Description Reference position to align multiple text lines is selected It is available only when the Direction is set to Horizontal Solid color is selected when the Style is set to Solid or Sculpture Left aaaa Right Aaaa Center AAAA O BB BB CCCC CCCC Check this to make the background of the text transparent x O Text size magnifying factor of vertical x horizontal sizes is selected When the magnifying factor is x1 horizontal and x1 vertical the
286. s Refresh Remove Print Advanced Power Management support Properties BE Advanced Power Management support Properties x General Settings Driver General Settings Driver Advanced Power Management support S Advanced Power Management support Device type System devices Manufacturer Standard system devices Hardware version Not available APM version 1 2 Device status Troubleshooting D T Force APM 1 0 mode This device is working properly m Device usage OE T een I Remove from this hardware profile 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable 5 2 1 Setting communication Communication setting of the PC that transfers data to the GOT is made Settings can be made in either the Communicate with GOT dialog box or the Communication Configuration 2 dialog box Z When one dialog box is set the other dialog box automatically has the same settings D Click the Communication Communicate with GOT Communication Configuration Q The setting dialog box appears Make settings referring to the description below 6 H Communicate with GOT 0 Download GOT Upload Computer Memon information Special data L OS Install GOT ROM BIOS Install gt GOT Communication contigration L 6 MO Select Communication type and set up details a AS23920 6 RS232 E Dr E gt 69 On ZO i t5 Details O L nO Port Ho CoM Baudrate
287. s always converted to O degree i e No rotation e The text style including slant angle is not supported e OE 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 1 5 Pasting figure data of BMP file Point f Notes on importing data GT Desginer2 converts only the compatible characters within a DXF data during data import gt Therefore some characters may appear differently from the original data z O Make sure to modify the figure after data import Example 1 cannot be imported As the in DXF data is not the Shift JIS code this character cannot be imported L ma Example 2 The BLOCK created with rectilinear and circle figures on the AutoCAD screen appear larger than the original size DZ As the scale is set in the INSERT the BLOCK cannot be correctly imported SS 6 nak Of 45 Sa i t5 BO fa On O WE Z Q O Wl i N 25 Be 38 i O ES 25 EO Zu a i gt ma L ma cn zZ E Q LU fal Z lt z o Q 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 16 8 1 5 Pasting figure data of BMP file d Line Each line is converted as shown below 1 dot width After import GTD2 data F ries Before import DXF data CONTINUOUS DASHED HIDDEN CENTER PHANTOM User definition Others P AE ap eee es ee ee Dashed line Full line mic O SOF ull lint Ol O e Color The color is converted as shown below Before import DXF data F Red 0x08 FeO Yelow 0x02 veow fo Green 0x03 Geen COO Light
288. s BN Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q 2 E JO search Wj Folders N Address gt Control Panel Performance an d Maintenance See Also Pick a category 5 File Types B System Restore Pick a task E Switch to Classic view See Also Windows Update Help and Support Other Control Panel Options Fe Appearance and Themes e A J Network and Internet Connections e F Add or Remove Programs Ys i i 7 9 Sounds Speech and Audio Devices Performance and Mai N m Choose Performance and Maintenance e Opti Accessibility Options Troubleshooters Date Time Language and Regional ions Click Device Manager on the Hardware tab The Device Manager window will appear System Properties Professional Version 200 Automatic Updates Remote General Computer Name Hardware Advance Add Hardware Wizard The Add Hardware Wizard helps you install hardware Add Hardware Wizard Device Manager The Device Manager lists all the hardware devices installed on your computer Use the Device Manager to change the properties of any device 5 15 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable 2 Startup and Shutdown mi a Click Device Manager different hardwa See basic information about your computer Adjust visual effects Free up space on your hard disk Back up your data Rearrange items on your hard disk to make programs run
289. same time Page 9 12 Base 1 Replace devices M10 M11 M12 M100 M101 M102 gt Changes the preset devices at the same time Page 9 12 Data View a 7 E 7 O Overlapping images or objects Page 9 16 b A Select Device list Base 2 Base 3 Numerical display Display the set device in list Page 9 17 ASCII display oo j l Panel meter display Base 1 Text list Base 2 Base 3 l Bit Switch Displays the direct input texts in a list Page 9 19 nan Bit Switch EEN Word Lamp Base 1 Multiple language input Man Auto F zh Ash Input characters or comments in other language Page 9 26 English Chinese Import BMP DXF file BMP file Import Project Imports BMP DXF files Page 8 13 Utilizes other project data Page 9 35 Object Functions GT Designer2 Version Reference Manual Lamp Touch Switch Red Displays device value via lamp color changing Page 6 1 gt Bit Switch Lamp Touch it to switch device ON OFF Page 6 19 Touch it to change bit device value Page 6 36 Touch it to switch to the extended function screen Page 6
290. screen in the workspace Screen Name Main menu Screen Type Base Screen Security 0 Detailed Explanation a No Please select figures or objects ASP GOT GT SoftGOT 640 480 256 Colors MELSEC Qn4 0 MELDAS CE fa 70 0 x 443 Y 13 Quick selection of desired part for editing gt Section 9 1 4 Simple selection of overlapped figure Data view Objects or figures set on the screen can be displayed in a list If multiple objects or figures are overlapped it can be simply selected from the Data View Currently selected objects or figures can also be checked df Data iew Data View Library Editor 1 Lamp_1 MV Objects IV Figures Object Number fo Object Figure Position Object ID Polygon 32 64 96 128 Rectangle 32 64 96 128 Circle 32 64 96 128 6 Real time check of settings in graphic display view direct Setting on the property sheet or the dialog box is quickly displayed on the screen Since the screen display can be checked a screen as you wish can be smoothly created 1 6 1 2 Feature 1 2 2 Useful functions Bit Switch Rectangle 1 rect_22 No Property Sheet x Cx Basic Text Lamp Switch Action Device 7 Dev Action Set C Altemate C Reset C Momentary Display Style ON f OFF Shape ctangle 1 rect_22 x Others JT Res Background Pattern
291. se to move the cursor to the end point 2 below 3 Releasing the left button of the mouse draws a rectangle 3 below Then right click the mouse to exit from the placement mode A e Ge a I oy Ooi iris T a ams a d a yok ec i Gi Ow Z Y LO One 9 ni ro Ow 3 Set the frame line and paint of the rectangle 1 Double click the created rectangle i The Setting dialog box appears ZZ lt aS 2 Change the color and thickness of the line E H NP ate 3 Clicking the button determines the settings and closes the dialog box Click the button to cancel the settings and close the dialog box H O ii An Line Style E Set as Default 5 a Line Width 1 Bot x Clear Default 5 u Line Color of Ta Fill Pattern NONE x Eattem Eg Ealan ha Pattern Ho Ealan o M gt Stes I lt Category Others ka OK Cancel KY cancel zZ ep kK Q LL Q Zz lt x z o Q 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 4 26 4 7 3 Figure drawing text input _ p 3 Hint Changing the figure Select the figure to be resized and then drag the handle to change its size Example When resizing a rectangle How to draw a text This section explains how to draw a figure text briefly Refer to the following section for detailed explanation of figure drawing and text entry Section 8 1 2 Entering text D Click A Text on the Figure toolbar The mouse cursor changes to
292. size 168248 byte Install Ma LL O Z ZO Q g Su mO Close lt Section 5 1 1 25 2 Relation between extended function OS and built in OS PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT Check the size of the monitor data or the special data to be downloaded gt inthis section Check method of transfer data size 4 Extended function OS Monitor data Special data size lt Remaining memory size of GOT Installation is allowed Extended function OS Monitor data Special data size gt Remaining memory size of GOT Installation is not allowed Ex GOT memory size 1152 KB without memory board Count equivalent to memories of extended function OS 3 640 KB Monitor data 300 KB Special data 26 KB 640 300 26 lt 1152 Installation is allowed USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 5 1 Type and Size of Transfer Data to GOT 5 8 5 1 2 Memory space required for data transfer 2 Data has already been transferred to the GOT Check the built in memory K BA in this section Check method of GOT free space Check the monitor data size or the special data size to be added C gt inthis section Check method of transfer data size Monitor data special data size lt Remaining memory size of GOT Installation is allowed Monitor data special data size gt Remaining memory size of GOT Installation is not allowed Point f When free space of built in memory is su
293. snnannnnnnn Peer re eer eee rere Lee eee eee naa to f Use default key window AO Select key window sheet DEC key sheet No J Browse 5 HEX key sheet No U Browse z Me ASCII key sheet No J Browse oe Or 3 Key window type Screen 5 W T Screen setting has priority over project setting x M Display value during input M Display input function range gt ad lt L ad a O Z op Screen Size OF Cancel QO LW Q amp After changing settings of each tab click the button z ad QO 4 9 Changing Screen Property 4 42 4 10 Viewing Created Screen Image Image displayed on the GOT is checked 4 10 1 Previewing the Base Screen CD Perform either of the following operations e Click l e Select View Preview menu However window display settings must be made in advance to preview the windowed screen Refer to the following section for the operation L3 Section 4 10 2 Previewing the Base Screen with window fe Screen Preview B 1 _ D File View Base vif w H amp 256 Colors ON OFF State la map Security 0 9 a F 100 EE 199 OFF Image State 0 256 Colo 7 Soe Tre pever seen osease O Proven diy ssara nate evera Printer Settings Printer settings paper and paper orientation are set Output in reverse Black and white is reversed when printing based on the printer file setting File Letters are filled in w
294. sses e E AEO 7 9 7 3 3 Deleting registered library template ccccccseccscecseeceeeceueceeeceeceeeeceesaeeseueesueeseeeseeessueenaess 7 10 7 3 4 Editing registered objects and fiQUIeS cccccccsceceeecesceceeeceeeceueceueecueeceeseueeeeeesueesaeesanesaueesanss 7 11 T39 Changing library PFODCIY zarena a anced N E 7 13 FO SAVIO ONAN Y seston se on ae Pct a seat ace Seres eee a ee 7 14 7 921 L adinglibrary rom TG 228 kis eel eee ee E Seon ease 7 17 7235 6 IIMPOFUNGEUS CMMIDI ANY o tascawth aus usu densi a awe beast teen 7 19 7 4 Utilizing Panelkit of GT D SIQNED ccc ceeccceccceeeceeeceeeeceeeseeeseueseueeseeeseeeseeeeaas 7 21 8 DRAW AND EDIT eenen 8 1to8 34 GAT VS PIOU O tr toestecsstesctng rss aeleraincin eens ised aula heated cian clan acid arenas dasa ona a teac ada taa dines 8 1 SAI DAWNO NOUTO Saari a E EEA 8 1 o kZ ENENG LO MU acre a e a aa a E 8 6 SPANN NUE S aani e a a Aeduassned ey esde dda 8 8 S PRACADOS a OD an en Senn nO ee Meee ee 8 10 SAS Pasting noure data Or BMP Menee nym a a a N 8 13 3 2 EHIN FIGUre an OBJEC somessa aac daeercavareleuesaes 8 18 8 2 1 Selecting figure and object cccccccccseecseecceeeceeeceecueesuecsueecseecaeecsueceuecsueesaeeseeeseeessueesaeesueesages 8 18 6 2 2 Editing Nguresand OD CCIS ars saeco iid ecaste esses tna ecas atl A A dase see eee neta ee 8 20 8 2 3 Grouping Ungrouping multiple figures ANd ODjeCtS ccccceccceecceecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeesee
295. st field If the Extended Function check box in the object setting dialog is unchecked the GT Designer 2 Would you like to initialize the setting i Cancel Lestat tins sonnas arsane temae O cose enon it nag Garon art aonane temae O O 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 4 7 5 Basic operations of dialog box O 0O O im 4 8 Operating Multiple Screens 4 8 1 Cascading tiling screens OVERVIEW Multiple screens in the project are reordered Select Window Cascade Tile Vertical Tile Horizontal Multiple open screens are reordered as follows Ex e Cascade Overlapped screens are displayed toward the lower right like a staircase let Designer2 C WINDOWS Desktop production A production A GTD CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help DSA A RS oes sae wl Nh Z vom oer Am AA mM fe z foz fie amp onfor fe D 2 2 alt zZ Sy Q g ast B ES Bo Bt Se A ER SE OL Si ja O D li O zx PEE r T Display Overlay Screen 5 ECA Bowe Suen z E Main menu 4 O LZ E Window Screen FE LI Report Screen O a H Common Settings O dp System Environment LU Report Z Q g Hard Copy LI Operation Panel LU D ad Ok ox nO Screen Screen Name Line B 4 Screen Type Base Screen Security 0 Detailed Explanation Use Screen
296. stination project as the base screen No 10 and No 11 respectively El kj production A Neshnstinn daka nurabher ie ee ee ee ee ee ee cim Base Screen fo J i If the base screen No 10 and No 11 alread hf 1 Data display screen fate etl ee T exit in the destination project these SAUNG 2 ow RAZ Error Sereen proj y g Q Dales OI Window ff __ mage _ screen data will be deleted i e overwritten z Ta 4 Line B Report fi H mage A lt L Window Screen freasa I lt Report Screen Comment fio Line A Stop 3 E z Common Settings Parts fi Image i x C System Environment 7 mege Use the Imagej or Browse button to check a 0 Report Sound Files z B the data in the destination project With this operation the preset comment can pe be also checked Rias x lt LU Q oe Zz a ame oa eee The recipe function setting is written over Moles the corresponding settings within the destination project Click the button to import the selected data O After the data import is completed confirm the imported data and the relevant settings 9 6 2 Cautions If the GOT type or PLC type set for the source project differs from that for the destination project 1 Ifthe GOT type set for the source project differs from that for the destination project the GOT type of the imported data is changed to the one set for the destination project With this import some fu
297. sufficient uploading is interrupted USING LIBRARY Memory Information Built in memory information of the GOT is obtained For the setting method of password for upload refer to the following manual gt GT Designer2 Version2 Reference Manual DRAW AND EDIT 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable 5 20 5 2 3 Uploading 5 2 4 Installing ROM BIOS Point 1 Data installed in the GOT _ When the ROM _BIOS is installed the monitor data special data and OS in the GOT are deleted Upload them copy OS to PC card when these data are required to backup 2 During installation of ROM_BIOS Once the ROM _BIOS installation is started it cannot be interrupted Do not turn OFF the power of the GOT PC or unplug the communication cable to interrupt Otherwise the GOT may became inoperable lt GOT recovery method gt If the GOT goes down due to the operation above install the system program again by the following procedure Turn OFF the GOT Remove the communication module board and option module mounted on GOT For GOT provided a communication unit remove the communication cable D Turn ON the GOT while pressing two locations shown below on the GOT at the same time 4 Message Reinstall the ROM_BIOS OS appears on the GOT Complete installation according to the GOT instruction If the GOT is not recovered by the above method contact your local Mitsubishi servic
298. t in both Action when condition success and Acton when switching success Cursor position Lert top User ID fi Action when condition fai Don t erase cursorkey window and input abje Cursor input area 1 char blink b V When touch input is detected open key window at the same time Cursor Movement Defined key action As aright arrow key Position to specify area Bottom Fiight Other Cary out station no change IY Cary out display of alarm flow Move key window Don t move 4 15 4 5 Creating a New Screen E Key window tab The key window which is used on the new screen is set Settings here can be changed after creation of the screen Refer to the manual below for details of the settings gt GT Designer2 Version Reference Manual OVERVIEW Screen Property x Basic Auxilia Key window kep window setting Screen Use default key window Select key window sheet DEC key sheet Mo 40 Browse CONFIGURATION SYSTEM HEX key sheet No fO Browse ASCII key sheet Mo f0 Browse kep window type Screen Screen setting has priority over project setting IM Display value during input IY Display input function range SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 A Screen Size OF Cancel Z Lu Lu x n Z O TT Q Z lt lt u X O DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT
299. t Rotate e Edit Rotate Flip Rotate Left g W Right O a Rotate Right Edit Rotate Flip Rotate Right gt or lt x oO ae Z no gt E Q LU m Z x z or Q 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 20 8 2 2 Editing figures and objects 8 2 3 Grouping Ungrouping multiple figures and objects Grouping of multiple figures and objects enables users to handle them as a single figure eee ee ee LL oe i Ungroup ED Select the desired figures and objects for grouping ungrouping Group ungroup the selected figures and objects by either of the following operations Function Group Multiple figures and objects are grouped gt E Group O Edit Group Ungroup Multiple figures and objects are ungrouped Het Ungroup O e Edit Ungroup 8 2 4 Undo and redo After deletion or movement of figures and objects the last operation can be cancelled or repeated Maximum 500 previous operations can be recorded Undo The last operation is cancelled e Click Undo e Select the Edit Undo from the menu Redo The last operation is repeated or the operation cancelled with lt Undo is recovered e Click Redo e Select the Edit Redo from the menu 8 21 8 2 Editing Figure and Object 8 2 3 Grouping Ungrouping multiple figures and objects 8 2 5 Aligning figures and objects Multi
300. t appear when the data is opened GT Designer cannot open the GT Desinger2 format files Appendix 4 2 Uploading monitor data POINT When uploading monitor data from the GOT make sure use the same or newer version of GT Designer2 than the one used to download the monitor data W GT Designer2 version lt GT Designer2 version used to download used to upload App 12 Appendix 4 Applicable Monitor Data Appendix 4 1 Opening monitor data Precautions When the monitor data is uploaded with the same or older software version than the one used to download it some functions settings are invalid due to version incompatibility The following table shows the compatibility between the software versions Software used to download monitor data Software used to upload monitor data GT Designer2 GT Designer Version5 13P or later Version1 00A to Version5 10L Version5 13P or later oo aas a Ce GT Designer Compatible A When uploading the monitor data by older version software some functions settings are invalid 1 Warning message will appear regardless of whether the data includes the settings of unsupported functions 2 Warning message will appear only when the data includes the settings of unsupported functions A When opening the monitor data by older version software some functions settings are invalid and also the data is corrupted Warning message will not appear when the data is opened
301. t on the next page 5 1 Type and Size of Transfer Data to GOT 5 1 1 Data type to be installed on GOT Point Selection point of Other extended function OS 1 Install Other extended function OS when the following functions are used e Report function e Operation panel function e Bar code function e Video display function e RGB display function e External I O function e Printer output e Gateway function Send mail e Hard copy function File save e Creating CSV format file with alarm history function or and recipe function OVERVIEW 2 In Other extended function OS only items of 1 Language and 2 Device below are different Other items bar code report and CSV are the same select Other extended function OS referring to 1 and 2 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 1 Selection by printer connected to the GOT or language output to the CSV file e ESC printer Output send mail in Japanese e PCL printer Output in English e Chinese Big 5 printer Output in Chinese Traditional characters e Chinese GB printer Output in Chinese Simplified characters SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 2 Selection by optional equipment e Keyboard Operation panel ten key panel operation panel function e I O External I O device external I O function e Video RGB Video camera video function PC RGB function CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN O1 2 Relation between extended function OS and built in OS When th
302. t the right of the partition are deleted the partition is deleted as well 3 25 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars 3 4 2 Customizing toolbars 3 4 3 Customizing GT Designer2 operating environment Environment for the drawing screen is set z U ED Select Project Preferences menu gt gt The preferences dialog box appears The drawing screen environment is set with operation tab display tab items zZ i O Operation tab lt Operation setting for drawing screen is made LL EE j x YE Toolbars Icon Operation View nO MV Deselect fiqure obiect alter its placement J Release the selective state of tools 3 IV System setting on new 5 I Change object after create z I Auto File Save E lt hiinat 5 D M Show Select Project dialog when you start GT Designer2 2 S M Show Wizard on New Project 6 o T Figure Object move on screen display area with ALT key move to temporary area 4 H I Close an edited screen when opening another if the number of open screens is at its maximum May na 5 RS Effective from the next startup of GT Designer2 fa A To Close S i EZ dE Checked After arranging objects the selected status status with handle is reset Deselect figure object l Not checked With the selected status status with handle figures objects are arranged on the drawing after its placement screen fe Li Checked After setting figures objects the tool selected status is
303. ta when the corresponding text is entered Basic Text Lamp aa Text ON OFF Copy OFF gt 0N All Settings Text Only Text l Style Fiegular Solid o M Size fi gt fi s fi Y F Use High Quality Font See aromin Center Top Bottom Lett Right Horizontal Vertical je Alignment ift 4 Alignment Offset to Frame Text fo Dot Lamp ke C Bt Word fig bit Extended Function Extended T Action l Trigger Cancel 4 Then click the button ee Making the ON Display and OFF Display the same Q Hint GT Designer2 VersionZ Reference Manual for details of objects section 4 7 5 Basic operations of dialog box To set the ON display the same as the OFF display after setting the character tab ON or OFF click the All Settings or Text Only button at Copy ON gt OFF or Copy OFF gt ON button button Copy characters Character formats character sizes and display positions button Copy only text 4 7 Basic Operations of Drawing Screen Editor 4 7 4 Object function setting 4 7 5 Basic operations of dialog box This section explains the basic operations of the dialog box Bit Switch m Switch Action Device I Dev Action Set C Altemate C Reset C Momentary Display Style ON OFF Shape Rectangle 1 rect_1 he Reverse Switch Area Frame Mi Switch M Background M Pattern go M Category s witc
304. tal is displayed 3 _ Comment fy Common Settings Delete all old monitor data TP Check 05 version o GOT Proiect iD FIER Memon meter MUs d M Empty AA Available size kbyte Transfer size 2 00 bute Select all Mitterence Deselect Download 5 1 Type and Size of Transfer Data to GOT 5 1 2 Memory space required for data transfer 2 Communicate with PC Card dialog box W E e Project U ntitled Z H Base Screen wv Window Screen When the transfer items are clicked the O i Parts transfer size total is displayed Comment L f Common Settings _ Standard monitor 05 Communication driver O _ Extended function 05 q Special Module monitor data 5 a a gt O De SP Motion path CAMELSEC GTD2 GMDP E QS nO O05 install path C AMELSEC GTD2 05 A GOT type A985G0T 497 GOT AS60G0T 2 Available size S42 7647458 byte 05 0 byte o LZ Monitor Data 3144 byte SF 7 Motion 0 byte 9 O Lu a im Memory card C Write m 5 Ow nO Z efr 2 TO Ow Zu B zZ n ra O Ww O1 Ma LL O Z ZO Q g Su mO PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 5 1 Type and Size of Transfer Data to GOT 5 12 5 1 2 Memory space required for data transfer 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable The data transfer method with RS 232 cable is described As data transfer is operated with the GT Designer2
305. te 2003 07 03 Library 0 My Favorites 1 Lamp01 3 Lamp03 4 SwitchA 2 Lamp02 als 7 Title SSS Library 1 Line 1 Linel 3 allow i 6 productA 4 SwitchA 5 SwitchB 7 productB Voice List of set voice files is printed as shown below File Name C WINDOWS full monitor_data GTD Date 2003 07 03 Sound Files No Sound File Path 1 C WINDOWS desktop monitor data Line_A_Sound wav 2 C WINDOWS desktop monitor data Line_ B_Sound wav 3 C WINDOWS desktop monitor data Line_C_Sound wav 4 C WINDOWS desktop monitor data Line_D_Sound wav 6 2 Printing example 6 2 1 Printer output 6 11 SYSTEM SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 CREATING AND DATA TRANSFER OPERATION OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION EDITING SCREEN ep O LI pe O X A Z H Z A A A LU LL USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT Category Each category list is printed as shown below File Name C WINDOWS full monitor_data GTD Date 2003 07 03 Category Switch Coordinates 480 400 480 400 480 400 480 400 480 400 32 128 176 128 320 128 464 128 480 400 480 400 n O x oO oO bo J Goto Screen Switch Goto Screen Switch Goto Screen Switch Goto Screen Switch Goto Screen Switch Goto Screen Switch Goto Screen Switch Goto Screen Switch Goto Screen Switch Goto Screen Switch Goto Screen
306. tegory can be selected when setting the storage location of objects and figures Goto Screen Switch Basic Text Lamp Screen Type gt x lt Base C Overlap Window Overlap Window Superimpose Window Zz r Goto Screen Fixed fi Browse Previous Device Bit v Dey Details m Display Style ON OFF Shape Selector selector_1 v Others Reverse Switch Area Frame M Switch O M gt Background Pattern O Mi Category Lamp Extended Functio D Extended Goto Screen Switch T Trigger 9 1 Edit Function 9 8 9 1 2 Batch setting and managing objects figures for each purpose Category workspace Method to make batch settings for each category Batch setting method of a category is described An example of batch editing the switch color in the Goto screen switch category from black to white is shown here FLARED menu FLARED menu Batch edit D Select the desired category for batch edit and right click the mouse to select Color Batch Edit BI xi E B Category H Switch Lamp C Others a New Category Rename Category Delete Category Device Batch Edit Switch Lamp Shape Batch Edit EZTIT D The batch edit dialog box appears Specify the color black before change Refer to the following for detailsof the batch edit dialog box Section 9 1 3 Batch editing attributes of objects
307. text will be inserted into the header footer Select the auto text at the combo box and insert using the pushbutton Auto text can also be input from the PC keyboard Auto text Keyboard input Page No amp Page Date amp Date Time GOT Type PLC Type Project Title File Name 6 1 Printing method 6 1 2 Setting items amp Time amp GOT amp PLC amp Project amp File 2 Screen Image tab Item Reverse Fill the background of text in black Dithering Page Setup Page Setup Screen Image r Screen ee Fill the background of text in black T Dithering Check this item to Check this item to output the screen image with black and white inverted the screen Check this item to output the screen image with black and white inverted with black and white inverted Check this item to output the text in the black background ele Check this item to convert the screen image into black and white apply monochrome dithering to the image and output it 6 1 Printing method 6 1 2 Setting items F SYSTEM SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 CREATING AND DATA TRANSFER OPERATION OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION EDITING SCREEN ep O U pe O X oO Z H oO ou oO E 2 LU LL USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 3 Detail 1 Base tab Item Object Print to File Screen List Screen Image Items for Print
308. tion of PC we O Wl When data is transferred with the GOT connected turn OFF the power saving function of the PC O1 and Windows Refer to the PC manual or Windows Help for details of the power saving function setting md LU O Z Z0 ad Eg Su QAO PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 5 2 Transferring data with RS 232 cable 5 14 8 When a communication error has occurred A communication error such as a time out error may occur due to the communication port settings on the PC Check and change the settings in the following procedure The following items may not be present depending on the PC used lt Method 1 gt The following screens and operations apply to Windows XP Choose Start gt Control Panel For Windows 2000 choose Start Settings Control Panel MELSEC AE Internet E My Documents Internet Explorer G E mail i 2 My Recent Documents gt Outlook Ex press fs My Pictures it x GT Designer2 oy My Music el My Computer E Control Panel Choose Control Panel Help and Support Search IT Run All Programs gt A Log Off Shut Down Choose Performance and Maintenance and click the System icon The System Properties dialog box will appear For Windows 2000 double click System Control Panel Performance and Maintenance File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q sak 2 amp JO search jy Folder
309. tting built in memory information Error No Error message Error definition and cause Corrective action Check the extended function OS installed on the GOT with the built in information Select the item so that the If the selected OS is installed the equivalent number of the required a Ww number of allowable extended function i be within 6 including th gt E There is no space on the GOT to install E eee te eee ee O OS memories is exceeded extended function OS to be installed the selected extended function OS Please reduce to a maximum of 6 gt Section 5 2 2 Getting built in memoies memory information z 3 Section 5 1 1 Extended g function OS LL The version of ROM_BIOS installed in Install the ROM_BIOS compatible with 7 a the GOT is not compatible with the l nO j The ROM_BIOS installed in the GOT is te CNC monitor and the KANA KANJI CNC monitor and the KANA KANJI JPN not compatible with the CNC monitor JPN extended OS d the KANA KANJI JPN and the O Please install a more up to date K3 Section 5 1 1 5 ROM_BIOS version ROM_BIOS y T When the extended function OS that uses two or more required memories is installed the extended function OS 6 2 may not be installed with the action above f a If it cannot be installed delete all extended function OS installed on the GOT with the built in memory information ome and reinstall the extended function OS again Download
310. tton in that tab ON orr Dev D 2 E D da When using GT Designer2 in the PC in which the OS other than Japanese version The text may not be displayed correctly depending on the OS versions some version include the fonts incompatible with GT Designer2 or GOT When using Microsoft Narrator GT Designer2 cannot be used with Microsoft Narrator When using GT Designer2 do not use Microsoft Narrator Print Date Oct 2004 Mar 2005 Oct 2005 Janu 2006 Jun 2006 Nov 2006 Dec 2006 Feb 2007 May 2007 Aug 2007 Dec 2007 Feb 2008 Jun 2008 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the left bottom of the back cover Manual Number Revision SH NA 080521ENG A First edition SH NA 080521ENG B Section 2 1 2 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 2 3 4 1 3 6 4 3 1 4 7 1 4 10 1 4 11 1 4 11 2 4 12 5 2 3 5 2 4 5 2 5 5 3 1 5 3 2 6 1 2 7 1 7 1 2 7 2 7 3 7 3 2 to 7 3 7 8 1 2 9 1 4 9 2 1 9 4 1 Appendix 2 Section 1 2 1 1 2 2 7 3 8 SH NA 080521ENG C Section 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 2 3 6 4 1 4 2 4 7 4 4 7 5 4 10 4 10 1 4 10 2 4 12 4 13 6 1 2 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 2 7 3 1 7 3 2 7 3 3 7 3 4 7 3 5 7 3 6 7 3 7 7 3 8 8 1 3 9 1 4 9 3 SH NA 080521ENG D Partial corrections Section 4 7 Section 6 1 Section 9 1 SH NA 080521ENG E Partial corrections Section 4 2 Section 4 3 1 Section 4 7 1 Appendix 3 1 Section 8
311. ty 0 At Base Screen El Base Screen Detailed Explanation aa Ll F menu Detailed Explanation C 1 Main menu Z i 9 Window Screen H Window Screen Use Screen Color No I Report Screen visited Basal O 3 Ei n CI Report Screen Pattern ae EJ Common Settings Pattem Common Settings Ls System Environment 1 Fg Color H System Environment Report Bg Col Report EB Hard Copy a BF Hard C i ard Copy J Operation Panel Operation Panel 2 fup Status Observation Pp Status Observation L Time Action Time Action op Z Alarm History Alarm History O 4 Floating Alarm es Pa Recipe o O E Script 2 Ethemet Eia theret i t n S Gateman Server A Gateman Senier on 3 4 gt i j Category Pisa Library Please select figures or objects AS7 GOT GT SoftG0T 640x480 256 Colors MELSEC Qn Please select figures or objects AIP GOT GT SoftGOT 640 480 256 Colors MELSEC On 3 4 2 Customizing toolbars Zz O g 5 Q LL Z oe O zZ im i X O a N or Lu Z O D Lu m oO LL An icon toolbar can be added or deleted and the icon display can be changed Refer to the following pages for operation im Ow Paes Ex 1 Deletion of toolbars 9 8 ZO EA 16 fy ON i amp ON we i E i na a Elb P A lb Ex 2 Addition deletion of icon 2A O 7 wvm gt 7 o m ZE OO a Addition a 5 fs Deletion
312. ual screen 1 A 0123 E0123 Perform either of the following operations e Click e Choose the View Preview menu 6 The image of the screen which will be displayed on the GOT is displayed on the Screen Preview window For the operation of the Screen Preview window refer to Section 4 10 1 Previewing the Base Screen Screen Preview B 1 Main menu File View Base ai ae a amp 256 Coos ON OFF State 4E Sp Secuity 0 SCreen 1 ane p denen fiaeenr OFF Image State0 256 Colors Le 4 47 4 10 Viewing Created Screen Image 4 10 2 Previewing the Base Screen with window 4 11 Copying Deleting Screen 4 11 1 Copying screen data gt ad Lu 6 D Select the desired screen for copying in the project workspace and right click the mouse to select the Copy menu Up to 25 screens can be copied at a time Z o z oj x O H T Display Overlay Screen T Display Overlay Screen BS mD EM Base Screen mee i 1 Main menu a ais bi a New Ee Eg wind 2 Open MU e EJ Repor Close 6 z 9 Common Se Right click HE Comm Close All 5 cae oly Comment A Camm N Cu af 7 a EE 58 8 Sound Files er Sounc Paste 2 ne Delete AS u Previous Screen A ub Hest Screen UnOlpened Screens Rename T Open Image View 37 Project amp a Property 3 Project 37 Libram Gi Ow Z Y LO One 9 ni ro Ow Right click the mouse again and s
313. ual Reference Manual Inde Z About GTZ 2 Connect to MELFAN Sweb BS o ie re 5 8 2 The screen About GTD2 shown on the left appears 3 Version GT Designer2 Version 2 90U Sw2D5C GTD2E 2 90U COPYRIGHT C 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED This Product is licensed to ES Minor version of GT Designer2 Major version of GT Designer2 Name Zz O g 5 Q LL Z oe O zZ im i X O 9 N aa WW op Ww QO Le Company Warning This product is protected by copyright law and ipternational treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Product model name SW UD5C GTD2 E Major version of GT Designer2 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 3 6 How to View the Product Information 3 36 4 CREATING AND EDITING SCREEN 4 1 Selecting Project at the Start of GT Designer2 At the start of GT Designer2 the project selection dialog box is displayed Select whether a project is newly created or existing project data is edited D From the PC start menu select Start Program MELSOFT Application GT Designer2 to start the GT Designer2 The project selection dialog bo
314. uction A GTD Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Wind D ae ag Bea o a vk PaaS aes A display frame appears eae LULL f 57 amp Q g we BS by dragging Bd B 1 Data display screen Soren ine Vos Screen Njam ber 1 Screen Name Data display scre gt s_ i TI seeeeeneeeemeemmaamamammeae Screen T pe Base Screen Security 0 Detailed Explanation i i 6S Use Scretn Color No aie _ ELLS TUE Pattern l Display Overla Eee i E al Project Bg Color Base S 1D 2E LJ Window C Report it Ree a a Commo Bl Sys Rep Ee Har Ope 2 Project S Remark Customized screen The GT Designer2 memorizes the customized settings of the screen configuration At the next start up the previously customized status screen is displayed 3 71 3 4 Customizing Screen Configuration and Toolbars 3 4 1 Customizing screen configuration _ QJ Hint Movement of workspace Drag the popped up workspace while holding the Ctrl key down This enables the workspace to be moved without being fully displayed 5 LU EEN Z B 1 Main menu i Bl x EESE EI menu Screen m m Screen O Main menu i I Display Overlay Screen Screen Name I Display Overlay Screen ScreenType Basson S 1124 Project Sereen Type 3 8 Project Securi
315. uence program using the value Value before change 0X0000FFFF before changing the system information as 32 bite extract the Value after change 0X0000FFFE lower 16 bits and then reference lt System information of the GOT A900 Series gt Value before change OXFFFFFFFF Value after change OXFFFFFFFE System In the GOT A900 Series the operation of b1 forced screen You should change the sequence programs etc if the forced information saver enable signal takes precedence of the operation of bO screen saver enable signal b1 and the automatic screen Automatic automatic screen saver disable signal saver disable signal b0 turn on off the backlight Screen Saver Disable Signal b0 Forced Screen Saver Enable Signal 61 This may cause some GOTs to work differently if both bO and b1 are turned on lt If both bO and b1 are turned on gt GOTS800 Series The display and backlight are both turned off by the screen saver GOT A900 Series The display and backlight both remain on When diverting the monitor data of the DU WIN 1 Only screen data files of the GOT F900 Series can be read 2 Some functions are equivalent to those on the dialog box of the DU WIN 3 Touch key with screen switching function The touch key with screen switching function is converted to the multi action switch with the base screen switching function For the details refer to the GOT F900 SERIES OPERATION MANUAL GT Designer2 4 Lam
316. unction is dedicated to Japanese version 1 Combination of extended function OS that can be installed The extended function OS is installed in the built in memory of the GOT The extended function OS can be installed up to 6 in total equivalent to the number of required memories Either one of ladder monitor motion monitor CNC monitor and other extended function OS can be installed Number of required Extended function OS name Remark memories at installation System monitor 1 Ladder monitor for MESELC A Ladder monitor for MESELC QnA 1 Only one can Ladder monitor i Ladder monitor for MESELC Q 1 be installed Ladder monitor for MESELC FX Motion monitor 1 CNC monitor 1 Only one can be installed Special unit recipe sound Network monitor List editor function for MESELC A 1 2 Gateway Server client mail FTP 1 2 Servo amplifier monitor 1 2 KANA KANJI JPN 1 2 Others 2 Chinese Big 5 printer bar code report CSV I O Chinese Big 5 printer bar code report CSV video RGB Chinese GB printer bar code report CSV keyboard Chinese GB printer bar code report CSV video RGB 1 When the number of required memories installed on the GOT is 4 or less the OS may not be installed If the OS cannot be installed delete all extended function OS installed on the GOT and then reinstall the extended function OS again 2 Select Other extended function OS referring to Poin
317. verlay screen e When this is checked CE status is cisplayed i SREEEFroject the set overlay screen EBA Proiect in a tree ae Base Screen status is displayed in er ae a covers iB 5 he 1 Replay operation a tree C W 1 Manual operation as Fl Window Screen a e W 2 PLC 1 0 monitor i a Window Screen eke 1 Manual pperaie 3 iii 2 PLE 10 monitor 2 PLC 1 0 monitor SLO Danar Carnan Seen Report Screen Pee LB 1 Type cour Zz 2 E o Fl Common Settings Screen 2 if Bde System Environment 6 2 2 a Report The created screen is displayed in a tree by type 2 EB Hard Copy base screen window screen and report screen 5 Operation Panel ao AM Bar Code pes up Status Observation Common Settings p OF Time Ar The object function settings used in common for the project oq Alarm History are displayed in a tree oW BA Floating Alarm When an item is double clicked the setting dialog box for ez oA Recipe each function is displayed Ge AE Script Z in Ethernet lt 2 tte Gateway Server ia 5 Be Gateway Client seed Fi ha ail Comment l X fT 1 Adine supply conveyer stopped Che Common file TE a Parts Files of multiple object functions part comment and voice 26 lf 1 Updown mortor which are used in common are displayed in a tree tae FS Sound Sie i lt i E 1 Alarm sound A Ta 4 gt QO 27 Project 32
318. witch or lamp are edited Unit for batch edit is selected All Screen including screen status monitoring All screens are the target for batch edit Edited Screen including screen status monitoring The editing screen is the target for batch edit Screen Range The specified screen is the target for batch edit Target 1 After selection the range and the type on the screen are specified Category Category is the target for batch edit After selection select the category for batch edit Selected Area Objects figures selected on the editing screen are the target for batch edit Common Settings Common Settings are the target for batch edit Attributes to be changed are set When figures are selected by attributes switch figures and lamp figures can be classified for setting Device No of Objects Device color figure before change is selected Edit list New Device No Device color figure after change is selected Device Device type bit word is selected for batch edit of device Point Points are set for consecutive edit of devices In Device No of Objects MO New Device No M10 set 4 MO to M4 are changed to M4 to M10 9 13 9 1 Edit Function 9 1 3 Batch editing attributes of objects figures scattered on multiple screens Batch edit Method of batch edit Method of batch edit is explained An example to change the color of objects or figures set on all screens from black to white is described here o Z O H
319. wn or figures can be filled Image data can Rectangle p Rectangle Filled also be imported Polygon Cie K gt Chapter 8 DRAW AND EDIT Arc Sector ang Zogi PED Scale Paint Import Image Capture Image gt Import DXF s 3 9 3 2 Menu Configuration Object Object The Object menu contains functions of objects such as lamps or Switch b PeR gt switches witch are arranged on the screen 3 Numerical Display ASC Ascii Display Data Lia Refer to the manual below for details of each object functions amp Numerical Input placa hs L gt GT Designer2 VersionO Reference Manual H Date Display Time Display OVERVIEW Comment Display b T Alarm History Alarm List gt Parts Display b Parts Movement b Panelmeter Level Graph b Dg CONFIGURATION SYSTEM E Set Overlay Screen 3 Window Position b Key Window Settings gt Zz i z Comment Print b N My Eavorie j b 9 oc 65 Tools gt i RET E ee The Tool menu contains functions of list display of set devices and Sw Device List error check of setting items Z aaye The data view can be displayed or not displayed Data Check e gt Chapter 9 USEFUL FUNCTIONS of er ZY Communication 59 Communication The communication menu contains functions of download upload EZ To From GOT f ij AL To Memory Card display of GOT memory information and commun
320. x 2 Q amp A of GT Designer2 Operation dp Zz O H S Q amp A for GT Desinger2 operation is described below gt gt Q1 The workspace property sheet data view has disappeared from the screen How can it be displayed m D E zfs z A onfor O 10 2 e o D S ee zfs onfe o er aea OL A A 1 EE SAeeBSOPKRBARMM IME tm Age et ee x lt Q Z T A A xt AST GOTIGT SOANA Fob Colors MALCA MELOAS Co FFT 0 0 A1 Select View Workspace property sheet to display the workspace and the property sheet Select Tools Data View to display the data view x lt Lu For Workspace property sheet For Data View Q View Preview Ctrl ON Image Display with Layer gt Show Terminal Display gt Tools Toolbars gt Batch Edit r v Status Bar v Workspace v Propertysheet Alt 1 Controller Type List Alt 2 Device List b Data View Data Check Library gt aaah gt Data Size Window Preview gt Redisplay ur v Display Touch Area View Items gt Grid Options Q2 don t know how to pop up the property sheet or the data view BACT designer Untitled lojxj ES Gt Designer2 Untitled1 loj x Prowet LAE wew Screen Common Dore Obiet Toos Gommunketon window tep Project Edit View Screen Common Figure Object Tools Communication Window Help W
321. x is displayed Open M Show this dialog nest time you start GT Designer F Click this to create a new project O Click this to edit an existing project data EJ O Show this dialog next time When you do not want to display this dialog box at the next start of the GT O you start GT Designer2 Designer2 uncheck this D The operation proceeds to the following depending on the items selected Select project New Set System environment of a new project L gt Section 4 3 Opening Closing Project Open Specifying a project save source for editing Section 4 4 Setting the Project Title 4 1 4 1 Selecting Project at the Start of GT Designer2 Point f When the Select project dialog box is not displayed at the time of GT Designer2 start Make the following settings z WW i i gt Choose the Project Preference Operation tab oe 6 Put a check mark in Show Select project dialog when you start GT Designer2 On the Operation tab within the Preference dialog box z z Toolbars Icon Operation view 5 M Deselect fiqure obiect after its placement O Release the selective state of tools T IV System setting on new a z I Change object after create P Auto File Save Interval j Minute M Show Select Project dialog when you start GT Designer2 IV Show Wizard on New Project Figure Object move on screen display area with ALT key move to temporary area q I Close an edited screen when op
322. xt file format If a normal text file or CSV file is sued the letters may be garbled Refer to the manual below for import export of comments GT Designer2 Version Reference Manual Drawing monitor data created in multiple languages on other OS Windows than Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Professional Windows XP Home Edition 1 Precautions for editing Do not edit settings comment or letter that have the input language not supported by the OS Windows The characters may be garbled 2 Display on workspace property sheet and dialog Multiple languages on the workspace property sheet and dialog are garbled If the display on the GT Designer2 is correct it is correctly displayed on the GOT When using the GOT F900 Series 1 Two or more languages cannot be displayed In the GOT F900 only one language selected in Character Set can be displayed on all screens It is impossible to display two or more languages on one screen or to display a different language on a different screen lf an unselected language is displayed irregular characters are displayed 2 Cautions on fonts built in the GOT Built in fonts languages vary depending on the GOT F900 model Select a model supporting the language to be used Example When Chinese is to be displayed in the F930GOT Select the F930GOT BWD C For the details of built in fonts refer to the GOT F900 SERIES HARDWARE MANUAL COMMON CONNECTION or the GOT F900 SERIES OPERATIO
323. xtended tabs are valid if this check box is unchecked and the tabs are hidden 5 Command button The command buttons such as and are provided Click the command button to execute the corresponding item 6 Spin box Enter a value directly or change the numerical value by clicking 4 V 7 Text box Enter a text from the keyboard 8 Check box When executing the item click to puta check mark 4 36 4 7 5 Basic operations of dialog box SYSTEM SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 2 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION A m Z lt Z lt L M X O DATA TRANSFER OPERATION PRINTING PROJECT FILE OUTPUT Z Lu Lu x n Z m TT USING LIBRARY DRAW AND EDIT 4 37 9 Go up one level Open Look in I OOExample o0 rare 200E xample GTD HE 10 Display menu 11 Creation of new folder Files of type GT Designer2 Files GTD GTE 7 Cancel Li w y Ba cel gt x C Recte nane J Deves Ports 8 12 Tabulated list Point following message is displayed 9 Go up one level Displays contents of the directory above the current directory 10 Display menu Provides the viewing mode of the folders and files in the current folder select from detailed display list display and other modes 11 Creation of new folder Creates a new folder 12 Tabulated list Select an item by clicking the corresponding leftmo
324. y O Pattern 4 Filling pattern is selected F O gt O ForeGround 4 Display color of filling pattern is selected Fes O z nA BackGround 4 Background color of filling pattern is selected o O 5 a 25 If a category is assigned to the figure the category is selected O mam Category C gt Section 9 1 2 Batch setting and managing objects figures for each purpose Category O ou workspace Click this to use the current attribute as the default user setting Set as Default 3 eee O In the next attribute setting the default user setting is displayed gt x Clear Default Click this to return the attribute as the default value to the initial status es O ce za Refer to the next page for details of 1 to 4 Z T D a T m Z lt z x Y A 8 1 Drawing Figures 8 4 8 1 1 Drawing figures 1 Sector This is the setting item only for arc and sector 2 Scale points direction and center line These are the setting items only for scale 3 Set as Default Set the user attribute as the default value Figures with the same attribute can be drawn continuously Circle Style EG Width 3 Dot Clear Default Color Pattern Foreground Category Others v OK Cancel Click the Set As Default button 4 Pattern Foreground Background OSO EAEE AESA EEAS 52525 2525 252505 When the same figure is drawn next time it can be drawn with the values set as def

1 - Mitsubishi Electric

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents